IMAGERUNNER 2206N - Imprimante multifonction laser CANON - Notice d'utilisation et mode d'emploi gratuit

Type de produit	Imprimante multifonction laser monochrome
Marque	Canon
Modèle	imageRUNNER 2206N
Fonctions principales	Copie, impression, numérisation
Vitesse d'impression (A4)	Jusqu'à 22 pages par minute
Résolution d'impression	600 x 600 dpi
Capacité papier standard	250 feuilles (bac 1) + 100 feuilles (bac multifonction)
Capacité papier maximale	Jusqu'à 850 feuilles avec option bac 2
Formats papier supportés	A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, Lettre, Légal, Enveloppes
Impression recto-verso	Automatique (avec option Duplex Unit-C)
Numérisation couleur	Oui (avec option Color Send Kit)
Connectivité réseau	Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base-T, Wi-Fi (optionnel)
Dimensions (L x P x H)	Environ 565 x 693 x 892 mm
Poids	Environ 55 kg
Alimentation	220-240 V CA, 50/60 Hz
Consommation électrique (max)	Environ 1,5 kW
Écran tactile	Oui, écran LCD couleur 5 lignes
Cycle d'utilisation mensuel	Jusqu'à 50 000 pages
Entretien et nettoyage	Nettoyage de la vitre, du rouleau de transfert, du tambour et de l'ensemble de fixation
Sécurité	Gestion des identifiants de service, gestion des ID de département, verrouillage des fonctions
Pièces détachées et réparabilité	Cartouche de toner, tambour, unité de fixation, bacs papier
Informations générales	Notice d'utilisation de 699 pages disponible en téléchargement

FOIRE AUX QUESTIONS - IMAGERUNNER 2206N CANON

Comment charger le papier dans le bac principal ?

Tirez le bac vers vous, abaissez le plateau métallique, ajustez les guides-papier, puis insérez le papier face imprimée vers le haut. Assurez-vous de ne pas dépasser la marque de charge maximale. Refermez le bac et spécifiez le format et le type de papier dans les paramètres.

Comment effectuer une copie recto-verso ?

Placez vos documents dans le chargeur ou sur la vitre. Appuyez sur Copie, puis sélectionnez Recto-verso. Choisissez le type de copie recto-verso souhaité (1 face -> 2 faces, etc.). Appuyez sur Démarrer pour lancer la copie.

Que faire en cas de bourrage papier ?

Ouvrez le capot avant et les capots latéraux indiqués sur l'écran. Retirez délicatement le papier coincé en suivant les flèches. Vérifiez qu'il ne reste aucun morceau. Refermez tous les capots. L'appareil reprendra automatiquement.

Comment remplacer la cartouche de toner ?

Ouvrez le capot avant. Retirez l'ancienne cartouche en la tirant. Déballez la nouvelle cartouche, retirez le ruban de protection, puis insérez-la dans l'appareil jusqu'au déclic. Refermez le capot. L'appareil initialisera automatiquement le nouveau toner.

Comment connecter l'imprimante en Wi-Fi ?

Allez dans Paramètres > Réseau > Réseau sans fil. Sélectionnez Configuration automatique (WPS) ou Recherche de réseaux. Choisissez votre réseau, saisissez la clé de sécurité, puis validez. L'indicateur Wi-Fi s'allumera lorsqu'elle sera connectée.

Comment numériser un document vers un courriel ?

Placez le document dans le chargeur ou sur la vitre. Appuyez sur Numérisation puis sur Envoyer vers e-mail. Saisissez l'adresse e-mail ou sélectionnez-la dans le carnet d'adresses. Appuyez sur Démarrer. Le document sera numérisé et envoyé.

Comment régler la luminosité d'une copie ?

En mode copie, appuyez sur Réglages puis sur Densité. Utilisez les touches - et + pour éclaircir ou assombrir l'image. Vous pouvez également activer le mode Automatique pour un réglage optimal.

Quel type de papier puis-je utiliser ?

L'imprimante accepte le papier ordinaire, recyclé, couleur, épais, enveloppes, transparents, étiquettes et pré-perforé. Les grammages vont de 64 à 128 g/m² selon le type. Consultez le tableau des types de papier dans la notice pour choisir le bon réglage.

Comment imprimer depuis mon smartphone ?

L'imprimante prend en charge AirPrint (iOS) et Google Cloud Print. Assurez-vous que votre appareil mobile et l'imprimante sont sur le même réseau. Sélectionnez l'imprimante dans les options d'impression de votre application et lancez l'impression.

Comment sécuriser l'accès à l'imprimante ?

Activez la Gestion des ID de département depuis les paramètres administrateur. Définissez un code PIN pour chaque département. Les utilisateurs devront saisir leur ID et PIN avant d'utiliser l'appareil. Vous pouvez également restreindre certaines fonctions par département.

MODE D'EMPLOI IMAGERUNNER 2206N CANON

imageRUNNER

2206iF / 2206N

Guide de l'utilisateur

Sommaire

Opérations de base 2

Pièces et leurs fonctions 4

Vue externe 5 Vue interne 7 Panneau de commande 9 Écran 12 Personnalisation de l'écran 16

Connexion à la machine 18

Utilisation de l'écran 21

Saisie de texte 24

Placement des documents 26

Chargement du papier 30

Chargement du papier dans le bac à papier 32 Chargement du papier dans le bac multifonction 36 Chargement des enveloppes dans le bac multifonction 39 Chargement de papier préimprimé 42 45 Enregistrement d'un format de papier personnalisé 47

Enregistrement dans le carnet d'adresses 49

Enregistrement des destinations dans le carnet d'adresses 50 Enregistrement des destinations pour la numérotation en une touche 55 Enregistrement de plusieurs destinations pour la numérotation de groupe 60

Réglage du volume 63

Réglage de l'heure d'arrêt automatique 65

66

Copie 69

Opérations de copie de base 71

Sélection du papier de copie 73

Annulation des copies 74

Divers réglages de copie 76

Agrandissement ou réduction 78 Sélection du type de document 79 Réglage de la densité 80 Copie recto-verso 81 Copie de plusieurs documents sur une seule feuille (2 en 1/4 en 1) 84 Copie des deux côtés d'une carte d'identité sur une page 86 Effacement des bordures sombres et des lignes de cadre (Effacer le cadre) 87 Assemblage des copies par page 89 Division des documents en vis-à-vis en pages séparées pour la copie 91 Copie de documents de tailles différentes ensemble (Originaux de tailles différentes) 92

Configuration des réglages de copie selon vos besoins 94

Modification des réglages par défaut 95

Enregistrement des réglages de copie fréquemment utilisés 96

Télécopie (imageRUNNER 2206iF) 98

Envoi de télécopies 101

Annulation de l'envoi de télécopies 107

Envoi depuis des destinations enregistrées 109

Spécification depuis le carnet d'adresses 110

Sélection directe des destinations en saisissant les numéros de numérotation abrégée 113

Spécification des destinations avec les touches de numérotation abrégée 116

Spécification des destinations précédemment utilisées 118

Spécification des destinations dans un serveur LDAP 121

Divers réglages de télécopie 124

Réglage de la résolution 125

Réglage de la densité 126

Numérisation de documents recto verso 127

Modification des paramètres par défaut 128

Réception de télécopies 129

Envoi et réception de télécopies selon vos besoins 133

Passer un appel avant d'envoyer des télécopies (envoi manuel) 134

Envoi de télécopies à plusieurs destinataires simultanément (diffusion séquentielle) 135

Réception de télécopies en mémoire (réception en mémoire) 137

Transfert des télécopies reçues 140

Sélection d'un document à transférer 141

Transfert automatique de tous les documents reçus 143

Réception de services d'information par télécopie 147

Vérification de l'état et du journal des documents envoyés et reçus 149

Envoi de télécopies depuis votre ordinateur (télécopie PC) 151

Envoi de télécopies PC 152

Utilisation de la machine comme imprimante 155

Impression à partir d'un ordinateur 156

Annulation d'impressions 158

Vérification de l'état d'impression 161

Impression d'un document sécurisé par un code PIN (impression sécurisée) 163

Impression via l'impression sécurisée 164

Configuration des paramètres d'impression selon vos besoins 167

Enregistrement de combinaisons de paramètres d'impression fréquemment utilisés 168

Modification des paramètres par défaut 170

Utilisation de la machine comme scanner 173

Préparation à l'utilisation de la machine comme scanner 174

Numérisation à partir de la machine 175

Numérisation à partir d'un ordinateur 178

Numérisation à l'aide d'une application 179 Configuration des paramètres de numérisation dans ScanGear MF 181 Utilisation de WSD 182

Numérisation pratique avec une opération basée sur la machine 186

Envoi de documents par e-mail directement depuis la machine 187 Enregistrement de documents directement dans un dossier partagé 194 Annulation de l'envoi de documents (e-mail/dossier partagé) 197

Spécification des paramètres détaillés 199

Spécification d'une taille de numérisation 200 Réglage du mode couleur 201 Sélection d'un format de fichier 202 Ajustement de la densité 203 Spécification de l'orientation de votre document 204 Sélection du type de document 205 Numérisation de documents recto verso 206 Ajustement de l'équilibre entre la taille du fichier et la qualité d'image 207 Réglage des valeurs gamma 208

Envoi à l'aide de destinations enregistrées (e-mail/dossier partagé) 209

Spécification à partir du carnet d'adresses 210 Sélection de destinations directement en saisissant des numéros de numérotation abrégée 213 Spécification de destinations avec les boutons de numérotation abrégée 216 Spécification de destinations précédemment utilisées 218 Spécification de destinations dans un serveur LDAP (e-mail) 221

Modification des paramètres par défaut 225 Vérification de l'état et du journal des documents envoyés (e-mail/dossier partagé) 227

Connexion avec des appareils mobiles 230

Connexion avec les appareils mobiles 231

Connexion via un routeur LAN sans fil (connexion LAN) 232 Connexion directe (mode point d'accès) 233

Utilisation de la machine via des applications 235

Utilisation d'AirPrint 236

Impression avec AirPrint 241 Numérisation avec AirPrint 244 Envoi de télécopies avec AirPrint (imageRUNNER 2206iF) 246 Si AirPrint ne peut pas être utilisé 248

Utilisation de Google Cloud Print 249

Gestion de la machine par télécommande 251

Réseau 253

Connexion à un réseau 255

Choix entre LAN filaire ou LAN sans fil 257 Connexion à un LAN filaire 258 Connexion à un LAN sans fil 259 Configuration de la connexion à l'aide du mode bouton poussoir WPS 261 Configuration de la connexion à l'aide du mode code PIN WPS 263

Configuration de la connexion en sélectionnant un routeur sans fil 266 Configuration de la connexion en spécifiant les paramètres détaillés 269 Vérification du SSID et de la clé réseau 273

Configuration des adresses IP 274

Configuration de l'adresse IPv4 275 Configuration des adresses IPv6 278

Affichage des paramètres réseau 282

Configuration de la machine pour l'impression ou l'envoi de télécopies depuis un ordinateur 286

Configuration des protocoles d'impression et des fonctions WSD 287 Configuration des ports d'imprimante 290 Configuration du serveur d'impression 293

Configuration des paramètres de numérisation (e-mail/dossiers partagés) 296

Configuration des paramètres de numérisation (envoi d'e-mail) 297

Configuration des paramètres de base de l'e-mail 298 Configuration des paramètres de communication e-mail 302

Configuration de la machine pour la numérisation vers des dossiers partagés 306 Définition d'un dossier partagé comme emplacement d'enregistrement 307

Configuration de la machine pour votre environnement réseau 311

Configuration des paramètres Ethernet 312 Modification de l'unité de transmission maximale 314 Définition d'un temps d'attente pour la connexion à un réseau 315 Configuration du DNS 316 Configuration de SMB 321 Enregistrement de serveurs LDAP 323 Configuration de SNTP 329 Surveillance et contrôle de la machine avec SNMP 332

Sécurité 338

Protection de la machine contre les accès non autorisés 339

Prévention des accès non autorisés 340 Définition des privilèges d'accès 342

Définition de l'ID du gestionnaire système 343 Définition de la gestion des ID de service 345 Définition d'un code PIN pour l'interface utilisateur distante 352

Authentification par serveur LDAP 354 Restriction des communications à l'aide de pare-feu 359

Spécification des adresses IP pour les règles de pare-feu 360 Spécification des adresses MAC pour les règles de pare-feu 364

Modification des numéros de port 367 Configuration d'un proxy 369

Restriction des fonctions de la machine 371

Restriction de l'accès au carnet d'adresses et aux fonctions d'envoi 372 Définition d'un code PIN pour le carnet d'adresses 373 Limitation des destinations disponibles 374 Interdiction de la télécopie depuis un PC (imageRUNNER 2206iF) 375 Désactivation de l'utilisation des destinations précédemment utilisées 376

Vérification des destinations avant l'envoi de documents (imageRUNNER 2206iF) 377 Interdiction de la diffusion séquentielle (imageRUNNER 2206iF) 379 Restriction de l'impression depuis un ordinateur 380 Restriction des fonctions USB 381 Désactivation de la communication HTTP 382 Désactivation de l'interface utilisateur à distance 383

Implémentation de fonctions de sécurité robustes 384

Activation de la communication chiffrée TLS pour l'interface utilisateur à distance 385 Configuration de l'authentification IEEE 802.1X 389

Configuration des paramètres pour les paires de clés et les certificats numériques 394

Génération de paires de clés 395 Utilisation de paires de clés et de certificats numériques émis par une autorité de certification 402 Vérification des paires de clés et des certificats numériques 405

Utilisation de l'interface utilisateur à distance 408

Démarrage de l'interface utilisateur à distance 409 Écrans de l'interface utilisateur à distance 411 Gestion des documents et vérification de l'état de la machine 415 Configuration des options de menu à partir de l'interface utilisateur à distance 420 Enregistrement/chargement du carnet d'adresses à partir de l'interface utilisateur à distance 422 Enregistrement du carnet d'adresses à partir de l'interface utilisateur à distance 426

Liste des menus de réglage 431

Paramètres réseau 432 Préférences 443 Paramètres de minuterie 449 Paramètres communs 454 Paramètres de copie 458 Paramètres de télécopie (imageRUNNER 2206iF) 461 Paramètres de numérisation 473 Paramètres d'impression 477 Réglage/Maintenance 487 Paramètres de gestion du système 492

Dépannage 502

Dégagement des bourrages papier 504 Mesures pour chaque message 519 Mesures pour chaque code d'erreur 530 Problèmes courants 537

Problèmes d'installation/configuration 539 Problèmes de copie/impression 543 Problèmes de télécopie/téléphone 546 Problèmes divers 548

Lorsque vous ne pouvez pas imprimer correctement 549

Les résultats d'impression ne sont pas satisfaisants 551

Papier froissé ou gondolé 555

Le papier n'est pas chargé correctement 557

Lorsqu'un problème ne peut pas être résolu 559

Entretien 561

Nettoyage de la machine 562

Extérieur 563

Vitre d'exposition 564

Chargeur 566

Rouleau de transfert 570

Tambour 571

Ensemble de fixation 572

Remplacement des cartouches de toner 574

Configuration des informations d'achat pour les consommables 576

Comment remplacer les cartouches de toner 578

Comment remplacer l'unité de tambour 581

Impression des rapports et des listes 585

Rapport de résultat d'envoi de télécopie (imageRUNNER 2206iF) 586

Rapport de résultat d'envoi e-mail/fichier 588

Rapport de gestion des communications 590

Rapport de résultat de réception (imageRUNNER 2206iF) 592

Liste du carnet d'adresses 593

Liste des données utilisateur / Liste des données du gestionnaire système 595

Rapport de gestion des identifiants de service 596

Liste des polices PCL 597

Rapport de journal des frais de copie/impression 598

Affichage du compteur 599

Initialisation des paramètres 601

Initialisation du carnet d'adresses 602

Initialisation du menu 603

Initialisation des paramètres de gestion du système 604

Initialisation de toutes les données/paramètres 605

Pièces de rechange 606

Annexe 608

Logiciels tiers 609

Points forts des fonctions 610

Écologie et économies 611

Amélioration de l'efficacité 614

Passage au numérique 616

Et bien plus encore 619

Spécifications 622

Unité principale 623

Chargeur (DADF-AY) 626 Papier disponible 627 Module d'alimentation par cassette-AD 630 Unité duplex-C 631 Fonction fax (imageRUNNER 2206iF) 632 Fonction numérisation 633 Fonctions d'impression 634 Fonctions de gestion 636 Environnement système 637 Environnement réseau 639

Options 640

Équipement en option 641 Options système 644

Manuels et leur contenu 646

Utilisation du guide de l'utilisateur 647

Disposition de l'écran du guide de l'utilisateur 648 Affichage du guide de l'utilisateur 651

Opérations de base sous Windows 652

Avis 660

Opérations de base

Opérations de base 2

Pièces et leurs fonctions 4 Vue externe 5 Vue interne 7 Panneau de commande 9 Écran 12 Personnalisation de l'écran 16

Connexion à la machine 18 Utilisation de l'écran 21 Saisie de texte 24 Placement des documents 26 Chargement du papier 30 Chargement du papier dans le tiroir à papier 32 Chargement du papier dans le bac multifonction 36 Chargement des enveloppes dans le bac multifonction 39 Chargement de papier préimprimé 42 45 Enregistrement d'un format de papier personnalisé 47 Enregistrement dans le carnet d'adresses 49 Enregistrement de destinations dans le carnet d'adresses 50 Enregistrement de destinations pour la numérotation abrégée 55 Enregistrement de plusieurs destinations pour la numérotation de groupe 60 Réglage du volume 63 Réglage du temps d'arrêt automatique 65 Passage en mode veille 66

Opérations de base

36WC-000

Ce chapitre décrit les opérations de base, telles que l'utilisation du panneau de commande ou le chargement du papier et des documents, qui sont fréquemment effectuées pour utiliser les fonctions de la machine.

Pièces et leurs fonctions

Cette section décrit les pièces extérieures et intérieures de la machine et leurs fonctions, ainsi que l'utilisation des touches du panneau de commande et l'affichage de l'écran. Pièces et leurs fonctions (P. 4)

Utilisation de l'écran

Cette section décrit comment basculer l'affichage et sélectionner des éléments. Utilisation de l'écran (P. 21)

■ Saisie de texte

Cette section décrit comment saisir des caractères et des chiffres pour enregistrer des destinations dans le répertoire, envoyer des télécopies, etc. Saisie de texte (P. 24)

Placement des documents

Cette section décrit comment placer des documents sur la vitre d'exposition et dans le chargeur. Placement des documents (P. 26)

Chargement du papier

Cette section décrit comment charger le papier dans le tiroir à papier et le bac multifonction. Chargement du papier (P. 30)

Enregistrement dans le répertoire

Cette section décrit comment enregistrer des destinations pour l'envoi de télécopies ou de documents numérisés. Enregistrement dans le répertoire (P. 49)

Réglage du volume

Cette section décrit comment régler le volume des divers sons de la machine, tels que ceux émis lorsque l'envoi d'une télécopie est terminé ou lorsqu'une erreur se produit. Réglage du volume (P. 63)

■ Activation du mode veille

Cette section décrit comment activer le mode veille. Activation du mode veille (P. 66)

Pièces et leurs fonctions

36WC-001

Cette section décrit les pièces de la machine (extérieur, côtés avant et arrière, et intérieur) et leurs fonctions. En plus de décrire les pièces de la machine utilisées pour les opérations de base telles que le placement des documents, le chargement du papier et le remplacement des cartouches de toner, cette section décrit également les touches du panneau de commande et l'écran. Lisez cette section pour obtenir des conseils sur la façon d'utiliser correctement la machine.

Vue externe (P. 5) Vue interne (P. 7) Panneau de commande (P. 9)

36WC-002

Lorsque le chargeur de documents DADF-AY et le module d'alimentation cassette-AD sont installés :

REMARQUE

• Les pièces marquées d'un « *1 » sont en option pour l'imageRUNNER 2206N.
• Les pièces marquées d'un « *2 » sont en option pour tous les modèles.
• Les pièces marquées d'un « *3 » sont disponibles uniquement pour l'imageRUNNER 2206iF.

1 Bac multi-usage

Chargez le papier dans le bac multi-usage lorsque vous souhaitez utiliser temporairement un type de papier différent de celui chargé dans le tiroir à papier. Chargement du papier dans le bac multi-usage (P. 36)

2 Chargeur *1

Alimente automatiquement les documents dans la machine pour les numériser. Lorsque deux feuilles ou plus sont chargées dans le chargeur, les documents peuvent être numérisés en continu. Placement des documents (P. 26)

3 Panneau de commande

Le panneau de commande comprend des touches telles que les touches numériques et la touche [Démarrer], un écran et des voyants d'état. Vous pouvez effectuer toutes les opérations et spécifier les réglages à partir du panneau de commande. Panneau de commande (P. 9) Écran (P. 12)

4 Tiroir à papier 1

Chargez le type de papier que vous utilisez fréquemment dans le tiroir à papier. Chargement du papier dans le tiroir à papier (P. 32)

5 Bac à papier *2*

Chargez le type de papier que vous utilisez fréquemment dans le bac à papier. Chargement du papier dans l'imprimante (P. 32)

6 Port LAN

Connectez un câble LAN lorsque vous connectez la machine à un routeur LAN filaire, etc. Connexion à un LAN filaire (P. 258)

7 Port USB

Connectez un câble USB lorsque vous connectez la machine à un ordinateur.

Prise pour téléphone externe *3

Connectez un téléphone externe ou le combiné en option.

9 Prise de ligne téléphonique *3

Connectez un câble téléphonique lorsque vous connectez la machine à une ligne téléphonique.

10 Prise d'alimentation

Branchez le cordon d'alimentation.

Interrupteur d'alimentation

Met la machine sous ou hors tension. Pour redémarrer la machine, éteignez-la, attendez au moins 10 secondes, puis rallumez-la.

Code toner

Ce code indique le type de toner authentique pouvant être utilisé avec la machine. Utilisez un toner dont le code contient les mêmes lettres que le code figurant sur la face avant de la machine.

36WC-003

Lorsque le DADF-AY et le module d'alimentation des cassettes-AD sont installés :

1 Zone de numérisation du chargeur de documents

Les documents chargés dans le chargeur sont automatiquement acheminés vers la zone de numérisation pour être numérisés.

2 Vitre d'exposition

Placez les documents à numériser sur la vitre d'exposition. Utilisez également la vitre d'exposition pour placer des documents épais ou reliés, tels que des livres, lorsqu'ils ne peuvent pas être chargés dans le chargeur. Placement des documents (P. 26)

3 Capot gauche du tiroir 1

Ouvrez ce capot pour éliminer un bourrage papier dans le tiroir 1. Élimination des bourrages (P. 504)

4 Capot gauche du tiroir 2 (capot du module d'alimentation des cassettes-AD en option)

Ouvrez ce capot pour éliminer un bourrage papier dans le tiroir 2. Élimination des bourrages (P. 504)

5 Ensemble de fixation

En cas de bourrage papier autour de l'ensemble de fixation, éliminez le bourrage à partir de cet endroit. ▸ Élimination des bourrages (P. 504)

6 Capot gauche

Ouvrez ce capot pour éliminer un bourrage papier à l'intérieur de l'unité principale. Élimination des bourrages (P. 504)

7 Cartouche de toner

Remplacez la cartouche de toner lorsque le toner est épuisé. Voir « Remplacement des cartouches de toner » (P. 578).

8 Tambour

Remplacez le tambour avant l'expiration de sa durée de vie. Voir « Remplacement du tambour » (P. 581).

9 Capot avant

Ouvrez ce capot pour remplacer la cartouche de toner ou le tambour. Voir « Remplacement des cartouches de toner » (P. 578).

1 Touche [Accueil]

Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher l'écran. Voir « Personnalisation de l'écran » (P. 16).

2 Écran

Vous pouvez visualiser la progression des travaux de copie et autres, ainsi que les états d'erreur. L'écran est un panneau tactile qui vous permet de le toucher pour spécifier les réglages. Voir « Écran » (P. 12) et « Utilisation de l'écran » (P. 21).

3 Touche [Réglages papier]

Appuyez sur cette touche pour sélectionner une source de papier, comme un tiroir à papier ou le bac multifonction, et pour enregistrer le format et le type de papier.

4 Touche [Moniteur d'état]

Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier l'état de l'impression, consulter l'historique d'utilisation ou afficher les paramètres réseau tels que l'adresse IP de l'appareil. Vous pouvez également vérifier l'état de l'appareil, comme les quantités restantes de papier et de toner, ou si des erreurs se sont produites. Voir « Écran » (P. 12).

5 Touche [Reset]

Appuyez pour réinitialiser les paramètres.

6 Touche [Copie carte d'identité]

Appuyez pour copier un original de format carte, tel qu'une carte d'identité ou un permis de conduire. Copie des deux côtés d'une carte d'identité sur une seule page (P. 86)

7 Touche [Retour]

Appuyez pour revenir à l'écran précédent. Si vous appuyez sur cette touche lors de la spécification de paramètres, par exemple, les paramètres ne sont pas appliqués et l'affichage revient à l'écran précédent.

8 Touche [*]

Appuyez pour changer le type de texte saisi. - Appuyez pour utiliser la numérotation par tonalité, par exemple lors de la réception de services d'informations par fax. Réception de services d'informations par fax (P. 147)

9 Touches numériques (touches [0] à [9])

Appuyez pour saisir des chiffres et du texte. Saisie de texte (P. 24)

10 Touche [#]

Appuyez pour saisir des symboles tels que "@" ou "/".

Touche [Économie d'énergie]

Appuyez pour mettre la machine en mode veille. La touche s'allume en vert lorsque la machine est en mode veille. Appuyez à nouveau sur la touche pour quitter le mode veille. Entrée en mode veille (P. 66)

Touche [Compteur]

Appuyez pour afficher le nombre total de pages utilisées pour des opérations telles que la copie ou l'impression sur l'écran du panneau tactile. Vous pouvez également vérifier le numéro de série de la machine (trois lettres et cinq chiffres).

Touche [Arrêt]

Appuyez pour annuler la copie, la télécopie et d'autres opérations.

14 Touche [Départ]

Appuyez pour numériser ou copier des documents.

15 Touche [Effacer]

Appuyez pour supprimer les nombres et textes saisis.

16 Voyant [Erreur]

Clignote ou s'allume lorsqu'une erreur telle qu'un bourrage papier se produit.

Voyant Wi-Fi

S'allume lorsque la machine est connectée à un réseau local sans fil.

Voyant [Traitement/Données]

Clignote pendant que des opérations telles que l'envoi ou l'impression sont en cours. S'allume lorsqu'il y a des documents en attente de traitement.

19 Touche [Connexion/Déconnexion]

Appuyez pour vous connecter/déconnecter lorsque la gestion des codes départementaux a été définie.

LIENS

Utilisation de l'écran (P. 21)

L'écran d'initialisation des opérations et les écrans de spécification des paramètres apparaissent sur l'affichage. Vous pouvez également consulter la progression des travaux et les messages ici. Touchez l'écran pour le faire fonctionner.

Écran

L'écran s'affiche lorsque l'appareil est mis sous tension ou lorsque vous appuyez sur le panneau de commande. Utilisez cet écran pour spécifier les paramètres et enregistrer les fonctions.

REMARQUE

• Pour imageRUNNER 2206N, les fonctions marquées de ^** ne peuvent être utilisées que lorsque le kit d'envoi couleur en option est installé.

Fonctions de bascule

Basculez entre les fonctions copie, fax, impression sécurisée ou numérisation. Copie (P. 69) Envoi de télécopies (imageRUNNER 2206iF) (P. 98) Impression d'un document sécurisé par un code PIN (impression sécurisée) (P. 163) Utilisation de l'appareil comme scanner (P. 173)

, , et de nombreux autres paramètres de l'appareil démarrent à partir de ce bouton. Liste des menus de paramètres (P. 431)

Vous pouvez enregistrer des combinaisons de paramètres de copie fréquemment utilisées et les rappeler facilement en cas de besoin. Enregistrement des paramètres de copie fréquemment utilisés (P. 96)

Carnet d'adresses*

Affiche les destinations enregistrées dans le carnet d'adresses. Utilisez également cette fonction pour enregistrer/modifier des destinations dans le carnet d'adresses. Enregistrement dans le carnet d'adresses (P. 49)

e

Utilisez cette fonction pour établir une connexion sans fil directe à un appareil mobile. Connexion directe (mode point d'accès) (P. 233)

Écran d'accueil > Paramètres

Permet de modifier l'ordre d'affichage des boutons à l'écran. Personnalisation de l'écran (P. 16)

9 à

Si vous enregistrez des destinations à l'avance comme numéros de numérotation abrégée, elles peuvent être affichées rapidement. Spécification des destinations avec les boutons de numérotation abrégée (P. 116)

Numérotation par code*

Si vous enregistrez des destinations à l'avance comme numéros de numérotation par code, elles peuvent être affichées rapidement en saisissant simplement un numéro à trois chiffres. Enregistrement dans le carnet d'adresses (P. 49)

Écran

Lorsque vous appuyez sur , un écran s'affiche qui vous permet de vérifier l'état des documents en cours d'impression, d'envoi ou de réception, ainsi que l'état de la machine comme le niveau de toner ou les informations de configuration réseau telles que l'adresse IP de la machine.

REMARQUE

• Pour imageRUNNER 2206N, les fonctions marquées d'un « *1 » ne peuvent être utilisées que si le kit d'envoi couleur en option est installé.
• Les fonctions marquées d'un « *2 » ne sont disponibles que pour l'imageRUNNER 2206iF.

a

Affiche les détails de toute erreur survenue. Contremesures pour chaque message (P. 519)

Informations sur l'appareil

Affiche l'état de la machine, comme la quantité de papier ou de toner restant.

Indique si le papier est chargé dans chaque source de papier.

Affiche la quantité de toner restante. Selon l'environnement dans lequel se trouve votre appareil, d'autres pièces internes peuvent atteindre la fin de leur durée de vie avant que le toner ne soit épuisé.

< Utilisation de la mémoire d'impression sécurisée >

Affiche la quantité de mémoire actuellement utilisée pour stocker les données de documents sécurisés. Impression d'un document sécurisé par un code PIN (Impression sécurisée) (P. 163)

État des travaux de copie, d'impression, d'envoi*1 et de réception*2

Affiche l'état actuel de l'élément sélectionné. L'écran est présenté ci-dessous à titre d'exemple.

Affiche les paramètres réseau tels que l'adresse IP de l'appareil et l'état de la communication sans fil.

Consultation des paramètres réseau (P. 282)

Lorsqu'un message s'affiche

Des messages s'affichent en haut de l'écran dans des situations telles que le niveau de toner faible ou un capot laissé ouvert. L'affichage alterne entre l'écran normal et le message.

Mesures à prendre pour chaque message (P. 519)

REMARQUE

Lorsque ou s'affiche, appuyez pour voir la notification.

Lorsqu'une erreur se produit

Dans certains cas, lorsqu'une erreur se produit, des instructions sur la façon de répondre à l'erreur s'affichent. Suivez les instructions à l'écran pour résoudre le problème. L'écran affiché en cas de bourrage papier est présenté ci-dessous à titre d'exemple ( Mesures à prendre pour chaque message (P. 519)).

LIENS

Personnalisation de l'écran (P. 16) Utilisation de l'écran (P. 21)

Personnalisation de l'écran

36WC-006

Vous pouvez modifier l'ordre d'affichage des boutons à l'écran en fonction de votre application ou de la disposition préférée.

Modification de l'ordre d'affichage des boutons de l'écran d'accueil

1 Appuyez sur et touchez .

• Si un écran de saisie de l'ID et du PIN du gestionnaire système s'affiche, saisissez l'ID et le PIN du gestionnaire système, touchez , puis appuyez sur (ID). Réglage de l'ID du gestionnaire système (P. 343)

2 Touchez .

3 Touchez le bouton à déplacer.

4 Touchez ou pour déplacer le bouton, puis touchez .

5 Répétez les étapes 3 et 4 pour déplacer tous les boutons que vous souhaitez déplacer.

6 Touchez .

Pour insérer des espaces vides à l'écran

1 Appuyez sur et touchez .

• Si un écran de saisie de l'ID et du PIN du gestionnaire système s'affiche, saisissez l'ID et le PIN du gestionnaire système, appuyez sur , puis sur (ID). Réglage de l'ID du gestionnaire système (P. 343)

2 Appuyez sur .

3 Appuyez sur le bouton où vous souhaitez insérer un espace vide, puis appuyez sur .

Pour supprimer un espace vide inséré, sélectionnez-le, appuyez sur , puis passez à l'étape 5.

4 Appuyez sur .

5 Appuyez sur .

LIENS

Affichage (P. 12)

Connexion à la machine

36WC-007

Si la gestion des ID de service est activée ou si les ID du gestionnaire système sont activés, vous devez vous connecter avant d'utiliser la machine. Vous devez également vous connecter si l'utilisation des fonctions de télécopie et de numérisation est restreinte.

REMARQUE

L'ID et le PIN du gestionnaire système sont définis sur "7654321" en usine. Il est recommandé de modifier ce réglage pour une sécurité accrue.

Connexion à la gestion des ID de service (P. 18) Connexion à Envoi autorisé (P. 19)

Connexion à la gestion des ID de service

Lorsque l'écran de connexion apparaît, utilisez la procédure ci-dessous pour saisir l'ID du département et le code PIN.

1 Appuyez sur (ou ). 2 Saisissez un numéro de sept chiffres maximum à l'aide des touches numériques, puis appuyez sur .

Si aucun code PIN n'est enregistré, passez à l'étape 5.

3 Sélectionnez . 4 Saisissez un numéro de sept chiffres maximum à l'aide des touches numériques, puis appuyez sur .

• Lorsque < PIN(Confirm)> s'affiche, saisissez à nouveau le code PIN pour confirmer.

5 Appuyez sur ID. L'écran de connexion se transforme en écran principal.

• Après avoir utilisé la machine, appuyez à nouveau sur ID pour afficher l'écran de connexion.

Connexion à Envoi autorisé

Si le paramètre d'autorisation de la fonction Envoi ( Authentification du serveur LDAP (P. 354) est activé, l'écran de connexion Envoi autorisé apparaît lors de l'utilisation de la fonction fax ou numérisation.

Enter User Name, Password, and Server Name Login/Logout: Press ID

User Name: Password: Server Name:

REMARQUE

• Pour imageRUNNER 2206N, ces fonctions ne peuvent être utilisées que si le kit d'envoi couleur en option est installé.

1 Appuyez sur . 2 Saisissez votre nom d'utilisateur à l'aide des touches numériques, puis appuyez sur .

3 Appuyez sur . 4 Saisissez le mot de passe à l'aide des touches numériques, puis appuyez sur . 5 Appuyez sur et sélectionnez le serveur pour votre authentification.

6 Appuyez sur ID

L'écran de connexion se transforme en écran principal.

Après avoir fini d'utiliser la machine, appuyez à nouveau sur ID pour afficher l'écran de connexion.

REMARQUE :

Si l'écran apparaît

• Si vous êtes connecté à la fois à Envoi autorisé et à Gestion des codes départementaux, une boîte de dialogue apparaît dans laquelle vous pouvez sélectionner les éléments dont vous souhaitez vous déconnecter. Si vous souhaitez vous déconnecter d'Envoi

autorisé (fonction fax ou scan) tout en restant connecté à Gestion des codes départementaux, sélectionnez . Dans tous les autres cas, sélectionnez .

LIENS

Configuration de la gestion des codes départementaux (P. 345) Configuration de l'ID administrateur système (P. 343) Authentification du serveur LDAP (P. 354)

L'écran est un panneau tactile, vous permettant d'opérer directement sur l'écran.

IMPORTANT

Évitez les actions suivantes.

L'écran peut mal fonctionner ou être endommagé.

Appuyer avec force - Appuyer avec des objets pointus (ongles, stylo à bille, crayon, etc.) - Opérer avec les mains mouillées ou sales - Opérer l'écran alors qu'un objet est posé dessus

Toucher

Touchez l'écran légèrement et rapidement. Utilisez pour sélectionner ou valider des éléments.

Toucher longuement

Maintenez le doigt sur l'écran. Lorsque le texte ne peut pas être entièrement affiché sur une seule ligne ("..." apparaît), touchez et maintenez la ligne pour faire défiler tout le texte. Cela augmente ou diminue également en continu le taux de zoom de la copie.

Sélection d'éléments

Touchez un nom d'élément ou un bouton pour effectuer une sélection.

REMARQUE

Si un élément est touché par erreur

Faites glisser votre doigt loin de l'élément puis relâchez-le pour annuler la sélection.

Pour revenir à l'écran précédent

Appuyez sur pour revenir à l'écran précédent.

Défilement de l'écran

La barre de défilement est affichée à l'écran lorsqu'il reste des informations non affichées. Si la barre de défilement est affichée, touchez / pour faire défiler l'écran. L'écran change page par page, et le numéro de page est affiché dans la barre de défilement.

Modification des valeurs et des réglages

Modification des valeurs

Touchez / pour saisir des valeurs. Si une icône telle que celle ci-dessous est affichée en haut à gauche de l'écran, vous pouvez saisir les valeurs directement à l'aide des touches numériques.

REMARQUE

Pour déplacer le curseur

Lorsque / s'affiche, touchez pour déplacer le curseur.

Modification des valeurs des réglages

Pour ajuster une valeur sur une échelle, touchez <-> / <+.

CONSEILS

• Vous pouvez modifier divers réglages liés à l'affichage, tels que la vitesse de défilement ou la langue d'affichage : Paramètres d'affichage (P. 445)
• Pour modifier l'écran affiché automatiquement lorsque la machine reste inactive pendant une durée déterminée : Fonction après réinitialisation automatique (P. 451)

Utilisez l'écran et les touches numériques pour saisir du texte et des valeurs.

Changement du type de texte

Touchez <A / a / 12> pour changer le type de texte saisi. Le type de texte actuellement sélectionné est indiqué par "A", "a" ou "12" affiché en haut à droite du champ de saisie de texte.

REMARQUE

Vous pouvez également appuyer sur * pour changer le type de texte.

Types de texte pouvant être saisis

Saisissez du texte avec les touches numériques et l'écran. Les textes pouvant être saisis sont énumérés ci-dessous.

Key	A	a	12
1	@ . - _/		1
2	ABC	abc	2
3	DEF	def	3
4	GHI	ghi	4
5	JKL	jkl	5
6	MNO	mno	6
7	PQRS	pqrs	7
8	TUV	tuv	8
9	WXYZ	wxyz	9
0	(Not available)		0
#	(space) -. * # !",;;^ ` _ = / | '? $ @ % & +\~() [ ] { }<>		(Not available)

REMARQUE

Appuyez sur # ou touchez <#> lorsque le type de texte saisi est ou pour afficher les symboles saisissables à l'écran. Touchez les symboles pour les saisir.

Suppression de texte

Chaque pression sur supprime un caractère. Maintenez enfoncé pour supprimer tout le texte saisi.

Déplacement du curseur (saisie d'un espace)

Appuyez sur ou pour déplacer le curseur. Pour saisir un espace, déplacez le curseur à la fin du texte, puis appuyez sur ▷

Exemple de saisie de texte et de nombres

Exemple : "Canon-1"

1 Appuyez à plusieurs reprises sur (ou sur ) jusqu'à ce que soit sélectionné. 2 Appuyez à plusieurs reprises sur 2 jusqu'à ce que la lettre "C" soit sélectionnée. 3 Appuyez à plusieurs reprises sur < A / a / 12> (ou sur 掌) jusqu'à ce que < a> soit sélectionné. 4 Appuyez à plusieurs reprises sur 2 jusqu'à ce que la lettre "a" soit sélectionnée. 5 Appuyez à plusieurs reprises sur 6 jusqu'à ce que la lettre "n" soit sélectionnée. 6 Appuyez à plusieurs reprises sur 6 jusqu'à ce que la lettre "o" soit sélectionnée. 7 Appuyez à plusieurs reprises sur 6 jusqu'à ce que la lettre "n" soit sélectionnée. 8 Appuyez à plusieurs reprises sur 1 jusqu'à ce que le symbole "-" soit sélectionné. 9 Appuyez à plusieurs reprises sur < A / a / 12> (ou sur *) jusqu'à ce que < 12> soit sélectionné. 10 Appuyez sur 1. 11 Appuyez sur .

Placez les documents sur la vitre d'exposition ou dans le chargeur. Utilisez la vitre d'exposition pour numériser des documents épais ou reliés, comme des livres. Vous pouvez charger deux feuilles ou plus dans le chargeur pour une numérisation continue. Pour plus d'informations sur les types de documents pouvant être placés sur la vitre ou dans le chargeur, et sur la zone numérisable, voir Unité principale (P. 623) ou Chargeur (DADF-AY) (P. 626).

Placement des documents sur la vitre d'exposition (P. 26)

Placement des documents dans le chargeur (P. 27)

IMPORTANT

Utilisez des documents complètement secs

Lors du placement des documents, assurez-vous que toute colle, encre ou correcteur liquide sur les documents a complètement séché.

Pour éviter les bourrages papier

Ne placez pas les types de documents suivants dans le chargeur, car cela pourrait provoquer des bourrages papier :

• Papier froissé ou plié, papier carbone ou à dos carbone, papier enroulé ou roulé, papier couché, papier déchiré
• Papier pelure ou papier fin, documents agrafés ou attachés
• Papier imprimé par une imprimante à transfert thermique, transparents

REMARQUE

Pour numériser les documents avec plus de précision

Les documents placés dans le chargeur sont numérisés pendant qu'ils sont introduits dans la machine. En revanche, les documents placés sur la vitre d'exposition restent dans une position fixe pendant leur numérisation. Pour garantir des résultats de numérisation plus précis, il est recommandé de placer les documents sur la vitre d'exposition.

Pour numériser du papier calque ou des transparents

Pour numériser des documents transparents (par exemple, du papier calque ou des transparents), placez-les sur la vitre d'exposition.

Placement des documents sur la vitre d'exposition

1 Ouvrez le capot du chargeur/la vitre.

2 Placez le document face vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition.

• Alignez le coin du document avec le coin supérieur gauche de la vitre d'exposition.

REMARQUE :

Pour numériser des documents transparents (par exemple, du papier calque ou des transparents), couvrez-les avec une feuille de papier blanc ordinaire.

3 Fermez délicatement le capot du chargeur/la vitre.

La machine est prête à numériser le document. - Lorsque la numérisation est terminée, retirez le document de la vitre d'exposition.

Placement des documents dans le chargeur

REMARQUE

• Pour imageRUNNER 2206N, ces fonctions ne peuvent être utilisées que si le DADF-AY en option est installé.

1 Écartez les guides de documents.

• Faites glisser les guides de documents vers l'extérieur jusqu'à ce qu'ils soient légèrement plus écartés que la largeur réelle du document.

2 Éventez la pile de documents et alignez les bords.

• Éventez la pile de documents en petites quantités, puis alignez les bords en tapotant légèrement la pile sur une surface plane à quelques reprises.

3 Placez le(s) document(s) face vers le haut dans le chargeur.

IMPORTANT :

• Jusqu'à 50 feuilles peuvent être chargées à la fois. Si 50 feuilles ou plus sont chargées, la numérisation peut s'arrêter ou un bourrage papier peut se produire.

4 Alignez les guides de documents contre les bords du document.

• Faites glisser les guides de documents vers l'intérieur jusqu'à ce qu'ils soient alignés fermement contre les bords du document.

La machine est prête à numériser le document.

IMPORTANT :

Alignez les guides de document fermement contre les bords du document.

Des guides de document trop lâches ou trop serrés peuvent provoquer des bourrages papier ou des erreurs d'alimentation.

Pendant la numérisation des documents

N'ajoutez pas et ne retirez pas de documents.

Lorsque la numérisation est terminée

Retirez les documents numérisés sous le chargeur pour éviter les bourrages papier.

Chargement du papier

36WC-00C

Vous pouvez charger le papier dans le tiroir à papier ou dans le bac multifonction. Chargez le papier que vous utilisez habituellement dans le tiroir à papier. Le tiroir à papier est pratique lorsque vous utilisez de grandes quantités de papier. Utilisez le bac multifonction lorsque vous utilisez temporairement un format ou un type de papier qui n'est pas chargé dans le tiroir à papier. Voir Papier disponible (P. 627) pour les formats de papier disponibles.

Type de papier et réglage pour la machine

Reportez-vous au tableau ci-dessous pour spécifier les réglages du papier en fonction du type et du grammage du papier à charger dans la source de papier. Pour plus d'informations sur la façon de spécifier les réglages du papier sur la machine, voir ▸ Spécification du format et du type de papier (P. 45). Pour la quantité de papier pouvant être chargée dans chaque source de papier, voir ▸ Papier disponible (P. 627).

Paper Type	Paper Weight	Paper Setting on the Machine
Plain paper	64 to 75 g/m2	<Plain 1 (64-75 g/m2)>
	76 to 90 g/m2	<Plain 2 (76-90 g/m2)>
Recycled paper	64 to 80 g/m2	<Recycled (64-80 g/m2)>
Color paper	64 to 80 g/m2	<Color (64-80 g/m2)>
Heavy paper	91 to 105 g/m2	<Heavy 1 (91-105 g/m2)>
	106 to 128 g/m2	<Heavy 2 (106-128 g/m2)>
Bond paper	75 to 90 g/m2	<Bond>
Envelope	—	<Envelope>
Pre-punched	75 to 80 g/m2	<Pre-Punched>
Transparency	—	<Transparency>
Label	—	<Labels>

IMPORTANT

N'utilisez pas les types de papier suivants :

• Papier froissé ou plissé, papier gondolé ou enroulé, papier déchiré, papier humide, papier très fin
• Papier imprimé par une imprimante à transfert thermique

Papier très texturé Papier brillant

Manipulation et stockage du papier

• Stockez le papier sur une surface plane.
• Conservez le papier dans son emballage d'origine pour le protéger de l'humidité ou de la sécheresse.
• Ne stockez pas le papier de manière à ce qu'il se déforme ou se plie.
• Ne stockez pas le papier verticalement et n'empilez pas trop de papier.
• Ne stockez pas le papier à la lumière directe du soleil, ni dans un endroit soumis à une humidité élevée, à la sécheresse ou à des variations brusques de température ou d'humidité.

REMARQUE

Lors de l'impression sur du papier ayant absorbé de l'humidité

De la vapeur peut s'échapper de la zone de sortie du papier, ou des gouttelettes d'eau peuvent se former sur le dos du panneau de commande ou autour de la zone de sortie du papier. Ces phénomènes sont tout à fait normaux et se produisent lorsque la chaleur générée par la fixation du toner sur le papier provoque l'évaporation de l'humidité contenue dans le papier (ce phénomène est plus susceptible de se produire à basse température ambiante).

LIENS

Enregistrement d'un format de papier personnalisé (P. 47)

Chargement du papier dans le bac à papier

36WC-00E

Chargez le papier que vous utilisez habituellement dans le bac à papier. Lorsque vous souhaitez imprimer sur un papier qui n'est pas chargé dans le bac à papier, chargez le papier dans le bac multifonction. Chargement du papier dans le bac multifonction (P. 36)

Tenez la poignée du tiroir à papier et tirez-le jusqu'à ce qu'il s'arrête.

2 Poussez la plaque métallique vers le bas pour la verrouiller.

3 Ajustez la position des guides papier.

Lors du chargement du papier dans le tiroir à papier 1

1 Tout en pressant la partie supérieure du guide droit, faites-le glisser pour l'aligner sur l'indicateur de format du papier à charger.

2 Tout en pressant la partie supérieure du guide avant, faites-le glisser pour l'aligner sur l'indicateur de format du papier à charger.

Lors du chargement du papier dans le tiroir à papier 2

1 Détachez le guide de fin et rattachez-le aux fentes alignées avec la marque indiquant le format de papier souhaité.

2 Soulevez le levier de verrouillage sur le guide coulissant avant, et faites-le glisser vers l'arrière ou l'avant pour l'aligner sur la rainure marquée du format de papier souhaité.

3 Abaissez le levier de verrouillage pour verrouiller le guide coulissant avant en place.

4 Préparez le papier.

• Éventez bien la pile de papier et tapez-la sur une surface plane pour aligner les bords.

REMARQUE :

Abréviations de formats sur les guides papier

Les abréviations sur les guides papier dans le tiroir à papier indiquent les formats de papier comme suit :

LGL : Legal, LTR : Letter, STMT : Statement

5 Insérez le papier dans le bac à papier.

1 Vérifiez que le réglage du format de papier du bac correspond au format du papier à charger. 2 Chargez la pile de papier face imprimable vers le haut, contre le guide gauche du bac.

IMPORTANT :

Ne dépassez pas la limite de chargement lors du chargement du papier.

Assurez-vous que la pile de papier ne dépasse pas la limite de chargement. Charger trop de papier peut provoquer des bourrages.

REMARQUE :

Lors du chargement d'enveloppes ou de papier préimprimé, voir Chargement des enveloppes dans le bac multifonction (P. 39) ou Chargement de papier préimprimé (P. 42).

Insérez doucement le bac à papier dans la machine.

Continuez vers Spécification du format et du type de papier (P. 45).

IMPORTANT :

Lors du changement de format ou de type de papier

Si vous chargez un papier de format ou de type différent, assurez-vous de modifier les réglages. Si vous ne modifiez pas les réglages, la machine ne peut pas imprimer correctement.

LIENS

Papier disponible (P. 627)

Chargement du papier dans le bac multifonction

Lorsque vous souhaitez imprimer sur un papier qui n'est pas chargé dans le bac à papier, chargez le papier dans le bac multifonction. Chargez le papier que vous utilisez habituellement dans le bac à papier. Chargement du papier dans le bac à papier (P. 32)

1 Ouvrez le bac multifonction.

• Sortez le bac auxiliaire (a) et dépliez le prolongateur de bac (b) lors du chargement de papier grand format.

2 Ajustez les guides coulissants ( ) à la taille du papier.

3 Insérez le papier dans le bac multifonction jusqu'à ce qu'il s'arrête.

• Chargez le papier face imprimable vers le bas.
• Éventez bien la pile de papier et tapez-la sur une surface plane pour aligner les bords.

IMPORTANT :

Ne dépassez pas la marque de limite de chargement lors du chargement du papier.

Assurez-vous que la pile de papier ne dépasse pas la marque de limite de chargement (a). Charger trop de papier peut provoquer des bourrages papier.

REMARQUE :

Lors du chargement d'enveloppes ou de papier avec logo, voir Chargement des enveloppes dans le bac multifonction (P. 39) ou Chargement de papier préimprimé (P. 42).

Continuez vers Spécification du format et du type de papier (P. 45)

Impression au verso de papier déjà imprimé (impression recto verso manuelle)

Vous pouvez imprimer au verso de papier déjà imprimé. Aplatissez les éventuelles courbures du papier imprimé et insérez-le dans le bac multifonction dans l'orientation indiquée ci-dessous (a), face à imprimer vers le bas (face précédemment imprimée vers le haut).

• Vous ne pouvez utiliser que le papier imprimé avec cette machine.

Chargement des enveloppes dans le bac multifonction

36WC-00H

Assurez-vous d'aplatir les éventuelles courbures des enveloppes avant de les charger. Faites également attention à l'orientation des enveloppes et au côté qui doit être vers le haut.

Avant de charger les enveloppes (P. 39)

Orientation de chargement (P. 40)

REMARQUE

Cette section décrit comment charger les enveloppes dans l'orientation souhaitée, ainsi que les procédures à effectuer avant le chargement. Pour une description de la procédure générale de chargement du papier dans le tiroir à papier ou le bac multifonction, voir Chargement du papier dans le tiroir à papier (P. 32) ou Chargement du papier dans le bac multifonction (P. 36).

Avant de charger les enveloppes

Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour préparer les enveloppes avant le chargement.

REMARQUE

10 enveloppes à la fois peuvent être chargées dans le bac multifonction. Suivez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure ci-dessous pour préparer l'enveloppe au chargement.

1 Fermez le rabat de chaque enveloppe.

2 Aplatissez-les pour libérer l'air restant et assurez-vous que les bords sont bien pressés.

3 Détendez les coins rigides des enveloppes et aplatissez les éventuelles courbures.

4 Alignez les bords des enveloppes sur une surface plane.

Orientation de chargement

Chargez les enveloppes en orientation portrait, bord court en premier, avec le côté non collé (côté avant) vers le haut.

Chargez les enveloppes comme indiqué dans l'illustration ci-dessous (a : sens d'alimentation).

Chargement de papier préimprimé

Lorsque vous utilisez du papier préimprimé avec un logo, faites attention à l'orientation du papier lors du chargement dans la source de papier. Chargez le papier correctement afin que l'impression soit effectuée sur le même côté que le logo.

Chargement de papier avec logos en orientation portrait (P. 42)

Chargement de papier avec logos en orientation paysage (P. 43)

REMARQUE

• Cette section décrit comment charger du papier préimprimé avec la bonne orientation. Pour une description de la procédure générale de chargement du papier dans le tiroir à papier ou le bac multifonction, voir Chargement du papier dans le tiroir à papier (P. 32) ou Chargement du papier dans le bac multifonction (P. 36).
• L'orientation du papier peut varier en fonction des réglages dans .

Chargement de papier avec logos en orientation portrait

La méthode de chargement varie selon la taille du papier avec logo et la source de papier utilisée.

Chargement de papier A4 avec logos

Chargez le papier de sorte que le logo soit face vers le haut dans le tiroir à papier et face vers le bas dans le bac multifonction, comme illustré ci-dessous.

Tiroir à papier Bac multifonction

Faites attention à l'orientation lors du placement d'un document. Placez-le comme suit : le document face vers le haut dans le chargeur et face vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition.

Chargeur

Vitre d'exposition

Chargement de papier A3 avec logos

Chargez le papier de sorte que le logo soit face vers le haut dans le tiroir à papier et face vers le bas dans le bac multifonction, comme illustré ci-dessous.

Tiroir à papier Bac multifonction

Faites attention à l'orientation lors du placement d'un document. Placez-le comme suit : le document face vers le haut dans le chargeur et face vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition.

Chargeur

Vitre d'exposition

Chargement de papier avec logos en orientation paysage

La méthode de chargement varie selon la taille du papier avec logo et la source de papier utilisée.

Chargement du papier A4 avec logos

Chargez le papier de sorte que le logo soit orienté vers le haut dans le tiroir à papier et vers le bas dans le bac multifonction, comme illustré ci-dessous.

Tiroir à papier Bac multifonction

Faites attention à l'orientation lors du placement d'un document. Placez-le comme suit : le document face vers le haut dans le chargeur et face vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition.

Chargeur

Vitre d'exposition

Chargement du papier A3 avec logos

Chargez le papier de sorte que le logo soit orienté vers le haut dans le tiroir à papier et vers le bas dans le bac multifonction, comme illustré ci-dessous.

Tiroir à papier

Bac multifonction

ABC

38A

Faites attention à l'orientation lors du placement d'un document. Placez-le comme suit : le document face vers le haut dans le chargeur et face vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition.

Chargeur

Vitre d'exposition

Spécification du format et du type de papier

36WC-00K

Vous devez spécifier les paramètres de format et de type de papier en fonction du papier chargé. Assurez-vous de modifier les paramètres papier lorsque vous chargez un papier différent de celui chargé précédemment. Vous pouvez également enregistrer un format et un type de papier par défaut pour le bac multifonction, ce qui est pratique si vous chargez toujours du papier de même format et de même type.

IMPORTANT

Si le réglage ne correspond pas au format et au type du papier chargé, un bourrage papier ou une erreur d'impression peut se produire.

1 Appuyez sur

2 Sélectionnez la source de papier.

Si le même format/type de papier est toujours défini dans le bac multifonction, touchez .

Si vous souhaitez enregistrer le papier dans le tiroir 1 ou le tiroir 2, touchez ou .

3 Sélectionnez le format du papier chargé.

• Si le format du papier chargé n'est pas affiché, touchez .

4 Sélectionnez le type de papier chargé.

ASTUCE

Lorsque le format de papier fréquemment utilisé est connu

Vous pouvez configurer la machine pour afficher uniquement les formats de papier fréquemment utilisés dans l'écran de sélection.

1 Appuyez sur . 2 Touchez . 3 Sélectionnez la source de papier. 4 Sélectionnez les formats de papier fréquemment utilisés.

REMARQUE :

Les formats de papier sans coche sont affichés à l'écran.

5 Touchez .

LIENS

Chargement du papier dans le tiroir à papier (P. 32)

Papier disponible (P. 627)

Enregistrement d'un format de papier personnalisé

36WC-00L

Vous pouvez enregistrer un format et un type de papier personnalisés à charger dans le bac multifonction.

1 Appuyez sur

2 Touchez .

3 Touchez .

4 Touchez .

5 Spécifiez le format de papier.

1 Spécifiez la longueur du côté <X>.

• Touchez <X>.
• Saisissez la longueur du côté à l'aide de / , avec / pour déplacer le curseur entre les chiffres pour saisir les nombres entiers et les fractions, puis touchez .

2 Spécifiez la longueur du côté .

• Touchez .
• Saisissez la longueur du côté , puis touchez .

3 Touchez .

6 Sélectionnez le type de papier.

LIENS

Chargement du papier dans l'imprimante papier (P. 32) Chargement du papier dans le bac multifonction (P. 36)

Enregistrement dans le carnet d'adresses

36WC-00R

Vous pouvez enregistrer des destinations dans le carnet d'adresses ou en numérotation abrégée. Vous pouvez enregistrer des destinations de fax/scan fréquemment utilisées dans le carnet d'adresses et les sélectionner facilement en cas de besoin. Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 104 destinations dans le carnet d'adresses. Les destinations peuvent être recherchées par ordre alphabétique, à partir des listes du carnet d'adresses, ou en saisissant des numéros à trois chiffres (numéros de numérotation codée) ( Enregistrement de destinations dans le carnet d'adresses (P. 50)). Vous pouvez également spécifier des destinations plus rapidement en utilisant les fonctions suivantes.

REMARQUE

• Pour imageRUNNER 2206N, cette fonction ne peut être utilisée que si le kit d'envoi couleur en option est installé.
• Les numéros de fax peuvent être enregistrés comme destinations uniquement sur l'imageRUNNER 2206iF.

Numérotation en une touche

L'enregistrement de nombreuses adresses dans le répertoire peut rendre difficile la recherche de la destination souhaitée. Pour éviter cela, enregistrez les destinations fréquemment utilisées comme numéros de numérotation en une touche. Cela permet de les afficher via les boutons en une touche à l'écran. Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 4 destinations en numérotation en une touche. Enregistrement des destinations pour la numérotation en une touche (P. 55)

Numérotation de groupe

Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs destinations déjà enregistrées et les regrouper. Vous pouvez ainsi envoyer des fax ou des e-mails à plusieurs destinations en même temps. Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 50 destinations dans un groupe. Les groupes peuvent également être enregistrés en numérotation en une touche. Enregistrement de plusieurs destinations pour la numérotation de groupe (P. 60)

REMARQUE

• Utilisez l'ordinateur pour enregistrer un dossier partagé comme destination de numérisation. ● Définition d'un dossier partagé comme emplacement d'enregistrement (P. 307) ● Enregistrement du répertoire depuis l'interface utilisateur distante (P. 426)
• Vous pouvez enregistrer le répertoire sous forme de fichier sur votre ordinateur (bien que vous ne puissiez pas modifier le répertoire à partir de l'ordinateur). Vous pouvez également importer un répertoire enregistré depuis l'ordinateur vers la machine. Enregistrement/Chargement du répertoire depuis l'interface utilisateur distante (P. 422)
• Vous pouvez imprimer une liste des destinations enregistrées dans le répertoire. □ Liste du répertoire (P. 593)
• Si votre bureau dispose d'un serveur LDAP, vous pouvez effectuer une recherche pour trouver des informations utilisateur sur le serveur et les enregistrer dans le répertoire. Vous devez au préalable spécifier les paramètres de connexion au serveur LDAP. Enregistrement des serveurs LDAP (P. 323)

LIENS

● Spécification à partir du répertoire (P. 110)

Enregistrement des destinations dans le répertoire

36WC-00S

Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 100 destinations pour la numérotation par code dans le répertoire. Vous pouvez modifier ou supprimer les destinations que vous avez enregistrées.

1 Appuyez sur et touchez .

2 Touchez .

• Si un écran vous demande de saisir un code PIN, saisissez le code PIN correct à l'aide des touches numériques, puis touchez . Définition d'un code PIN pour le répertoire (P. 373)

3 Sélectionnez Sélectionner le type d'adresse à enregistrer.

Selon l'adresse à enregistrer, touchez <Fax> / <E-Mail> .

■Enregistrement de destinations avec le serveur LDAP

Si votre bureau dispose d'un serveur LDAP, vous pouvez effectuer une recherche pour trouver les informations utilisateur sur le serveur et les enregistrer dans le répertoire.

REMARQUE :

Pour effectuer un enregistrement à partir du serveur LDAP, vous devez au préalable spécifier les paramètres de connexion au serveur LDAP. Enregistrement des serveurs LDAP (P. 323)

1 Touchez . 2 Sélectionnez le serveur LDAP que vous utilisez. 3 Sélectionnez les conditions de recherche des informations utilisateur.

• Le nom, les numéros de fax, les adresses e-mail, les noms d'organisation et les unités d'organisation sont des critères disponibles pour rechercher des destinations.

4 Saisissez la chaîne de caractères cible de la recherche, puis sélectionnez .

Pour savoir comment saisir du texte, voir Saisie de texte (P. 24). Pour spécifier plusieurs critères de recherche, répétez les étapes 3 et 4.

5 Touchez . 6 Sélectionnez les conditions d'affichage du résultat de la recherche.

Recherche et affiche les utilisateurs qui répondent à tous les critères de recherche spécifiés aux étapes 3 et 4.

Si des utilisateurs correspondant à au moins un des critères spécifiés aux étapes 3 et 4 sont trouvés, tous ces utilisateurs sont affichés.

7 Touchez .

Les utilisateurs correspondant à vos critères de recherche sont affichés.

REMARQUE :

• Si l'écran d'authentification apparaît lorsque vous touchez , saisissez le nom d'utilisateur de la machine et le mot de passe enregistré dans le serveur LDAP, puis touchez . Enregistrement des serveurs LDAP (P. 323)

8 Sélectionnez un utilisateur à enregistrer dans le carnet d'adresses.

9 Touchez .

Le nom d'utilisateur et le numéro de fax ou l'adresse e-mail enregistrés sur le serveur LDAP de l'utilisateur sélectionné sont enregistrés dans le carnet d'adresses.

Touchez .

• L'enregistrement est facultatif. Si vous enregistrez , la destination peut être recherchée par ordre alphabétique.

5 Saisissez le nom à l'aide des touches numériques, puis touchez . 6 Touchez ou .

7 Saisissez la destination à l'aide des touches numériques, puis touchez .

■ Réglages détaillés (uniquement lors de l'enregistrement pour la télécopie)

Après avoir touché , un écran similaire à celui-ci s'affiche.

a

Si une erreur se produit dans une image en cours d'envoi, l'erreur est vérifiée et corrigée pour éviter l'envoi d'une image incorrecte lorsque la valeur <On> est définie.

b

Si le démarrage des transmissions prend du temps, par exemple en cas de mauvaise connexion téléphonique, vous pouvez réduire progressivement la vitesse de démarrage de la transmission à partir de "33600 bps".

Spécifiez selon les conditions de transmission lors de l'enregistrement de numéros de fax à l'étranger.

REMARQUE

Vous pouvez également effectuer des réglages détaillés pour les destinations à partir de ▷. Cependant, les réglages effectués à partir de sont activés pour les réglages détaillés des destinations enregistrées dans le répertoire.

8 Touchez .

• Un numéro à trois chiffres est automatiquement attribué aux destinations. Le numéro peut être modifié après son enregistrement.

■ Modification du contenu des destinations enregistrées

Après l'enregistrement des destinations, vous pouvez modifier le contenu des informations enregistrées. Par exemple, vous pouvez changer le numéro de fax ou le nom d'une destination enregistrée, changer le type de numéro de fax en e-mail, changer le numéro de numérotation codée, etc.

1 Appuyez sur et touchez .

2 Touchez . 3 Utilisez / pour sélectionner l'onglet contenant la destination à modifier, puis touchez la destination. 4 Touchez . - Si un écran vous demande de saisir un code PIN, saisissez le code PIN correct à l'aide des touches numériques, puis touchez . Réglage d'un code PIN pour le répertoire (P. 373) 5 Sélectionnez l'élément à modifier, effectuez la modification, puis touchez . 6 Touchez .

• Suppression d'une destination enregistrée

1 Appuyez sur et touchez .

2 Touchez .

3 Utilisez / pour sélectionner l'onglet contenant la destination que vous souhaitez supprimer, puis touchez la destination. 4 Touchez . - Si un écran vous demande de saisir un code PIN, saisissez le code PIN correct à l'aide des touches numériques, puis touchez . Réglage d'un code PIN pour le répertoire (P. 373) 5 Touchez .

Enregistrement de destinations pour la numérotation abrégée

Vous pouvez enregistrer facilement des destinations fréquemment utilisées pour la numérotation abrégée. Les destinations peuvent être affichées rapidement en touchant les boutons de numérotation abrégée à l'écran. Vous pouvez modifier ou supprimer les destinations que vous avez enregistrées. Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 4 destinations pour la numérotation abrégée.

1 Appuyez sur et touchez .

2 Touchez .

• Si un écran vous demande de saisir un code PIN, saisissez le code PIN correct à l'aide des touches numériques, puis touchez . Réglage d'un code PIN pour le répertoire (P. 373)

3 Sélectionnez le type d'adresse à enregistrer.

• Selon l'adresse à enregistrer, touchez <Fax>/ E-Mail .

4 Touchez le numéro à enregistrer.

• Vous pouvez modifier ce numéro plus tard.

■Enregistrement de destinations avec le serveur LDAP

Si votre bureau dispose d'un serveur LDAP, vous pouvez effectuer une recherche pour trouver des informations sur les utilisateurs sur le serveur et les enregistrer dans le répertoire.

REMARQUE :

Pour effectuer un enregistrement à partir du serveur LDAP, vous devez spécifier au préalable les paramètres de connexion au serveur LDAP. Enregistrement de serveurs LDAP (P. 323)

1 Appuyez sur . 2 Sélectionnez le serveur LDAP que vous utilisez. 3 Sélectionnez les conditions de recherche des informations utilisateur.

• Le nom, les numéros de fax, les adresses e-mail, les noms d'organisation et l'unité d'organisation sont des critères disponibles pour rechercher des destinations.

4 Saisissez la chaîne de caractères cible de la recherche, puis appuyez sur .

Pour savoir comment saisir du texte, voir 口 Saisie de texte (P. 24). Pour spécifier plusieurs critères de recherche, répétez les étapes 3 et 4.

5 Appuyez sur . 6 Sélectionnez les conditions d'affichage du résultat de la recherche.

Recherche et affiche les utilisateurs qui répondent à tous les critères de recherche spécifiés aux étapes 3 et 4.

Si des utilisateurs répondant à au moins un des critères spécifiés aux étapes 3 et 4 sont trouvés, affiche tous ces utilisateurs.

7 Appuyez sur .

Les utilisateurs répondant à vos critères de recherche sont affichés.

REMARQUE :

• Si l'écran d'authentification apparaît lorsque vous appuyez sur , saisissez le nom d'utilisateur de la machine et le mot de passe enregistré dans le serveur LDAP, puis appuyez sur . Enregistrement des serveurs LDAP (P. 323)

8 Sélectionnez un utilisateur que vous souhaitez enregistrer dans le carnet d'adresses.

9 Appuyez sur .

Le nom d'utilisateur et le numéro de fax ou l'adresse e-mail enregistrés sur le serveur LDAP de l'utilisateur sélectionné sont enregistrés dans le carnet d'adresses.

5 Appuyez sur .

• L'enregistrement est facultatif. Si vous enregistrez, la destination peut être recherchée par ordre alphabétique.

6 Saisissez le nom à l'aide des touches numériques, puis touchez .

7 Touchez ou .

8 Saisissez la destination à l'aide des touches numériques, puis touchez .

■ Réglages détaillés (uniquement pour les numéros de fax enregistrés)

Après avoir touché , un écran similaire à celui-ci s'affiche.

a

Si une erreur se produit dans une image en cours d'envoi, elle est vérifiée et corrigée pour éviter l'envoi d'une image incorrecte lorsque le réglage < On > est activé.

b

Si le démarrage de la transmission prend du temps, par exemple en cas de mauvaise connexion téléphonique, vous pouvez réduire progressivement la vitesse de démarrage de la transmission à partir de "33600 bps".

Spécifiez selon les conditions de transmission lors de l'enregistrement de numéros de fax à l'étranger.

REMARQUE

Vous pouvez également effectuer des réglages détaillés pour les destinations à partir de ▷ . Cependant, les réglages effectués à partir de sont appliqués aux réglages détaillés des destinations enregistrées dans le répertoire.

9 Touchez .

■ Modification du contenu des destinations enregistrées en numérotation abrégée

Vous pouvez modifier les informations d'un destinataire, par exemple changer les numéros ou les noms enregistrés, ou modifier les numéros attribués à la numérotation abrégée.

1 Appuyez sur et touchez .

2 Touchez . 3 Sélectionnez < à l'aide de /, puis touchez le destinataire à modifier. 4 Touchez .

• Si un écran vous demande de saisir un code PIN, saisissez le code PIN correct à l'aide des touches numériques, puis touchez . Définition d'un code PIN pour le répertoire (P. 373) 5 Touchez l'élément à modifier, effectuez la modification, puis touchez . 6 Touchez .

• Suppression d'un destinataire enregistré

1 Appuyez sur et touchez .

2 Touchez . 3 Sélectionnez < à l'aide de / ▶, puis touchez le destinataire à supprimer. 4 Touchez .

• Si un écran vous demande de saisir un code PIN, saisissez le code PIN correct à l'aide des touches numériques, puis touchez . Définition d'un code PIN pour le répertoire (P. 373)

5 Touchez .

Enregistrement de plusieurs destinataires pour la numérotation de groupe

Plusieurs destinataires peuvent être combinés en groupes. Une fois un groupe enregistré, vous pouvez ajouter ou supprimer des destinataires.

REMARQUE

• Seuls les destinataires du même type d'adresse peuvent être enregistrés dans le même groupe.
• Les dossiers partagés ne peuvent pas être enregistrés dans un groupe en tant que destinataires.

1 Appuyez sur et touchez .

2 Touchez .

• Si un écran vous invite à saisir un code PIN, saisissez le code PIN correct à l'aide des touches numériques, puis touchez . Définition d'un code PIN pour le répertoire (P. 373)

3 Touchez .

• Les groupes peuvent également être enregistrés en numérotation abrégée. Sélectionnez pour enregistrer le groupe comme numéro de numérotation abrégée.

4 Touchez .

5 Touchez .

• L'enregistrement est facultatif. Si vous enregistrez , la destination peut être recherchée par ordre alphabétique.

6 Saisissez le nom à l'aide des touches numériques, puis touchez .

7 Touchez .

8 Touchez .

9 Utilisez / pour sélectionner l'onglet et touchez une destination à enregistrer.

10 Touchez .

11 Répétez les étapes 8 et 9 jusqu'à ce que vous ayez enregistré toutes les destinations souhaitées, puis touchez . 12 Touchez .

■ Modification du contenu des groupes enregistrés

Après avoir enregistré des destinations, vous pouvez modifier le contenu des groupes, comme les noms, les destinations et les numéros de numérotation abrégée.

1 Appuyez sur et touchez .

2 Touchez . 3 Sélectionnez < à l'aide de /, puis touchez la destination que vous souhaitez modifier. 4 Touchez .

• Si un écran vous demande de saisir un code PIN, saisissez le code PIN correct à l'aide des touches numériques, puis touchez . Définition d'un code PIN pour le répertoire (P. 373) 5 Sélectionnez l'élément à modifier, effectuez la modification, puis touchez . 6 Touchez .

- Suppression d'un groupe

1 Appuyez sur et touchez .

2 Touchez . 3 Sélectionnez < à l'aide de / ▶, puis touchez le groupe à supprimer. 4 Touchez .

• Si un écran vous demande de saisir un code PIN, saisissez le code PIN correct à l'aide des touches numériques, puis touchez . Définition d'un code PIN pour le répertoire (P. 373)

5 Touchez .

Réglage du volume

La machine produit des sons dans diverses situations, par exemple lorsque l'envoi d'un fax est terminé ou lorsqu'un bourrage papier ou une erreur se produit. Vous pouvez régler le volume de chacun de ces sons individuellement.

1 Appuyez sur et touchez .

2 Touchez .

3 Touchez .

4 Sélectionnez un paramètre.

Setting	Description	Procedure
Fax Tone*	Sound produced during a fax transmission	Go to step 5.
Ring Tone*	Sound produced when an incoming fax is received
TX Done Tone*	Sound produced when fax sending is complete	Go to step 5.
RX Done Tone*	Sound produced when fax receiving is complete
Scanning Done Tone*	Sound produced when fax document scanning is complete
Entry Tone	Confirmation sound each time a key on the control panel or button on the display is pressed	Select (produce a tone) or (not produce a tone).
Invalid Entry Tone	Sound produced when an invalid key operation is performed, such as when you enter a number outside the valid setting range
Warning Tone	Sound produced when a paper jam or other error occurs
Job Done Tone	Sound produced when an operation such as copying or scanning is complete

<Energy Saver Alert>	Sound produced when the machine enters or exits sleep mode
<Original in Feeder Detection Tone>*	Sound produced when an original is loaded in the feeder

REMARQUE :

Les paramètres marqués d'un « * » peuvent ne pas être affichés selon le modèle que vous utilisez ou les options.

5 Utilisez / pour régler le volume, puis appuyez sur .

• Appuyez sur et déplacez le curseur complètement vers la gauche pour couper le son.

Son de fin uniquement pour les erreurs

• Appuyez sur ▶ ▶ .

Réglage de la durée avant extinction automatique

En activant ce paramètre, vous pouvez configurer la machine pour qu'elle s'éteigne automatiquement. La machine s'éteint automatiquement après la période d'inactivité spécifiée écoulée depuis l'entrée en mode veille. Vous pouvez réduire la consommation d'électricité la nuit et les jours fériés si vous oubliez d'éteindre la machine.

Ce paramètre est disponible lorsqu'un câble de ligne téléphonique n'est pas connecté à la machine.

▷ ▷ ▷ Set the time period ▷

IMPORTANT

Avant le réglage

When the setting is enabled, the machine may automatically shut down even if you are operating the machine from the Remote UI or from the Send Function Setting Tool. A malfunction may occur, particularly if the machine shuts down while data is being imported. When you import data using the Remote UI or use the Send Function Setting Tool, set to <0> (Off) in advance.

REMARQUE

The default setting is 4 hours. - If any setting of the [Timer Settings] is changed from the Remote UI while the machine is in the sleep mode, the timer for the setting is reset to the beginning. The machine automatically shuts down after the specified period of idle time has elapsed since the timer was reset. The sleep mode function reduces the amount of power consumed by the machine by disabling power flow to the control panel. If no operations will be performed on the machine for a while, such as during a lunch break, you can save power simply by pressing on the control panel. You can also use the Auto Sleep Time setting to automatically put the machine into sleep mode if it remains idle for a specified length of time. 

REMARQUE

En mode veille

When the machine enters sleep mode, lights up yellow green.

Situations dans lesquelles la machine ne passe pas en mode veille

- When the machine is in operation - When the [Processing/Data] indicator is lit up or blinking - When the machine is performing an operation such as adjustment or cleaning - When a paper jam occurs - When the receiver of the optional handset or an external telephone is off the hook - When the menu screen is displayed - When a job is waiting to be scanned to a computer - When an error message is displayed on the screen (There are some exceptions. The machine sometimes enters sleep mode when error messages are displayed.) - When the machine is communicating with an LDAP server, etc. - When the SSID/network key screen for Direct Connection is displayed

Lorsque vous souhaitez régler la minuterie de veille automatique

The factory default settings for the amount of time that elapses before the machine enters auto sleep mode are listed below. We recommend using the factory default settings to save the most power. If you want to change the amount of time that elapses before the machine enters auto sleep mode, follow the procedure below. 10 minutes (setting range is 3 to 60 minutes)  ▶ ▶ ▶ Set the amount of time that elapses before the machine automatically enters sleep mode ▶ 

Sortie du mode veille

Press . You can also tap the display or press any key other than to exit sleep mode.

REMARQUE

If the optional handset or an external telephone is connected, the machine exits sleep mode when you take the receiver off the hook.

Copie

Copie 69

Basic Copy Operations 71 Selecting Copy Paper 73 Canceling Copies 74 Various Copy Settings 76 Enlarging or Reducing 78 Selecting Document Type 79 Adjusting Density 80 2-Sided Copying 81 Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (2 on 1/4 on 1) 84 Copying Both Sides of an ID Card onto One Page 86 Erasing Dark Borders and Frame Lines (Erase Frame) 87 Collating Copies by Page 89 Splitting Facing Page Documents into Separate Pages for Copying 91 Copying Different Size Documents Together (Different Size Originals) 92

Configuration des paramètres de copie selon vos besoins 94

Changing Default Settings 95 Registering Frequently Used Copy Settings 96 This chapter describes basic copy operations and various other useful functions.

Utilisation des opérations de base

Basic Copy Operations(P. 71) Selecting Copy Paper(P. 73) Canceling Copies(P. 74)

Utilisation des paramètres de copie adaptés à vos besoins

 Enlarging or Reducing(P. 78)  Collating Copies by Page(P. 89)  Selecting Document Type(P. 79)  Adjusting Density(P. 80)  Erasing Dark Borders and Frame Lines (Erase Frame)(P. 87)  Copying Both Sides of an ID Card onto One Page(P. 86)    Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (2 on 1/4 on 1) (P. 84) Splitting Facing Page Documents into Separate Pages for Copying(P. 91) 2-Sided Copying(P. 81)  Copying Different Size Documents Together (Different Size Originals)(P. 92) Simplifying Your Frequent Copy Operations Changing Default Settings(P.95) Registering Frequently Used Copy Settings(P. 96)

1 Placez le ou les documents. Placement des documents (P. 26)

 

2 Appuyez sur et touchez .


3 Saisissez le nombre de copies à l'aide des touches numériques.

- Enter a quantity from 1 to 999. Press c to cancel the entered quantity. 

4 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie si nécessaire.

- Select the settings. Various Copy Settings(P. 76) 

5 Appuyez sur

- Copying starts. - If you want to cancel copying, tap ▷ . ☐Canceling Copies(P. 74)

■ Lors de la mise en place des documents dans le chargeur à l'étape 1

The document is automatically scanned.

■ Lors de la mise en place des documents sur la vitre d'exposition à l'étape 1

Depending on the copy settings you made, the screen for selecting the document size is displayed when copying multiple documents. Follow the procedure below. 1 Select the document size.  2 Place the next document on the platen glass, and press Repeat this step until you finish scanning the entire document. 3 Tap.

REMARQUE :

- When the message appears. Countermeasures for Each Message(P. 519)

IMPORTANT

When copying documents with text or images that extend to the edges of the page The edges of the document might not be copied. For more information about the scan margins, see Main Unit(P. 623).

CONSEILS

- If you always want to make copies with the same settings: Changing Default Settings(P. 95) Registering Frequently Used Copy Settings(P. 96)

Sélection du papier de copie

36WC-013 Specify the paper source that contains the paper to use for printing out copies.

REMARQUE

- cannot be selected when is set, or when or is set for . - You must first specify the size and type of paper that is loaded in the paper source. Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 45) Loading Paper(P. 30)  Select the paper source (a, b, c, d) 

a

If the optional feeder is attached, the machine automatically selects the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray or the paper drawer.

b< E>

Selects the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray.

C<1>

Selects the paper loaded in the paper drawer.

d<2>

Selects the paper loaded in the optional paper drawer.

LIENS

Basic Copy Operations(P. 71)

Annulation des copies

36WC-014 If you want to cancel copying immediately after pressing , tap on the screen or press on the control panel. You can also cancel copying after checking the copy status. - Tap on the Screen That is Displayed While Copying   Press to Cancel 

Si l'écran affiche une liste de documents lorsque est enfoncé

Documents have been scanned and are waiting to be printed. Select the copy document to cancel.   Use to Cancel  > > > Select the desired job > > 

a Détails de copie

The number of copies, settings, and other details are displayed. If you only want to check the details without canceling copying, press to return to the copy main screen.

Cancels copying.

LIENS

Basic Copy Operations(P. 71)

Divers réglages de copie

36WC-015 A variety of settings are available to suit your needs, such as when you want to save paper or make your documents easier to read.  Enlarging or Reducing(P. 78)  Collating Copies by Page(P. 89)  Selecting Document Type(P. 79)  Adjusting Density(P. 80)  Erasing Dark Borders and Frame Lines (Erase Frame)(P. 87)  Copying Both Sides of an ID Card onto One Page(P. 86)  Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (2 on 1/4 on 1) (P. 84)  Splitting Facing Page Documents into Separate Pages for Copying(P. 91)  2-Sided Copying(P. 81)  Copying Different Size Documents Together (Different Size Originals)(P. 92)

Agrandissement ou réduction

36WC-016  You can enlarge or reduce copies by using a preset copy ratio such as A5 → A4 , or by setting a custom copy ratio in increments of 1% .

REMARQUE

is not available when using .  Select the copy ratio 

a

Use / or the numeric keys to enter the copy ratio, and tap . You can set any copy ratio from 25% to 400% in 1% increments. 

b Taux de copie prédéfini

Select a copy ratio.

LIENS

Basic Copy Operations(P. 71)

Sélection du type de document

36WC-017  You can select the optical image quality for the copy depending on the document type, such as text-only documents, documents with charts and graphs, or magazine photos.  Select the document type 

a

Suitable when copying documents that only contain text.

Texte/Photo>

Suitable when copying documents that contain both text and photos.

Suitable when copying documents that contain printed photos, such as magazines or pamphlets.

REMARQUE

Even if is set to , when is set to or , is canceled.

LIENS

Basic Copy Operations(P. 71)

Réglage de la densité

36WC-018  You can adjust the density of the copy if the text or images in a document are too light or dark. You can also automatically set an optimal density for a document.  Adjust the density Apply> 

a <->

Decreases the density.

b <++>

Increases the density.

An optimal density for the document is automatically set. is automatically set to . ( 选 Selecting Document Type(P. 79) )

LIENS

Basic Copy Operations(P. 71) Auto Recognize Original Orientation (P. 459)

Copie recto-verso

36WC-019  You can copy two pages of a document on both sides of the paper. You can also copy a two-sided document on both sides of the paper, or on two separate pages.

REMARQUE

- <2-Sided> may not be available with some sizes and types of paper. - <2-Sided> is not available when using 2 Pages> or .  <2-Sided> Select the type of 2-sided copying 

Types de copie recto-verso

The illustration below shows the types of 2-sided copying. 1-Sided->2-Sided 2-Sided->2-Sided 2-Sided->1-Sided   

Type d'original / finition>

Specify if you want to change the binding, such as when copying book-type documents in calendar-type format.

1 face -> 2 faces

REMARQUE

For imageRUNNER 2206N, this function can only be used when the optional Duplex Unit-C is attached. - If you want to copy portrait-oriented documents in calendar-type format (short-edge binding)   <1-Sided->2-Sided> If you want to copy landscape-oriented documents in book-type format (short-edge binding)   <1-Sided->2-Sided>

2 faces -> 2 faces

REMARQUE

- For imageRUNNER 2206N, this function can only be used when the optional Duplex Unit-C and the optional DADF-AY are attached. If you want to create copies with a different binding type than the original   <2-Sided->2-Sided> Select the original binding type Select the binding type for the finished copy, which is different from that of the original document

2 faces -> 1 face

This setting enables you to align the direction of the output paper.

REMARQUE

- For imageRUNNER 2206N, this function can only be used when the optional DADF-AY is attached. - When a 2-sided document is in portrait-oriented calendar-type format (short-edge binding)   <2-Sided->1-Sided> - When a 2-sided document is in landscape-oriented book-type format (short-edge binding)   <2-Sided->1-Sided>

LIENS

Basic Copy Operations(P. 71) Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (2 on 1/4 on 1)(P. 84)

Copie de plusieurs documents sur une seule feuille (2 en 1 / 4 en 1)

36WC-01A  You can copy two or four documents onto a single sheet at a reduced size. This decreases the number of pages, enabling you to save paper.

REMARQUE

- Using < 2 on 1> / < 4 on 1> reduces the copy ratio automatically (the copy ratio is displayed on the screen). You can increase or further reduce the copy ratio before pressing , but the edges of the document might not be copied if you increase it. - <2 on 1>/<4 on 1> is not available when using , , 2 Pages>, or . - When you copy multiple documents onto one page, margins may be created in the copied image.  ▶ ▶ Select <2 on 1> or <4 on 1> ▶ Select the document size on the screen ▶ On the

screen, select the paper source that contains the paper you want to use 

a < 2 en 1> / < 4 en 1>

Select <2 on 1> to copy two pages of documents onto a single sheet, or select <4 on 1> to copy four pages of documents onto a single sheet.

Sélectionnez Layout>

Specify how to arrange the documents on the page. 

LIENS

Basic Copy Operations(P. 71) 2-Sided Copying(P.81)

Copie des deux côtés d'une carte d'identité sur une seule page

36WC-01C  You can use to copy the front and back sides of a card onto the same side of a page. This function is useful when copying a driver's license or ID card.

REMARQUE

- is available with A4/Letter size paper or larger. - is automatically set to <100% (1:1)>. - is not available when using <2-Sided>, , , 2 Pages>, or <2 on 1>/<4 on 1>.  Place the card   Turn the card over 

Comment placer la carte

 

REMARQUE :

- When the message appears. Countermeasures for Each Message(P. 519)

LIENS

Opérations de copie de base (P. 71)

Suppression des bordures sombres et des cadres (Effacer le cadre)

36WC-01E  When copying documents that are smaller than the output paper size, frame lines may appear around the edges in the copied image. When copying facing pages from thick book, dark borders may appear. enables you to erase these frame lines and dark borders.

REMARQUE

- The width of the frame to erase is increased or decreased relative to the setting. - is not available when using , <2 on 1>/<4 on 1> or .  Select the type of Erase Frame Specify the width of the frame to erase Apply> Select the paper size on the screen 

Cadre d'origine

Specify to erase the dark borders and frame lines that appear around the copy if the original is smaller than the selected paper size. You can also use this mode to create a blank border around the edge of the copy. 

Cadre de livre

Specify and to erase the dark borders, as well as center and contour lines that appear if you are copying facing pages in a bound original onto a single sheet of paper. 

Assemblage des copies par page

36WC-01F  When preparing multiple copies of multi-page documents, you can select <Group> , <Collate> , <Rotate + Group> , or <Rotate + Collate> for the order of copied papers. This function is useful when preparing handouts for meetings or presentations.   Select page order 

a

The copies are grouped by page. For example, if you are making three copies of a five-page document, the printouts will be arranged in the following order. 

The copies are collated by sequential page order. For example, if you are making three copies of a five-page document, the printouts will be arranged in the following order. 

The copies are grouped by page, and each group is rotated 90 degrees. For example, if you are making three copies of a five-page document, the printouts will be arranged in the following order. 

The copies are collated by sequential page order, and each group is rotated 90 degrees. For example, if you are making three copies of a five-page document, the printouts will be arranged in the following order. 

LIENS

Basic Copy Operations(P. 71)

Division des documents en vis-à-vis en pages séparées pour la copie

36WC-01H  You can copy documents with two facing pages such as books and magazines into separate pages, dividing the left and right pages.

REMARQUE

- When scanning a facing page document, place it on the platen glass. Place the document face down with its corner aligned with the top-left corner of the platen glass, as shown below.  - 2 Pages> is not available when using <2-Sided>, <2 on 1>/<4 on 1>, , or .  Book->2 Pages> 

a

Does not set this function.

b

Sets this function.

Copie de documents de tailles différentes ensemble (originaux de tailles différentes)

36WC-01J  You can place different size originals in the feeder and scan them at one time. You can eliminate the need to select paper and place the original again.

IMPORTANT

- You are limited to certain combinations of document sizes for scanning. Scanning with an improper combination may cause damage to the documents or paper jams. - Do not place the documents together that are of different weights or paper types, as this may cause damage to the documents or paper jams.

REMARQUE

- For imageRUNNER 2206N, this function can only be used when the optional DADF-AY is attached. - is not available when using <2 on 1> / <4 on 1> , , , or 2 Pages>.  Different Size Originals> 

a

Does not set this function.

b

Sets this function.

REMARQUE

When the documents with different widths are scanned together, the images of the smaller size documents may be slanted because the documents cannot be fixed with the document guides. Basic Copy Operations(P. 71)

Configuration des paramètres de copie selon vos besoins

36WC-01K The default settings are the settings that are displayed whenever you turn ON the machine, or when you press . If you register your frequently used settings as default settings, you can eliminate the need to configure the same settings every time you make copies. In addition, you can also register combinations of multiple copy settings and use them whenever you need them.

REMARQUE

The machine comes pre-configured with factory default settings ( O Setting Menu List(P. 431)). You can change and register the default settings according to your needs.  I often copy documents with pages full of information, and I always reduce the copy ratio to 95% .  Change the copy ratio to 95% and register it as the default setting. From now on, you can make copies without changing the copy ratio. Changing Default Settings(P. 95)  For our regular weekly meetings, I always make copies for each member, and collate them according to the page order of the original document.  Go to and register the combination of and turned . You can then easily use this setting combination whenever you need it. Registering Frequently Used Copy Settings(P. 96)

Modification des paramètres par défaut

36WC-01L The default settings are the settings that are displayed whenever you turn ON the machine, or when you press . If you change these default settings to match the operations that you perform frequently, you can eliminate the need to configure the same settings every time you make copies.  Select the setting Change the default value of the selected item Apply> Apply> 

Paramètres

Select the item you want to set, and change the default value.

LIENS

Basic Copy Operations(P. 71) Various Copy Settings(P. 76) Copy Settings(P. 458)

Enregistrement des paramètres de copie fréquemment utilisés

36WC-01R You can register up to four frequently used combinations of copy settings. By simply selecting a registered setting combination when it is needed, you can eliminate the need to configure the same settings every time you make copies, such as if you frequently set the number of copies to 5, set to , and increase the sharpness when copying. You can register the setting combinations as to .  Select to Select each setting and set the value   b

Paramètres 1> à Paramètres 4>

Register frequently used combinations of copy settings as one of the modes. To edit the settings for a mode that has already been registered, select that mode, and tap again.

Paramètres

Configure your frequently used settings. Various Copy Settings(P. 76)

REMARQUE

- If you want to delete a registered setting, tap select the setting . - If you want to use a registered setting, tap select the setting. - Registered settings are saved even when the machine is turned OFF. - You can change the settings of a mode after it is activated.

LIENS

Basic Copy Operations(P. 71)

Télécopie (imageRUNNER 2206iF)

Télécopie (imageRUNNER 2206iF) 98

Sending Faxes 101 Canceling Sending Faxes 107 Sending from Registered Destinations 109 Specifying from Address Book 110 Selecting Destinations Directly by Entering Coded Dial Numbers 113 Specifying Destinations with the One-Touch Buttons 116 Specifying Previously Used Destinations 118 Specifying Destinations in an LDAP Server 121 Various Fax Settings 124 Adjusting Resolution 125 Adjusting Density 126 Scanning 2-Sided Documents 127 Changing Default Settings 128 Receiving Taxes 129 Sending and Receiving Faxes According to Your Purposes 133 Making a Call before Sending Faxes (Manual Sending) 134 Sending Faxes to Multiple Destinations Simultaneously (Sequential Broadcast) 135 Storing Received Faxes into Memory (Memory Reception) 137 Forwarding Received Faxes 140 Selecting a Document to Forward 141 Forwarding All the Received Documents Automatically 143 Receiving Fax Information Services 147 Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents 149 Sending Faxes from Your Computer (PC Fax) 151 Sending PC Faxes 152

Télécopie (imageRUNNER 2206iF)

36WC-01S This chapter describes fax settings, basic operations and various other useful functions to suit your needs, such as PC Fax to send documents directly from computers, and Address Book to specify destinations easily.

REMARQUE

- You need to register destinations in the Address Book before using this feature. Registering in the Address Book(P. 49) Using Basic Operations Sending Faxes(P. 101) Canceling Sending Faxes(P. 107) Receiving Faxes(P. 129) ■ Specifying Scanning Settings  Adjusting Resolution(P. 125)  Adjusting Density(P. 126)  Scanning 2-Sided Documents(P. 127) ■ Specifying Destinations Simply and Quickly  Specifying from Address Book(P. 110)  Selecting Destinations Directly by Entering Coded Dial Numbers(P. 113)  Specifying Destinations with the One-Touch Buttons(P. 116)  Specifying Previously Used Destinations(P. 118)  Specifying Destinations in an LDAP Server(P. 121)

Envoi et réception selon vos besoins

 Making a Call before Sending Faxes (Manual Sending)(P. 134)  Sending Faxes to Multiple Destinations Simultaneously (Sequential Broadcast)(P. 135)  Storing Received Faxes into Memory (Memory Reception) (P. 137)  Forwarding Received Faxes(P. 140)  Receiving Fax Information Services(P. 147) Sending Faxes Directly from Your Computer  Sending Faxes from Your Computer (PC Fax)(P. 151)

IMPORTANT

To prevent missending of a fax, always press first. *Destinations set by the previous user may remain.

1 Placez le ou les documents. Placement des documents (P. 26)


2 Appuyez sur et touchez .

 - When the logon screen appears, use the numeric keys to enter the user name and password. Then select the authentication server and press ID. Logging on to the Machine(P. 18)

3 Spécifiez une destination.

■ Spécification des destinations à l'aide des touches numériques

Enter the destination using the numeric keys, and tap . - If your machine is connected to a PBX (Private Branch Exchange), tap <R> before entering the destination. If <R> is not available, you need to register the R-key settings. R-Key Setting (P. 463) - If you enter the wrong characters, press C. (Press to delete each character one by one; press and hold to delete all the input characters at once.) 

Pour envoyer à l'étranger

Enter the international access code, the country code, the area code, and the fax number to specify the destination.

1 Saisissez le code d'accès international.


2 Appuyez sur .

-

(pause) is inserted between numbers. In this case, 012 will be dialed first, then 4 seconds later, the next number will be dialed. 

REMARQUE :

- Inputting pauses is optional; however, consecutive numbers that are input without pauses may not be recognized correctly. - Pauses can be inserted continuously. One pause inserts 4 seconds of waiting time. This time can be changed as necessary. Set Pause Time(P. 465)

3 Saisissez l'indicatif du pays, l'indicatif régional et le numéro de fax.


4 Appuyez sur pour insérer une pause à la fin du numéro de fax si nécessaire.

The waiting time inserted here is fixed to 10 seconds. This time cannot be changed. 

5 Appuyez sur .


REMARQUE :

When is set to , a screen appears that prompts you to enter the destination again (Checking Destinations before Sending Documents (imageRUNNER 2206iF)(P. 377)). Enter the same destination again for confirmation. 

■ Spécification des destinataires à partir du répertoire

1 Appuyez sur .


2 Appuyez sur .


3 Utilisez / pour sélectionner l'onglet.

 Displays all the destinations registered in the Address Book. For the marks beside the destinations, see the explanations below.  Only destinations for one-touch dialing are displayed. /<0-9>/ to Displays destinations with recipient names whose first characters correspond to the characters of the selected tab.  Displays destinations for faxes.  Displays destinations for sending e-mail. Do not use in this procedure.

Spécification à partir du répertoire (P. 110)

< Displays destinations for shared folders. Do not use in this procedure.

Spécification à partir du répertoire (P. 110)

 Displays a list of destinations registered in Group Dial. 4 Select a destination. 

■ Spécification des destinataires en saisissant directement les numéros abrégés

1 Tap .  2 Tap .  3 Use the numeric keys to enter a three-digit number (001 to 100). 

■ Spécification des destinataires à partir de la numérotation abrégée

1 Tap .  2 Tap .  3 Select a destination. 

4 Spécifiez les paramètres de numérisation si nécessaire.

- Select the settings. Various Fax Settings(P. 124) 

5 Appuyez sur pour commencer l'envoi.

Scanning starts. - If you want to cancel sending, press Tap .

■ Lors de la mise en place des documents dans le chargeur à l'étape 1

When scanning is complete, the faxes are sent.

■ Lors de la mise en place des documents sur la vitre d'exposition à l'étape 1

Follow the procedures below. 1 Select the document size. - When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to step 3. 2 Place the next document on the platen glass, and press Repeat this step until you finish scanning all of the pages. 3 Tap. The faxes are sent.

ASTUCES

If you always want to send faxes with the same settings: Changing Default Settings(P. 128) - If you want to sound an alarm when the handset is off the hook: Off-Hook Alarm (P. 462)

LIENS

Canceling Sending Faxes(P. 107) Sending and Receiving Faxes According to Your Purposes(P. 133) Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents(P. 149) Specifying from Address Book(P. 110) Selecting Destinations Directly by Entering Coded Dial Numbers(P. 113) Specifying Destinations with the One-Touch Buttons(P. 116) Specifying Destinations in an LDAP Server(P. 121)

Annulation de l'envoi de télécopies

36WC-01W If you want to cancel sending faxes immediately after pressing , tap on the display or press . You can also cancel sending faxes after checking the fax status.

Utiliser pour annuler


Appuyer pour annuler

  

Si l'écran affiche une liste de documents lorsque est enfoncé

Documents have been scanned and are waiting to be processed. Select the document to cancel. 

Utiliser pour annuler

  Select the document 

Détails de la télécopie

The number of sending document, settings, and other details are displayed. If you only want to check the details without sending, press to return to the fax main screen.

Cancel sending.

LIENS

Sending Faxes(P. 101) Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents(P. 149)

Envoi vers des destinations enregistrées

36WC-01X You can specify destinations by selecting them from the Address Book, coded dial numbers, or one-touch buttons, as well as by using the numeric keys. To use the Address Book, coded dial numbers, or one-touch buttons, you need to register destinations beforehand. You can also specify previously used destinations. If your office has an LDAP server installed, you can also specify a destination using user information in the server.  Specifying from Address Book(P. 110)  Selecting Destinations Directly by Entering Coded Dial Numbers(P. 113)  Specifying Destinations with the One-Touch Buttons(P. 116)  Specifying Previously Used Destinations(P. 118)  Specifying Destinations in an LDAP Server(P. 121)

ASTUCES pour renforcer la sécurité

- If you want to limit available destinations to ones from the Address Book or previously specified ones: Limiting Available Destinations(P. 374) - If you want to disable specifying previously used destinations: Disabling Use of Previously Used Destinations (P. 376)

LIENS

Sending Faxes(P. 101) Registering in the Address Book(P. 49)

Spécification à partir du carnet d'adresses

36WC-01Y  The Address Book enables you to specify a destination by selecting from a list of registered destinations or by searching by name for destinations with recipient names.

NOTE

You need to register destinations in the Address Book before using this feature. Registering in the Address Book(P. 49)

1 Appuyez sur et touchez .


2 Utilisez / pour sélectionner un onglet.


a

Displays all the destinations registered in the Address Book.  Only destinations for one-touch dialing are displayed. lt; A - Z gt; / lt; 0 - 9 gt; / lt; ABC gt; to lt; YZ gt Displays destinations with recipient names whose first characters correspond to the characters of the selected tab.  Displays destinations for faxes.  Displays destinations for sending e-mail. Do not use in this procedure. Specifying from Address Book(P. 110)  Displays destinations for shared folders. Do not use in this procedure. Specifying from Address Book(P. 110)  Displays a list of destinations registered in Group Dial.

3 Sélectionnez une destination.

- When the logon screen appears, use the numeric keys to enter the user name and password. Then select the authentication server and press ID. Logging on to the Machine(P. 18)

REMARQUE :

If you want to specify multiple destinations Repeat the following steps. You can specify up to 104 destinations. Select a tab Select a destination. - To specify any additional destinations with the numeric keys, tap ▷ .

4 Spécifiez les paramètres de numérisation si nécessaire.

- Select the settings. Various Fax Settings(P. 124) 

5 Appuyez sur pour commencer l'envoi.

Scanning starts. If you want to cancel sending, press Tap .

■ Pour supprimer des destinations

If you specified multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary. 1 Select .  2 Select a destination you want to delete. 

3 Touchez .

- If you specified Group Dial in step 2, "XX destination(s)" is displayed. Tapping displays destinations registered in the group. 

REMARQUE

Si vous souhaitez supprimer facilement et rapidement des destinations sans afficher une liste de destinations

Before tapping in step 1, you can press / to toggle the destinations you specified. Display a destination you want to delete, and press C

LIENS

Sending Faxes(P. 101) Sending Faxes to Multiple Destinations Simultaneously (Sequential Broadcast)(P. 135)

Sélection de destinations directement en saisissant des numéros de numérotation codée

36WC-020  You can directly enter the three-digit number (coded dial number) for a destination to send a fax.

REMARQUE

You need to register destinations in the coded dial numbers before using this feature. Registering Destinations in the Address Book(P. 50)

1. Appuyez sur et touchez .


2. Utilisez les touches numériques pour saisir un nombre à trois chiffres (001 à 100).

- If you enter the wrong characters, press C. (Press to delete each character one by one; press and hold to delete all the input characters at once.) 

REMARQUE :

If a confirmation screen appears When is set to , a screen is displayed that shows the destination and the name for the number. (For Group Dial, the destination name and the number of destinations are shown.) Check the contents and if everything is correct, and tap . If you have difficulty, tap and re-enter the three-digit coded dial number. Displaying Destinations in Address Book(P. 377)  If you want to specify multiple destinations Repeat the following steps. You can specify up to 100 destinations. Specify from Coded Dial> Enter a number. - To specify any additional destinations with the numeric keys, tap ▷ .

3. Spécifiez les paramètres de numérisation si nécessaire.

- Select the settings. Various Fax Settings(P. 124) 

4. Appuyez sur pour commencer l'envoi.

Scanning starts. If you want to cancel sending, press Tap .

Pour supprimer des destinations

If you specified multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary. 1 Select .  2 Select a destination you want to delete.  3 Tap . - If you specified Group Dial in step 2, "XX destination(s)" is displayed. Tapping displays destinations registered in the group. 

REMARQUE

Si vous souhaitez supprimer facilement et rapidement des destinations sans afficher la liste des destinations

Before tapping in step 1, you can press / to toggle the destinations you specified. Display a destination you want to delete, and press C

LIENS

Sending Faxes(P. 101) Sending Faxes to Multiple Destinations Simultaneously (Sequential Broadcast)(P. 135)

Spécification des destinations avec les touches de numérotation abrégée

36WC-021  Tap one-touch buttons in the screen to specify destinations.

REMARQUE

You need to register destinations before using one-touch dialing. Registering Destinations in the Address Book(P. 50)

1. Appuyez sur et touchez l'une des touches de à .


REMARQUE :

Si un écran de confirmation apparaît

If is set to , a confirmation screen appears with the destination and destination name registered to the one-touch button (if a destination registered for Group Dial, the group name and number of destinations appears). Confirm the destinations are correct, and tap . If destinations are incorrect, tap and tap the one-touch buttons again. 🅐Checking Destinations before Sending Documents (imageRUNNER 2206iF)(P. 377) 

Sélection de plusieurs destinations

Destinations can be added from the Address Book, coded dial numbers, and numeric keys. Tap .

2 Spécifiez les paramètres de numérisation si nécessaire.

- Sélectionnez les paramètres. Divers paramètres de télécopie (P. 124)


3 Appuyez sur pour commencer l'envoi.

Scanning starts. - If you want to cancel sending, press Tap .

Pour supprimer des destinations

If you specified multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary. 1 Select Confirm/Edit>.  2 Select a destination you want to delete.  3 Tap . - If you specified Group Dial in step 2, "XX destination(s)" is displayed. Tapping displays destinations registered in the group. 

REMARQUE

Si vous souhaitez supprimer facilement et rapidement des destinations sans afficher une liste de destinations

Before tapping in step 1, you can press / to toggle the destinations you specified. Display a destination you want to delete, and press C

LIENS

Sending Faxes(P. 101) Sending Faxes to Multiple Destinations Simultaneously (Sequential Broadcast)(P. 135)

Spécification de destinations précédemment utilisées

36WC-022  You can select a destination from among the past three destinations.

IMPORTANT

- When is set to , you cannot use this feature. Disabling Use of Previously Used Destinations (P. 376) - Turning OFF the machine or setting to deletes the past destinations, and disables this feature. Limiting Available Destinations(P. 374) - Destinations from a fax for which several destinations were specified, as well as the destinations in Manual Sending are not available for this feature. Sending Faxes to Multiple Destinations Simultaneously (Sequential Broadcast)(P. 135) Making a Call before Sending Faxes (Manual Sending)(P. 134)

REMARQUE

When you specify a destination using this feature, any destinations that you have already specified are deleted.

1 Appuyez sur et touchez .

 - When the logon screen appears, use the numeric keys to enter the user name and password. Then select the authentication server and press ID. Logging on to the Machine(P. 18)

2 Sélectionnez .


3 Sélectionnez une destination.


4 Spécifiez les paramètres de numérisation si nécessaire.

- Select the settings. Various Fax Settings(P. 124) 

5 Appuyez sur pour commencer l'envoi.

Scanning starts. If you want to cancel sending, press Tap .

Pour supprimer des destinations

If you specified multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary. 1 Select Confirm/Edit>.  2 Select a destination you want to delete.  3 Tap . - If you specified Group Dial in step 2, "XX destination(s)" is displayed. Tapping displays destinations registered in the group. 

REMARQUE

If you want to easily and quickly delete destinations without displaying a list of destinations Before tapping in step 1, you can press / to toggle the destinations you specified. Display a destination you want to delete, and press C LINKS Sending Faxes(P. 101)

Spécification de destinations dans un serveur LDAP

36WC-023  If your office has an LDAP server installed, you can specify a destination using user information in the server. Access the LDAP server via the machine to search for the appropriate user information and specify it as destination.

REMARQUE

- You need to specify the settings for connecting to an LDAP server beforehand. Registering LDAP Servers(P. 323)

1 Appuyez sur et touchez .

 - When the logon screen appears, use the numeric keys to enter the user name and password. Then select the authentication server and press ID. Logging on to the Machine(P. 18)

2 Sélectionnez ▶ .


3 Sélectionnez le serveur LDAP que vous utilisez.

4 Sélectionnez les conditions de recherche des informations utilisateur.

- Name, fax numbers, e-mail addresses, organization names, and organization unit are available criteria for searching destinations. 

5 Saisissez la chaîne de caractères cible de la recherche et touchez .

On how to enter text, see Entering Text(P. 24). To specify multiple search criteria, repeat steps 4 and 5.

6 Touchez .

7 Sélectionnez les conditions d'affichage du résultat de la recherche.


Searches and displays the users that meet all the search criteria specified in steps 4 and 5.

If users that meet even one of the criteria specified in steps 4 and 5 are found, displays all those users.

8 Touchez .

The users meeting your search criteria are displayed.

REMARQUE :

- If the authentication screen appears when you tap , enter the user name of the machine and the password registered in the LDAP server, and tap . Registering LDAP Servers(P. 323)

9 Cochez la case de l'utilisateur que vous souhaitez spécifier comme destination.

Up to 10 destinations can be specified from an LDAP server.

REMARQUE :

- The maximum number of destinations that you can specify when using the numeric keys in combination with an LDAP server is 10. For example, if three destinations have been specified using the numeric keys, up to seven destinations can be specified using an LDAP server.

10 Appuyez sur .

- When searching for destinations using a different set of search conditions, repeat steps 2 to 10.

Pour supprimer des destinations

If you specified multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary. 1 Select Confirm/Edit>.  2 Select a destination you want to delete.  3 Tap . 

REMARQUE

Si vous souhaitez supprimer facilement et rapidement des destinations sans afficher une liste de destinations

- Before tapping in step 1, you can tap / to toggle the destinations you specified. Display a destination you want to delete, and press C.

LIENS

Sending Faxes(P. 101) Sending Faxes to Multiple Destinations Simultaneously (Sequential Broadcast)(P. 135)

Divers paramètres de fax

36WC-024 A variety of settings are available to suit your needs, for example, when you want to adjust density or enhance the clarity of an image.  Adjusting Resolution(P. 125)  Adjusting Density(P. 126)  Scanning 2-Sided Documents(P.127)

Réglage de la résolution

36WC-025  You can select the resolution suitable for your document type. The higher the resolution is, the clearer the image becomes, but the longer it takes to send.  Select the resolution 

a < 200× 100 dpi (Normal)>

Suitable for documents that contain text only.

<200 x 200 dpi (Fin)>

Suitable for documents that contain fine text.

<200 x 200 dpi (Photo)>

Suitable for documents that contain photographs.

<200 x 400 dpi (Très fin)>

Achieves an even finer resolution than Fine. LINKS Sending Faxes(P. 101)

Réglage de la densité

36WC-026  You can adjust the density of the fax if the text or images in a document are too light or dark.  Adjust the density Apply>  a<--> Decreases the density. b <++> Increases the density.

LIENS

Sending Faxes(P. 101)

Numérisation de documents recto verso

36WC-027  The machine can automatically scan the front and back sides of documents in the feeder.

IMPORTANT

Place the documents in the feeder; the machine cannot scan both sides of documents automatically when the documents are placed on the platen glass or when the machine is set to Manual Sending.  <2-Sided Original> Select or 

Type de livre>

Select for documents whose images on the front and back sides face the same direction.

Type de calendrier>

Select for documents whose images on the front and back sides face in opposite directions.

LIENS

Sending Faxes(P. 101) Making a Call before Sending Faxes (Manual Sending)(P. 134)

Modification des paramètres par défaut

36WC-028 The default settings are the settings that are displayed whenever you turn ON the machine, or when you press . If you change these default settings to match the operations that you perform frequently, you can eliminate the need to configure the same settings every time you send faxes.  Select the setting Change the default value of the selected item Apply> 

Paramètres

Select the item you want to set, and change the default value.

REMARQUE

The default settings can be initialized ( Initialize Default Settings (P. 460) .)

LIENS

Sending Faxes(P. 101) Various Fax Settings(P. 124) Fax Settings (imageRUNNER 2206iF)(P.461)

Réception de télécopies

36WC-029 This section describes the methods for receiving faxes and how to set up the machine to receive faxes. You need to complete some procedures for using fax functions before specifying the receiving settings.

REMARQUE

An incoming fax is printed on the same size of paper as the document size received. If received fax documents are printed on other paper sizes, a portion of the page may not be printed or a page may be printed on two separate sheets of paper.

Méthodes de réception des télécopies

The machine provides the following receiving methods. Select the method that best suits your needs and then set it up by following the procedures in Setting Up the Machine to Receive Faxes(P. 130).

<Auto>	Dedicated to receiving faxes The machine receives faxes automatically. Even if someone makes a call to you, you cannot talk to the caller.
<Fax/Tel (Auto Switch)>	When the call is a fax The machine receives the fax automatically. When the call is a telephone call An incoming call rings. Pick up the handset to answer the call. NOTE: You need to connect your telephone or the optional handset to the machine beforehand.
<Answering Machine>	When the call is a fax After an incoming call rings, the machine receives the fax automatically. When the call is a telephone call The answering machine activates, enabling the caller to leave a message. If you pick up the handset before the answering machine starts recording a message, you can talk with the caller. NOTE: • You need to connect your answering machine to the machine beforehand. • Set the answering machine to answer after a few rings. • We recommend that you add approximately 4 seconds of silence at the beginning of the message or set the maximum recording time to 20 seconds.
<Manual>	When the call is a fax An incoming call rings. Pick up the handset. If you hear a beep, tap <Start Receiving> to receive faxes. Specify the destination. End R Destination When the call is a telephone call An incoming call rings. Pick up the handset. If you do not hear a beep, start your conversation.
	NOTE: • You need to connect your telephone or the optional handset to the machine beforehand. • You can set the machine to automatically receive faxes when an incoming call rings within a specified timeframe. ☐Switch to Auto RX(P. 469)
<Net Switch>	The machine distinguishes between fax and telephone calls. This mode is only available for certain countries and requires subscription to a network switch service. NOTE: You need to connect your telephone or the optional handset to the machine beforehand.

REMARQUE

- Depending on the type of telephone connected to it, the machine may not be able to send or receive faxes properly. - If you are connecting an external telephone with fax functions, set the telephone to not receive faxes automatically. - If you pick up the handset and hear a beep, the call is a fax. You can receive the fax just by using the telephone to enter a specific ID number. Using a Telephone to Receive Faxes (Remote Reception)(P. 131) Setting Up the Machine to Receive Faxes 1 Press and tap .  - When the logon screen appears, use the numeric keys to enter the user name and password. Then select the authentication server and press ID. Logging on to the Machine(P. 18) 2 Tap .  3 Select the receiving method. 

■Lors de la sélection

Specify the following three settings as necessary. When the setting is complete, tap . 

a

Enables you to specify the duration during which the machine determines whether an incoming call is a fax or a telephone call. (Setting values: 4 to 30 seconds; default setting: 8 seconds)

b

Enables you to specify the duration during which an incoming call rings for a telephone call. (Setting values: 15 to 300 seconds; default setting: 22 seconds)

Enables you to specify how the machine operates if you do not pick up the handset while an incoming call is ringing. Select to disconnect the call or to receive an incoming fax. (Default setting: )

CONSEILS

- If you want to print received documents on both sides of paper: Print on Both Sides(P. 470) - If you want to print information, such as reception date and time, at the bottom of received documents: RX Page Footer (P. 471)

Utilisation d'un téléphone pour recevoir des télécopies (réception à distance)

When you pick up the telephone and get a fax signal, you do not need to go to the machine to receive the fax. Just enter a specific ID number (default setting: 25) with the telephone, and you can start receiving the fax.

REMARQUE

When the telephone is not directly connected with the machine, the remote reception function is not available.

1 Lorsqu'un appel entrant sonne, décrochez le combiné.

2 If you hear a beep, enter the ID number for Remote Reception with the telephone. The ID number is set to 25 by default. You can change this number as necessary. Remote RX(P. 469) 3 Hang up the handset. LINKS Sending and Receiving Faxes According to Your Purposes(P. 133) Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents(P. 149)

Envoi et réception de télécopies selon vos besoins

36WC-02A In addition to the basic sending and receiving methods, there are a variety of other methods to suit your purposes.  Making a Call before Sending Faxes (Manual Sending)(P. 134)  Sending Faxes to Multiple Destinations Simultaneously (Sequential Broadcast)(P. 135)  Storing Received Faxes into Memory (Memory Reception) (P. 137)  Forwarding Received Faxes(P. 140)  Receiving Fax Information Services(P. 147)

LIENS

Sending Faxes(P. 101) Receiving Faxes(P. 129) Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents(P. 149)

Passer un appel avant d'envoyer des télécopies (envoi manuel)

36WC-02C  You can send faxes manually at the end of a phone conversation. When you hear a beep over the phone, it means the recipient is trying to receive your faxes. Press to send your faxes.

REMARQUE

You need to connect your telephone or the optional handset to the machine beforehand.

1 Placez le ou les documents. Placement des documents (P. 26)

- Place the documents in the feeder. Documents cannot be scanned from the platen glass. The machine cannot automatically scan both sides of the documents in Manual Sending.

2 Appuyez sur et touchez .

 - When the logon screen appears, use the numeric keys to enter the user name and password. Then select the authentication server and press ID. Logging on to the Machine(P. 18)

3 Spécifiez les paramètres de numérisation si nécessaire. Divers paramètres de télécopie (P. 124)

4 Composez le numéro de télécopie du destinataire.

5 Demandez au destinataire de configurer son télécopieur pour recevoir vos télécopies.

If you hear a beep, proceed to step 6.

6 Appuyez sur , puis raccrochez le combiné.

LIENS

Sending Faxes(P. 101) Canceling Sending Faxes(P. 107) Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents(P. 149)

Envoi de télécopies à plusieurs destinataires simultanément (diffusion séquentielle)

36WC-02E  You can send faxes to up to 114 destinations at once. Use the numeric keys, the Address Book, coded dial numbers, or one-touch buttons to specify destinations.

IMPORTANT

When is set to , you cannot use this feature. Prohibiting Sequential Broadcasting (imageRUNNER 2206iF)(P. 379)

NOTE

You need to register destinations in the Address Book or one-touch buttons before using this feature. Registering in the Address Book(P. 49) Specifying Destinations with the One-Touch Buttons(P. 116) 1 Place the document(s). Placing Documents(P. 26) 2 Press and tap .  - When the logon screen appears, use the numeric keys to enter the user name and password. Then select the authentication server and press ID. Logging on to the Machine(P. 18) 3 Specify the destination. - To specify with the numeric keys, enter the fax number, and tap . To specify any additional destinations, select ▷ before repeating the same procedure.  To specify from the Address Book Specifying from Address Book(P. 110)

4 Spécifiez les paramètres de numérisation si nécessaire.

- Select the settings. Various Fax Settings(P. 124) 

5 Appuyez sur pour commencer l'envoi.

LIENS

Sending Faxes(P. 101) Canceling Sending Faxes(P. 107) Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents(P. 149)

Stockage des fax reçus en mémoire (réception en mémoire)

36WC-02F  You can store received faxes into memory without printing them as soon as you receive them. The documents in memory can be printed at any time. This feature is helpful when printing confidential documents; you can print them whenever it is convenient for you and prevent unauthorized persons from seeing them unintentionally. Storing Documents into Memory(P. 137) Printing Documents in Memory(P. 138) Checking/Deleting Documents in Memory(P. 138)

NOTE

The documents in memory can be also forwarded to a destination. Forwarding Received Faxes(P. 140)

Stockage des documents en mémoire

To store received documents into memory, set to . You can also specify optional settings such as a time setting that specifies a period of time during the day in which received documents are stored in memory.  Specify each setting Apply - If a screen for entering a System Manager ID and PIN is displayed, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, tap , and press ID. Setting the System Manager ID(P. 343) 

a

Enables you to print RX Result reports every time documents are stored into memory. To print reports, tap . You also need to set to . RX Result Report (imageRUNNER 2206iF)(P. 592)

Durée de verrouillage de la mémoire>

Specify a period of time during the day in which received documents are stored in memory. If you do not set a period of time, the machine stores every document into memory when Memory Reception is turned on.

Impression des documents en mémoire

To print received documents in memory, set to . All the documents in memory are printed.

NOTE

- You cannot select a specific document for printing. - If a time for the feature to deactivate has been specified, the documents are automatically printed at the specified time.  - If a screen for entering a System Manager ID and PIN is displayed, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, tap , and press ID. Setting the System Manager ID(P. 343) 

Vérification/suppression des documents en mémoire

You can check detailed information about the documents stored in memory, including sender fax numbers and number of pages sent, and then delete unnecessary documents.

1 Appuyez sur

2 Touchez .


3 Touchez .


4 Sélectionnez le document que vous souhaitez vérifier.

 

Pour supprimer le document vérifié

1 Touchez .


2 Touchez .


LIENS

Receiving Faxes(P. 129) Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents(P. 149)

Transfert des télécopies reçues

36WC-02H  You can forward received documents to other destinations. You can select a document from among all the documents received in memory for forwarding, or set the machine to automatically forward every received document to specified destinations.

REMARQUE

- Available destinations for forwarding are limited to the destinations registered in the Address Book. If no destinations are registered, register destinations in the Address Book before using this feature. Registering in the Address Book(P. 49)

LIENS

Selecting a Document to Forward(P. 141) Forwarding All the Received Documents Automatically (P. 143)

Sélection d'un document à transférer

36WC-02J The machine forwards the document that you select from among all the documents received in memory. To use this feature, first activate the Memory Reception feature. Storing Received Faxes into Memory (Memory Reception) (P. 137)

REMARQUE

- As long as the Memory Reception feature is not deactivated, the documents in memory are not deleted even after they are forwarded; the same documents can be forwarded multiple times. - Only fax numbers can be specified for forwarding destinations.

1 Appuyez sur

2 Touchez .


3 Touchez .


4 Sélectionnez le document que vous souhaitez transférer.


5 Touchez .


6 Sélectionnez la destination de transfert dans le répertoire.

For instructions on how to use the Address Book, see Specifying from Address Book(P. 110).  The document is forwarded to the specified destination.

Transfert automatique de tous les documents reçus

36WC-02K The machine can forward all the received documents to specified destinations. Even if you are out of the office, you can receive fax information anytime, anywhere. Specifying Settings for Documents to be Forwarded Automatically(P. 143) Printing Documents to be Forwarded(P. 143) Printing/Resending/Deleting Documents that Failed to be Forwarded(P. 144)

REMARQUE

- Only e-mail addresses and shared folders can be specified for forwarding destinations. - Received documents are converted and sent as PDF files.

Spécification des paramètres pour les documents à transférer automatiquement

While the Forwarding feature is activated, all the documents to be received are automatically forwarded.  Select the forwarding destination from the Address Book 

REMARQUE

- For instructions on how to use the Address Book, see Specifying from Address Book(P. 110).

Impression des documents à transférer

If you want to check the documents to be forwarded for yourself, you can set the machine to print the documents whenever they are forwarded, or to print only the documents that failed to be forwarded.  Select or 

a

Prints all the documents to be forwarded.

b

Prints only the documents that failed to be forwarded.

Impression/renvoi/suppression des documents dont le transfert a échoué

You can store documents that failed to be forwarded in memory, and print, resend, or delete them later.

Stockage en mémoire des documents dont le transfert a échoué

 

■ Impression/renvoi/suppression des documents stockés en mémoire

1 Appuyez sur

2 Touchez .


3 Sélectionnez le document à vérifier.


Pour imprimer le document coché

1 Tap .  2 Tap .  3 Tap. 

Pour renvoyer le document coché

1 Tap .  2 Tap.  3 Select the forwarding destination from the Address Book. For instructions on how to use the Address Book, see Specifying from Address Book(P. 110). 

Pour supprimer le document coché

1 Touchez .


2 Touchez .


LIENS

Receiving Faxes(P. 129) Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents(P. 149)

Réception de services d'information par télécopie

36WC-02L  Through fax information services, you can easily get a variety of helpful lifestyle and work information from companies and organizations. This section describes a typical procedure for receiving these services.

REMARQUE

Depending on the service, actual procedures may differ from the ones described below. Follow the procedures for the service you are using.

1 Appuyez sur et touchez .

 - When the logon screen appears, use the numeric keys to enter the user name and password. Then select the authentication server and press ID. Logging on to the Machine(P. 18)

2 Touchez .

- If an external telephone or the optional handset is connected to the machine, you can pick up the handset instead of tapping . 

3 Lorsque vous entendez la tonalité, composez le numéro du service d'information.


4 Lorsque le message enregistré du service d'information répond, appuyez sur

This step is unnecessary if the machine is using a tone-dialing line. 

Utilisez les touches numériques pour saisir le numéro de service attribué aux informations que vous souhaitez recevoir.

- You can also use the keypad on the telephone to enter the information service number. 

6 Touchez .

If you have picked up the handset, hang it up. 

LIENS

Receiving Faxes(P. 129)

Vérification de l'état et du journal des documents envoyés et reçus

36WC-02R The statuses and communication logs for sent and received fax documents can be checked separately for sending and receiving. You can check detailed document information, including destinations and number of pages, and you can delete unnecessary documents.

IMPORTANT

When is set to , you cannot check the communication logs. Display Job Log (P. 497)

REMARQUE

The destinations in Manual Sending cannot be checked because they are not displayed.

1 Appuyez sur

2 Touchez ou .


3 Vérifiez les états et les journaux de communication des documents envoyés et reçus.

Pour vérifier l'état des documents envoyés et reçus

1 Touchez .


2 Sélectionnez le document dont vous souhaitez vérifier l'état.

 

a /

Displays a list of the documents that are being sent and received or are waiting to be processed.

Displays detailed information about the document selected from the list. If you specified multiple destinations, the number of specified destinations is displayed on the screen. To check the details of specified multiple destinations, tap . If you find an unnecessary document, press or , and tap .

Pour vérifier les journaux de communication des documents envoyés et reçus

1 Touchez .


2 Sélectionnez le document dont vous souhaitez vérifier le journal.

 

a /

Displays a list of the documents that were sent and received. is displayed when a document was sent or received successfully, and is displayed when a document failed to be sent or received because it was canceled or there was some error.

Détails>

Displays detailed information about the document selected from the list.

Remarque :

If the column shows a three-digit number This number represents an error code. Countermeasures for Each Error Code(P. 530)

LIENS

Fax TX Result Report (imageRUNNER 2206iF)(P. 586) Communication Management Report(P. 590) RX Result Report (imageRUNNER 2206iF)(P. 592)

Envoi de télécopies depuis votre ordinateur (PC Fax)

36WC-0EH You can send fax documents created on your computer application directly from your computer. This feature eliminates the need to print documents for faxing and saves paper. You need to complete some procedures, such as specifying the basic fax settings and installing the fax driver on your computer, before using this feature.  Sending PC Faxes(P. 152)

À propos de l'aide du pilote de télécopie

Clicking [Help] on the fax driver screen displays the Help screen. On this screen you can see information that is not in the User's Guide, including information about driver features such as registering frequently used settings and how to set up those features.

Remarque

- Depending on the operating system and the version of the fax driver you are using, the fax driver screens in this manual may differ from your screens.

IMPORTANT

- When is set to on the machine, you cannot send faxes from computers. Prohibiting PC Faxing (imageRUNNER 2206iF)(P. 375) - You need to enable Department ID Management on the fax driver you are using if Department ID Management is enabled on the machine. For more information, click [Help] on the fax driver screen. Setting the Department ID Management(P. 345) 1 Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box. - How to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction manual for the application you are using. 2 Select your fax driver, and click [Print]. 3 Specify the destination. ■Specifying one destination 1 Click the [Enter Destination] tab. 2 Specify [Communication Mode]/[Fax Number/URI]/[Fax Number]. 

Remarque :

Only one destination can be entered in the [Enter Destination] tab. To send faxes to several destinations at the same time, use the [Select Destination] tab.

■ Spécification de plusieurs destinations

1 Click the [Select Destination] tab. 2 Click [Add Destination].  3 Specify [Destination Name]/[Communication Mode]/[Fax Number/URI]/[Fax Number], and click [OK]. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to add concurrent destinations. - You can also add a destination by clicking [Add Next Destination] in step 3. - If you need to specify a number to dial an outside line, select [Detailed Settings] [Add Outside Dialing Prefix to G3/IP Fax Number] and enter the number. The specified number is added to the beginning of the fax number when the machine dials. To make it easier to specify destinations using the Address Book. - Selecting [Store Sent Fax Information and Image] enables you to store the logs for sending documents and check detailed information of a sent document along with its image, including destinations and number of pages. For more information, click [Help] on the fax driver screen.

Remarque :

If you have selected [Confirm Fax Number/URI when Setting Destination] in the dialog box that is displayed when [Security Settings] of the [Special] tab is clicked, also enter a number in [Confirm Fax Number]. For more information, click [Help] on the fax driver screen.

4 Cliquez sur [Envoyer] pour envoyer le document.

Utilisation de l'appareil comme imprimante

Utilisation de l'appareil comme imprimante 155

Impression à partir d'un ordinateur 156

CancelingPrints 158 Checking the Printing Status 161 Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print) 163 Printing via Secure Print 164 Configuring Print Settings to Your Needs 167 Registering Combinations of Frequently Used Print Settings 168 Changing Default Settings 170

Utilisation de l'appareil comme imprimante

36WC-02S There are many ways to use the machine as a printer. You can print documents on your computer by using the printer driver, or print from portable devices. Make full use of the print functions to suit your needs.

■ Impression à partir d'un ordinateur

You can print a document made on your computer by using the printer driver. Printing from a Computer(P. 156) 

Impression à partir d'appareils mobiles

- Linking mobile devices such as smartphones or tablets to this machine provides a quick and easy way to print photos and web pages. The machine also supports Google Cloud Print™. Linking with Mobile Devices(P. 230) Using Google Cloud Print(P. 249)

Impression à partir d'un ordinateur

36WC-02U You can print a document made with an application on your computer by using the printer driver. There are useful settings on the printer driver, such as enlarging/reducing and 2-sided printing, that enable you to print your documents in various ways. Before you can use this function, you need to complete some procedures, such as installing the printer driver on your computer. For more information, see the manuals for the relevant drivers on the online manual website.  About the Printer Driver Help(P. 156) To Use the Optional Items(P. 156) Basic Printing Operations(P. 156)

Aide du pilote d'imprimante

Clicking [Help] on the printer driver screen displays the Help screen. On this screen, you can see the detailed descriptions that are not in the User's Guide.

Utilisation des options

If the optional Cassette Feeding Module-AD or the optional Duplex Unit-C is attached to the machine, perform the following operation on the printer driver.

IMPORTANT

To perform the following procedure, log in to your computer with an administrator account.  Open the printer folder (Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 652)) Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine [Printer properties] or [Properties] [Device Settings] tab Select the check box for attached optional equipment [OK]

Opérations d'impression de base

This section describes how to print a document on your computer by using the printer driver.

REMARQUE

Paramètres papier sur la machine

- Normally, it is necessary to specify the paper size and type for the paper loaded in each paper source before proceeding to printing. 1 Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box. 2 Select the printer driver for this machine, and click [Preferences] or [Properties]. 3 Specify the print settings as necessary, and click [OK]. - Switch the tab according to the settings.  4 Click [Print] or [OK]. → Printing starts. If you want to cancel printing, see CancelingPrints(P.158).

LIENS

Checking the Printing Status(P. 161)

Annulation des impressions

36WC-02X You can cancel printing from your computer or on the control panel of the machine. From a Computer(P. 158) From the Control Panel(P. 159)

Depuis un ordinateur

You can cancel printing from the printer icon displayed on the system tray on the desktop.

1 Double-cliquez sur l'icône de l'imprimante.


REMARQUE :

When the printer icon is not displayed Open the printer folder (Displaying the Printer Folder(P.652)), right-click your printer icon, and click [See what's printing] (or double-click the icon of the printer driver for the machine).

2 Sélectionnez le document à annuler, puis cliquez sur [Document] ▸ [Annuler].


3 Cliquez sur [Oui].

 - Printing of the selected document is canceled.

REMARQUE

Several pages may be output after you cancel printing.

CONSEILS

Annulation depuis l'interface utilisateur distante

You can cancel printing from the [Print: Job Status] page on the Remote UI: Checking Current Status of Print Documents(P. 415)

Annulation depuis une application

On some applications, a screen like shown below appears. You can cancel printing by clicking [Cancel]. 

Depuis le panneau de commande

Cancel printing using or

Appuyez sur Annuler


Si l'écran affiche une liste de documents lorsque vous appuyez sur Annuler

Tap the document to cancel.   

Utilisez Annuler

 > > > Select the document on the screen > >   

REMARQUE

Several pages may be output after you cancel printing.

LIENS

Basic Printing Operations(P. 156) Checking the Printing Status(P. 161)

Vérification de l'état d'impression

36WC-02Y You can check the current print statuses.

IMPORTANT

- When is set to , you cannot check the print logs. Display Job Log(P. 497)

Utile dans les cas suivants

- When your documents are not printed for a long time, you may want to see the waiting list of the documents waiting to be printed. - When you cannot find your printouts that you thought had been printed, you may want to see whether an error has occurred. 1 Press 2 Tap . 3 Tap .  4 Select the document to check.  a Displays a list of the documents that are being processed or are waiting to be processed. Details> Displays detailed information about the document selected from the list. LINKS Basic Printing Operations(P. 156)

Impression d'un document sécurisé par un code PIN (impression sécurisée)

36WC-03R By setting a PIN to a document when printing from a computer, the document is held in the memory of the machine, and is not printed until the correct PIN is entered on the control panel of the machine. This function is called "Secure Print," and the document that is protected by a PIN is called a "secured document." Using Secure Print keeps printouts of confidential documents from being left unattended.  Printing via Secure Print(P. 164)

Impression via l'impression sécurisée

36WC-03S This section describes how to print a document from an application as a secured document. The first part of this section describes how to send a secured document to the machine, and the second part of this section describes how to print the secured document on the machine. Sending a Secured Document from a Computer to the Machine(P. 164) Printing Out Secured Documents(P. 165) Changing the Valid Time Period for Secured Documents(P. 165)

Envoi d'un document sécurisé depuis un ordinateur à la machine

1 Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box. 2 Select the printer driver for this machine, and click [Preferences] or [Properties]. 3 Select [Secured Print] in [Output Method]. The [Information] pop-up screen is displayed. Check the message, and click [Yes] or [No]. 4 Specify the print settings as necessary, and click [OK]. - Switch the tab according to the settings.  5 Click [Print] or [OK]. After the secured document is sent to the machine, it is held in the memory of the machine waiting to be printed.

Impression de documents sécurisés

Prints secured documents sent to the machine. After a valid time period ( Changing the Valid Time Period for Secured Documents(P. 165) ) has elapsed, the secured document will be deleted from the memory of the machine and can no longer be printed.

REMARQUE

- If secured documents are left unprinted, they occupy the memory and may prevent the machine from printing even ordinary (not secured) documents. Make sure that you print your secured documents as soon as you can. - You can check how much memory is being used for secured documents.  Device Information> Secure Print Memory Usage 1 Tap in the screen. 2 Select the secured document to print.

REMARQUE :

If a screen to select a user is displayed - If secured documents from two or more users are stored in memory, the screen for user selection is displayed prior to the screen for file selection. Select your user name. Deleting a secured document - You can delete documents. Tap ▷ select the secured document to delete ▷ . 3 Enter the PIN, and tap . Printing starts. - If you want to cancel printing, tap ▶.

Modification de la durée de validité des documents sécurisés

You can change the valid time period from the time secured document data is sent to the machine until the time it is deleted within a certain period of time. 1 Tap in the screen. 2 Tap . - If a screen for entering a System Manager ID and PIN is displayed, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, tap , and press . Logging on to the Machine(P. 18) 3 Select .

REMARQUE :

When cannot be selected Set to . Disabling Secure Print Set to .

4 Spécifiez la durée de conservation des documents sécurisés par la machine, puis touchez .

- The secured document is deleted from the memory of the machine unless it is printed before the time specified here elapses.

LIENS

Checking the Printing Status(P. 161) Restricting Printing from a Computer(P. 380)

Configuration des paramètres d'impression selon vos besoins

36WC-03J You can register combinations of settings as "profiles" to suit your different printing objectives. Also, you can register the settings that you frequently use as the default settings. Once the default settings are registered, they are displayed automatically in the printer driver screen, and you can skip the operations to specify them and proceed to printing immediately. 

Enregistrement de combinaisons de paramètres d'impression fréquemment utilisés

36WC-03K Specifying combinations of settings such as "1-sided landscape orientation on A4 size paper in save toner mode" every time you print is time consuming. If you register your frequently used combinations of print settings as "profiles," you can specify print settings simply by selecting one of the profiles from the list. This section explains how to register profiles and how to print using profiles. Registering a Profile(P. 168) Selecting a Profile(P. 169)

Enregistrement d'un profil

1 Modifiez les paramètres que vous souhaitez enregistrer en tant que profil, puis cliquez sur [Ajouter].

- Make print settings as required on the [Basic Settings], [Page Setup], [Finishing], and [Quality] tabs. 

2 Saisissez un nom de profil dans [Nom], sélectionnez une icône, puis cliquez sur [OK].

As necessary, enter comments about the profile in [Comment]. - Click [View Settings] to see the settings that will be registered. 

REMARQUE

Modification d'un profil

By clicking [Edit] on the right side of [Profile] on the screen shown in step 1, you can change the name, icon, or comment of the profiles you have previously registered. However, you cannot edit the pre-registered profiles.

Sélection d'un profil

Simply select the profile that suits your objective, and click [OK]. 

REMARQUE

Modification des paramètres du profil actuellement sélectionné

You can change the settings of the currently selected profile. In addition, the changed settings can be registered as another profile.

LIENS

Basic Printing Operations(P. 156) Changing Default Settings(P. 170)

Modification des paramètres par défaut

36WC-03L The default settings are the settings that are first displayed whenever you open the print settings screen of the printer driver. You can change these settings to the settings that you use most often. For example, if you always want to print 2 document pages on each printout page, set [2 on 1] as the default page layout setting. From the next time that you open the printer driver screen, the setting will always be [2 on 1], eliminating the need to change this setting every time you make prints.

IMPORTANT

To perform the following procedure, log on to your computer with an administrator account. 1 Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 652) 2 Right-click the icon of the machine and then click [Printing preferences].  3 Change the settings on the printing preferences screen, and click [OK]. - Make print settings as required on the [Basic Settings], [Page Setup], [Finishing], and [Quality] tabs. 

LIENS

Basic Printing Operations(P. 156) Registering Combinations of Frequently Used Print Settings(P. 168)

Utilisation de la machine comme scanner

Utilisation de la machine comme scanner 173

Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner 174 Scanning from the Machine 175 Scanning from a Computer 178 Scanning Using an Application 179 Configuring Scan Settings in ScanGear MF 181 Using WSD 182

Numérisation pratique avec une opération basée sur la machine 186

Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine 187 Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder 194 Canceling Sending Documents (E-Mail/Shared Folder) 197 Specifying Detailed Settings 199 Specifying a Scanning Size 200 Setting Color Mode 201 Selecting a File Format 202 Adjusting Density 203 Specifying Orientation of Your Document 204 Selecting Document Type 205 Scanning 2-Sided Documents 206 Adjusting Balance between File Size and Image Quality 207 Setting Gamma Values 208

Envoi vers des destinations enregistrées (e-mail/dossier partagé) 209

Specifying from Address Book 210 Selecting Destinations Directly by Entering Coded Dial Numbers 213 Specifying Destinations with the One-Touch Buttons 216 Specifying Previously Used Destinations 218 Specifying Destinations in an LDAP Server (E-Mail) 221 Changing Default Settings 225 Checking Status and Log for Sent Documents (E-Mail/Shared Folder) 227

Utilisation de la machine comme scanner

36WC-03U You can scan original documents by using the control panel of the machine or an application on a computer. Whichever way you use, the scanned documents are converted into electronic file formats such as PDFs. Use the scan function to convert large-volume paper documents into files so that you can organize them easily.

REMARQUE

- To use this machine as a scanner, you must complete preparations in advance, including installation of software to a computer. For more information, see the manuals for the relevant drivers or software on the online manual website. To connect the machine to your computer via a network, you must register the machine to the installed software. Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner(P. 174) Depending on the operating system and the version of the scanner driver or applications you are using, the screens in this manual may differ from your screens.

Numérisation à partir de la machine

You can scan and save documents to your computer by using the control panel of the machine. You can also send documents as e-mail attachments. Scanning from the Machine(P. 175) Convenient Scanning with a Machine-Based Operation(P. 186) 

Numérisation à partir d'un ordinateur

You can scan documents placed on the machine from a computer. The scanned documents are saved to the computer. You can scan using MF Scan Utility (included with the machine), or with other applications such as an image-processing or word-processing application. Scanning from a Computer(P. 178) 

Numérisation à partir d'appareils mobiles

- Linking mobile devices such as smartphones or tablets to this machine provides a quick and easy way to scan originals set on this machine. Linking with Mobile Devices(P. 230)

Préparation de l'utilisation de la machine comme scanner

36WC-03W To use this machine as a scanner, you must complete preparations in advance, including installation of software to a computer. For more information, see the manuals for the relevant drivers on the online manual website. In Windows, when connecting this machine to a computer via a wireless or wired LAN, you need to register this machine in "MF Network Scanner Selector" using the following procedure. This procedure is not required if the machine and your computer are connected via USB.

IMPORTANT

- The scan function is not available if the machine and your computer are connected in an IPv6 environment. Use IPv4 or a USB connection. - When using the machine with a USB connection, exit sleep mode before scanning. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 66)

1 Cliquez dans la zone de notification.


2 Cochez la case correspondant à la machine, puis cliquez sur [OK].

 - Up to ten computers can be connected at a time on a network to one product (scatterer).

Numérisation à partir de la machine

36WC-03X  The sequence of "scanning a document and saving it to a computer" can only be done when scanning from the machine. Scan while specifying what computer documents will be saved to; whether to scan documents in color or black and white; whether to save documents as PDFs or JPEGs; and other settings.

1 Placez le ou les documents. Placement des documents (P. 26)

 

2 Appuyez sur et touchez .

 - When the logon screen appears, use the numeric keys to enter the user name and password. Then select the authentication server and press ID. Logging on to the Machine(P. 18)

3 Touchez .


4 Sélectionnez l'ordinateur de destination.

This screen is not displayed if only a computer is connected to the machine via USB. 

5 Sélectionnez le type de numérisation.


Scan type	Color	Resolution	File format
<Color Scan>	Color	300 dpi	JPEG (Exif)
<Black & White Scan>	Black and white*1	300 dpi	PDF (searchable*2)
<Custom 1>	Color	300 dpi	JPEG (Exif)
<Custom 2>	Color	300 dpi	JPEG (Exif)

*1 Documents are scanned in black and white only, with no intermediate shades of gray. *2 A PDF format where characters on the document are scanned as text data and the text can be searched using a computer.

REMARQUE :

Pour modifier les paramètres

- The settings in the table above are all factory default settings. You can change settings from MF Scan Utility. For more information, click [Instructions] on MF Scan Utility. - If you are a macOS user, see the manuals for the relevant drivers or software on the online manual website.

6

Appuyez

Scanning starts. To cancel, tap ▷ .

IMPORTANT :

You cannot scan while the ScanGear MF is displayed. Close the screen before scanning. 

■ Lorsque vous placez des documents dans le chargeur à l'étape 1

When scanning is complete, the save destination folder is displayed on the computer.

■ Lorsque vous placez des documents sur la vitre d'exposition à l'étape 1

When scanning is complete, follow the procedure below (when file format is PDF). 1 If there are additional pages of documents to be scanned, place the next document on the platen glass,   Repeat this step until you finish scanning all of the pages. - When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to the next step. 2 Tap. The save destination folder is displayed on the computer.

REMARQUE

À propos du dossier de destination d'enregistrement

- By default, the scanned data is saved to the [My Documents] folder. A subfolder named with the scanning date is created, and the data is saved to that folder. - You can change the save destination from the MF Scan Utility. For more information, click [Instructions] on MF Scan Utility.

ASTUCE

Autres fonctions de numérisation utiles

- You can send scanned documents by e-mail. The documents can also be saved to shared folders. You can accomplish these functions directly from the machine. Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 187) Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder(P. 194)

Numérisation à partir d'un ordinateur

36WC-03Y There are three ways to scan from a computer: using MF Scan Utility, using an application such as an image-processing or word-processing application, and using WSD. 

Numérisation avec MF Scan Utility

 MF Scan Utility is an application included with the machine that enables you to scan documents or images to a computer. You can forward the scanned data to a specified application, or attach it to an e-mail message. For more information, click [Instructions] on MF Scan Utility.

REMARQUE

If you are a macOS user, see the manuals for the relevant drivers or software on the online manual website.

Numérisation à l'aide d'une application

 You can scan images by using an application such as a word-processing or image-processing application, and load the images directly into the application. You do not need to start another application to scan.

Utilisation de WSD pour numériser

Even if you do not have a dedicated scanner driver, you can scan a document easily from a computer using the WSD function available for Windows. Using WSD(P. 182)

Numérisation à l'aide d'une application

36WC-042  You can scan originals from applications such as image-processing or word-processing software. The scanned image is directly loaded in the application, allowing you to edit or process the image immediately. The following procedure varies depending on the application.

IMPORTANT

- The application must be compatible with TWAIN or WIA*. For more information, see the instruction manual for your application. * TWAIN is a standard for connecting image input devices, such as scanners, with computers. WIA is a function that is an integrated standard in Windows. - When using the machine with a USB connection, exit sleep mode before scanning. ☐Entering Sleep Mode(P. 66)

1 Placez les documents. Placement des documents (P. 26)

 

IMPORTANT :

- The second or subsequent documents may not be scanned, or an error message may be displayed depending on the application. In such a case, place and scan one document at a time. - When is set to , you must tap ▷ in the screen to bring the machine online. □Auto Online for Remote Scan(P. 496)

2. Dans l'application, sélectionnez la commande de démarrage de numérisation.

The procedure for selecting the start scan command varies depending on the application. For more information, see the instruction manual for your application.

3. Sélectionnez le pilote de scanner pour la machine.

- Select ScanGear MF or WIA. If you select ScanGear MF, you can configure advanced scan settings.

4. Configurez les paramètres de numérisation si nécessaire.

5. Cliquez sur [Numériser].

Scanning starts. - When scanning is complete, the scanned image is forwarded to an application.

LIENS

Configuring Scan Settings in ScanGear MF(P. 181)

Configuration des paramètres de numérisation dans ScanGear MF

36WC-043  You can use ScanGear MF to configure advanced scan settings when you scan. The way of starting ScanGear MF differs depending on the way of scanning from the computer.

Démarrage à partir de MF Scan Utility

When scanning from MF Scan Utility, click [ScanGear] to start ScanGear MF. For more information, click [Instructions] on MF Scan Utility.

REMARQUE

- If you are a macOS user, see the manuals for the relevant drivers or software on the online manual website.

Démarrage à partir d'une application

To scan from applications such as image-processing or word-processing software, select ScanGear MF as scanner driver. Scanning Using an Application(P. 179)

ASTUCES

Opérations disponibles avec ScanGear MF

- Previewing the image before scanning - Specifying the scanning area - Finely adjusting the image quality

Comment utiliser ScanGear MF

- Click for ScanGear MF, and see help.  "WSD (Web Services on Devices)" is a function to search devices located on the network. Using WSD enables you to automatically find the machine on the network from a computer, and start scanning the document on the machine. This function is called "WSD Scan." You need to complete some procedures before using WSD Scan.

Préparation pour la numérisation WSD


Depuis le panneau de commande

1 Tap in the screen. 2 Tap ▷ ▷ ▷ . 3 Select in and then select in . 

Depuis un ordinateur

4 Click [Start] [Devices and Printers]. 5 Click [Add a device].  6 Select this machine and click [Next]. Follow the on-screen instructions to operate.

REMARQUE :

- If this machine is not displayed, a Firewall setting problem may exist. For more information, see the instruction manual of the computer.

Numérisation d'originaux à l'aide de WSD (analyse WSD)


Depuis le panneau de commande

REMARQUE

When is set to Off Tap in the screen to bring the machine online before operating the machine. System Management Settings(P. 492) Scanning is not possible in the following instances. - During printing, copying, faxing, etc. - When importing/exporting the Address Book - When cleaning the fixing assembly - When paper is jammed in the feeder - When the front cover is open - When the machine is waiting for a wireless LAN connection or Direct Connection Scan after these operations are completed or remedying the error. 1 Place the document. Placing Documents(P. 26)   

Depuis un ordinateur

2 Click [Start] [All Programs] [Windows Fax and Scan]. 3 Click [Scan]. 

4 Cliquez sur [Nouvelle analyse].

 - When the [Select Device] dialog box is displayed, select the machine and click [OK].

5 Dans la liste déroulante [Source], sélectionnez l'emplacement où le document est placé.

- When placing the document on the platen glass, select [Flatbed]. When placing in the feeder, select [Feeder (Scan one side)] or [Feeder (Scan both sides)]. 

6 Spécifiez les paramètres de numérisation si nécessaire.

- Selecting the type of document from the [Profile] drop-down list enables you to make adjustments for the optimal image quality. For documents mainly consisting of text, select [Document]. For documents consisting of photographs only, select [Photo (Default)]. From the [File type] drop-down list, select the file format for the document to be scanned and saved. To check the document image with the specified settings reflected, click [Preview].

7 Cliquez sur [Analyser].

Scanning a document starts. - When scanning is complete, the scanned document is displayed in the list of files on the [Windows Fax and Scan] screen and saved in the [Scanned Documents] folder of [Documents].

REMARQUE

Enregistrement des paramètres de numérisation fréquemment utilisés

- If you always scan with the same settings, follow the procedures below to register the settings. You can easily and conveniently recall them when scanning. Select [Add profile] from the [Profile] drop-down list Specify the scan settings you want to register Enter a name in the [Profile name] text box Click [Save Profile]

Envoi du document à un ordinateur à l'aide de WSD

- You can also send the scanned document to computers on the network that support WSD. In this case, tap on the screen select the computer you want to send to tap . The [Windows Fax and Scan] screen and the folder open in the computer, and the scanned document is displayed.

Numérisation pratique avec une opération basée sur la machine

36WC-047 The machine can convert original documents into electronic file formats such as PDF without using a computer. There are many advantages to digitizing documents. A variety of useful settings are available to suit your needs.

REMARQUE

- For imageRUNNER 2206N, this function can only be used when the optional Color Send Kit is attached.

Envoi de documents par e-mail directement depuis la machine

You can save scanned documents as JPEG images, PDF files or in other digital file formats and send them directly from the machine as e-mail attachments. You can work more efficiently because this feature eliminates the need to use your computer to send scanned documents. Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 187) 

Enregistrement de documents directement dans un dossier partagé

You can save scanned documents as JPEG images, PDF files or in other digital file formats and store them in shared folders on computers. This feature is helpful when digitalizing paper documents for sharing. Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder(P. 194) 

Envoi de documents par e-mail directement depuis la machine

36WC-048 This section describes how to scan documents and send them as e-mails directly from the machine. Scanned documents are sent as e-mail attachments in JPEG, PDF, or other digital file formats. You can specify multiple destinations, including Cc/Bcc destinations, just like you can when sending normal e-mails.

REMARQUE

- To send e-mails directly from the machine, you must complete preparations in advance, including specification of mail server settings. Configuring Scan Settings (Sending E-Mail)(P. 297) - When you specify multiple destinations, the second and following destinations must be ones registered in the Address Book. As for Cc and Bcc, you can only specify destinations registered in the Address Book. To use the Address Book, you must complete the necessary registration procedure in advance. Registering in the Address Book(P. 49)

1 Placez le ou les documents. Placement des documents (P. 26)


2 Appuyez sur et touchez .

 - When the logon screen appears, use the numeric keys to enter the user name and password. Then select the authentication server and press ID. Logging on to the Machine(P. 18)

3 Touchez .


4 Saisissez la destination à l'aide des touches numériques, puis touchez .

On how to enter text, see Entering Text(P. 24). To use the Address Book to quickly specify destinations: Sending Using Registered Destinations (E-Mail/ Shared Folder)(P. 209) 

5 Spécifiez plusieurs destinations, y compris les destinations Cc/Cci, si nécessaire.

- Tap , and select the method for specifying destinations.  

6 Spécifiez les paramètres de numérisation si nécessaire.

Tap the settings. Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 199) 

REMARQUE :

- The file name of a scanned document is automatically assigned based on the following format: "communication management number (four digits)_sent date and time_document number (three digits).file extension." Example of file names: If a one-page document is converted into a PDF file and sent on October 17, 2015 at 07:00:05 P.M. "0045_151017190005_001.pdf" You cannot specify file names yourself.

7 Spécifiez l'objet, le corps, l'adresse de réponse et la priorité de l'e-mail si nécessaire.

The subject and the priority are set to "Attached Image" and "Standard" respectively by default. The body is not set by default. Enter it as necessary. Without the body text, only scanned documents are sent. - The reply-to address is not set by default. If you want to display the reply-to address differently from that of the machine, specify the address from among those registered in the Address Book. If no destination is registered in the Address Book, see Registering in the Address Book(P. 49). 

Pour spécifier l'objet/le corps

1 Touchez .


2 Touchez .


3 Saisissez le sujet à l'aide des touches numériques, puis appuyez sur .


4 Appuyez sur .


5 Saisissez le corps du message à l'aide des touches numériques, puis appuyez sur .


6 Appuyez sur .


Pour spécifier l'adresse de réponse

1 Tap.  2 Tap .  3 Select a reply-to address from the Address Book. For instructions on how to use the Address Book, see 口 Specifying from Address Book(P. 210). 

Pour spécifier la priorité

1 Tap .  2 Select a priority level. 

8 Appuyez sur pour commencer l'envoi.

Scanning of the document starts. - To cancel sending, tap . ☐Canceling Sending Documents (E-Mail/Shared Folder) (P. 197)

■Lorsque vous placez des documents dans le chargeur à l'étape 1

When scanning is complete, the e-mail is sent.

■Lorsque vous placez des documents sur la vitre d'exposition à l'étape 1

When scanning is complete, follow the procedures below (except if you selected JPEG as a file format in step 6). 1 If there are additional pages of documents to be scanned, place the next document on the platen glass, and press . Repeat this step until you finish scanning all of the pages. - When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to the next step. 2 Tap. The e-mail is sent.

Si une erreur d'envoi se produit

Error notifications are sometimes sent to the e-mail address set to the machine. If you leave it as-is, it may result in an insufficient remaining capacity of mailbox depending on your mail server. It is recommended that you clear the mailbox periodically.

Pour vider la boîte aux lettres

IMPORTANT :

- When the mailbox is cleared, all e-mail in the server mailbox is deleted. When you specify the e-mail account that you use usually, you should first check whether any e-mail in the mailbox needs to be kept. 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. O Starting Remote UI(P. 409) 2 Click [Settings/Registration]. 

3 Cliquez sur [Paramètres réseau] ▸ [Paramètres e-mail].


4 Cliquez sur [Effacer] dans [Effacer la boîte aux lettres].


5 Lisez le message affiché, puis cliquez sur [OK].

 E-mail is deleted from the mailbox.

ASTUCES

- If you always want to scan with the same settings: Changing Default Settings(P. 225) - If you want to specify the e-mail sender name: Register Unit Name (E-Mail)(P. 476)

LIENS

Checking Status and Log for Sent Documents (E-Mail/Shared Folder)(P. 227)

Enregistrement direct de documents dans un dossier partagé

36WC-049 This section describes how to scan documents and save them to a shared folder directly from the machine. Scanned documents are saved as JPEG images, PDF files or in other digital file formats.

REMARQUE

- To save documents directly to a shared folder, you must complete preparations in advance, including specification of the save destination. Configuring the Machine for Scanning to Shared Folders(P. 306) - Available destinations for shared folders are limited to the destinations registered in the Address Book. To specify a destination using the Address Book, it is necessary to register the destinations for shared folders beforehand. Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location(P. 307) Registering Address Book from Remote UI(P. 426) - You can only specify one destination at a time.

1 Placez le ou les documents. Placement des documents (P. 26)

 

2 Appuyez sur et touchez .

 - When the logon screen appears, use the numeric keys to enter the user name and password. Then select the authentication server and press ID. Logging on to the Machine(P. 18)

3 Touchez .


4 Sélectionnez une destination dans le carnet d'adresses.

For instructions on how to use the Address Book, see Specifying from Address Book(P. 210).  - Selecting destinations directly by entering coded dial numbers. You can also specify previously used destinations. Selecting Destinations Directly by Entering Coded Dial Numbers(P. 213) Specifying Previously Used Destinations(P. 218)

5 Spécifiez les paramètres de numérisation si nécessaire.

- Tap the settings. Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 199) 

REMARQUE :

- The file name of a scanned document is automatically assigned based on the following format: "communication management number (four digits)_sent date and time_document number (three digits).file extension name." Example of file names: If a one-page document is converted into a PDF file and sent on October 17, 2015 at 07:00:05 P.M. "0045_151017190005_001.pdf" - You cannot specify file names yourself. 

Appuyez sur pour démarrer la numérisation.

Scanning of the document starts. - To cancel scanning, tap ▷ . ☐Canceling Sending Documents (E-Mail/Shared Folder) (P. 197)

■ Lorsque vous placez des documents dans le chargeur à l'étape 1

When scanning is complete, the documents are scanned to the shared folder.

■ Lorsque vous placez des documents sur la vitre d'exposition à l'étape 1

When scanning is complete, follow the procedures below (except if you selected JPEG as a file format in step 5). 1 If there are additional pages of documents to be scanned, place the next document on the platen glass, and press . Repeat this step until you finish scanning all of the pages. - When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to the next step. 2 Tap.

ASTUCES

- If you always want to scan with the same settings: Changing Default Settings(P. 225)

LIENS

Checking Status and Log for Sent Documents (E-Mail/Shared Folder)(P. 227)

Annulation de l'envoi de documents (e-mail/dossier partagé)

36WC-04A If you want to cancel sending documents immediately after pressing  tap < Cancel on the display or press  You can also cancel sending documents after checking the sending status.

Utiliser pour annuler

  

Appuyer pour annuler


Si l'écran affiche une liste de documents lorsque est enfoncé

Documents have been scanned and are waiting to be processed. Select the document to cancel.  Check the Transmission Status before Canceling   Select the document   

LIENS

Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 187) Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder(P. 194) Checking Status and Log for Sent Documents (E-Mail/Shared Folder)(P. 227)

Spécification des paramètres détaillés

36WC-04C This section describes the settings available when scanning documents. These settings include specifying the file format into which documents are converted and adjusting density to improve the appearance of scanned documents as well as the basic settings such as specifying the document orientation or scanning size.  Specifying a Scanning Size(P. 200)  Setting Color Mode(P. 201)  Selecting a File Format(P. 202)  Adjusting Density(P. 203)  Specifying Orientation of Your Document(P. 204)  Selecting Document Type(P. 205)  Scanning 2-Sided Documents (P. 206)  Adjusting Balance between File Size and Image Quality(P. 207)  Setting Gamma Values(P. 208)

Spécification d'une taille de numérisation

36WC-04E  You can specify the scanning size of your documents.  Specify a destination with / Select the document size 

LIENS

Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 187) Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder(P. 194)

Réglage du mode couleur

36WC-04F  You can specify whether to scan documents in color or black and white.  Specify a destination with / Select the color mode 

LIENS

Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 187) Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder(P. 194) 36WC-04H  You can select the file format to which documents are scanned, from PDF/JPEG/TIFF. For PDF, you can select a highly compressed PDF file with a reduced file size.  Specify a destination with / Select a file format 

a

Converts a scanned document into a PDF file with no file size reduction.

Converts a scanned document into a PDF file with a reduced file size than that of .

C

The scanned document is converted into a JPEG file.

d

The scanned document is converted into a TIFF file.

REMARQUE

- If you select JPEG in and try to scan a document from the platen glass, you can only scan one page. To scan a multiple-page document all at once, use the feeder. Each page of the document is saved as a separate file. If you select TIFF or PDF, you can scan multiple-page documents either from the platen glass or from the feeder and the whole of the scanned document is saved as one file. - compresses photos and illustrations on documents more than . The file will be smaller, but the image quality of some documents or the number of documents that can be scanned at once may be lower.

LIENS

Réglage de la densité

36WC-04J  You can adjust the density of the scan if the text or images in a document are too light or dark.  Specify a destination with / Adjust the density Apply  a<--> Decreases the density. b <++> Increases the density.

LIENS

Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 187) Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder(P. 194)

Spécification de l'orientation de votre document

36WC-04K  You can specify portrait or landscape orientation.  Specify a destination with / Select the document type 

a

Select for documents with portrait orientation.

Select for documents with landscape orientation.

LIENS

Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 187) Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder(P. 194)

Sélection du type de document

36WC-04L  You can select the image quality for the scan depending on the document type, such as text-only documents, documents with charts and graphs, or magazine photos.  Specify a destination with / Select the document type 

a

Suitable when scanning documents that only contain text.

Texte/Photo>

Suitable when scanning documents that contain both text and photos.

Suitable when scanning documents that contain printed photos, such as magazines or pamphlets.

LIENS

Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 187) Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder(P. 194)

Numérisation de documents recto verso

36WC-04R  The machine can automatically scan the front and back sides of documents in the feeder.

IMPORTANT

- The machine cannot scan both sides of documents automatically when the documents are placed on the platen glass. - When using the machine with a USB connection, exit sleep mode before scanning. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 66)

REMARQUE

- For imageRUNNER 2206N, this function can only be used when the optional DADF-AY is attached.  Specify a destination with / <2-Sided Original> Select or 

Type Livre>

Select for documents whose images on the front and back sides face the same direction.

Type Calendrier>

Select for documents whose images on the front and back sides face in opposite directions.

LIENS

Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 187) Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder(P. 194)

Réglage de l'équilibre entre la taille du fichier et la qualité de l'image

36WC-04S  You can specify the file compression ratio when converting scanned documents into the JPEG format. makes the compression ratio higher than normal to create smaller files with lower image quality. On the other hand, makes the compression ratio lower than normal larger files with higher image quality.  Specify a destination with / Specify the setting 

The data size is highly compressed and reduced, but the image quality becomes low. The compression ratio and the image quality are adjusted to an intermediate setting between and .

The image quality improves, but the data compression ratio decreased and data size becomes large.

LIENS

Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 187) Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder(P. 194) Selecting a File Format(P. 202)

Réglage des valeurs gamma

36WC-04U   The scanned documents are converted into the specified file formats. At that time, you can specify the gamma values to apply to the documents. You can specify the same gamma value as that of the monitor which is to be used for viewing the converted files so the files are displayed with brightness true to the original documents.

REMARQUE

- For the gamma value of a monitor display, see the instruction manual included with the display. 

Select the gamma value 

LIENS

Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 187) Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder(P. 194) Selecting a File Format(P. 202)

Envoi à l'aide de destinations enregistrées (e-mail/dossier partagé)

36WC-04W You can specify destinations by selecting from the Address Book as well as by using the numeric keys. To use the Address Book, you need to register destinations in the Address Book beforehand. You can also specify previously used destinations.  Specifying from Address Book(P. 210)  Selecting Destinations Directly by Entering Coded Dial Numbers(P. 213)  Specifying Destinations with the One-Touch Buttons(P. 216)  Specifying Previously Used Destinations(P. 218)  Specifying Destinations in an LDAP Server (E-Mail)(P. 221)

CONSEILS pour renforcer la sécurité

- If you want to limit available destinations to ones from the Address Book, ones in an LDAP server, or previously specified ones: Limiting Available Destinations(P. 374) - If you want to disable specifying previously used destinations: Disabling Use of Previously Used Destinations (P. 376)

LIENS

Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 187) Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder(P. 194) Registering in the Address Book(P. 49)

Spécification à partir du carnet d'adresses

36WC-04X  The Address Book enables you to specify a destination by selecting from a list of registered destinations or by searching by name for destinations with recipient names.

REMARQUE

- You need to register destinations in the Address Book before using this feature. Registering in the Address Book(P. 49) - To register shared folders as destinations, you need to perform the registration procedure from the computer. Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location(P. 307) Registering Address Book from Remote UI(P. 426)

1 Appuyez sur et touchez .

 - When the logon screen appears, use the numeric keys to enter the user name and password. Then select the authentication server and press ID. Logging on to the Machine(P. 18)

2 Touchez ou .

 If you select , proceed to step 4.

3 Sélectionnez Spécifier à partir du carnet d'adresses>.

  - If the screen appears, select , , or as a destination type.

4 Sélectionnez un onglet à l'aide de / .

 Displays all the destinations registered in the Address Book.  Only destinations for one-touch dialing are displayed.

<A-Z>/<0-9>/<ABC> to <YZ> 

Displays destinations with recipient names whose first characters correspond to the characters of the selected tab.  Displays destinations for faxes. Do not use in this procedure. To specify destinations using this tab, see Specifying from Address Book(P. 110).  Displays destinations for e-mails.  Displays destinations for shared folders.  Displays a list of destinations registered in Group Dial. This feature is not available when scanning documents to shared folders.

5 Sélectionnez une destination.


REMARQUE :

If you want to specify multiple destinations (e-mail) Repeat steps 3 to 5. Up to 50 destinations can be specified.

Pour supprimer des destinations (e-mail)

If you specified multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary. 1 Select Confirm/Edit>.   2 Select a destination you want to delete.  3 Tap. - If you select Group Dial in step 2, is displayed. Tapping this item displays destinations registered in the group.  4 Tap.

REMARQUE

Si vous souhaitez supprimer facilement et rapidement des destinations sans afficher une liste de destinations

- Before tapping in step 1, you can tap / to toggle the destinations you specified. Display a destination you want to delete, and press

LIENS

Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 187) Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder(P. 194)

Sélection de destinations directement en saisissant des numéros de numérotation abrégée

36WC-04Y  Three-digit numbers (coded dial numbers) are assigned to addresses in the Address Book. You can specify an address simply by entering its coded dial number.

REMARQUE

- To use coded dial numbers, the destination must be registered in the Address Book beforehand. Registering Destinations in the Address Book(P. 50) - To register shared folders as destinations, you need to perform the registration procedure from the computer. Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location(P. 307) Registering Address Book from Remote UI(P. 426)

1 Appuyez sur et touchez .

 - When the logon screen appears, use the numeric keys to enter the user name and password. Then select the authentication server and press ID. Logging on to the Machine(P. 18)

2 Touchez ou .


3 Sélectionnez Spécifier à partir de Numérotation abrégée>.

■Si est sélectionné à l'étape 2

   - If the screen appears, select , , or as a destination type.

Si est sélectionné à l'étape 2


4 Utilisez les touches numériques pour saisir un numéro à trois chiffres (001 à 100).

- If you enter the wrong characters, press C. (Press to delete each character one by one; press and hold to delete all the input characters at once.) 

REMARQUE :

Si un écran de confirmation apparaît

- When is set to , a screen is displayed that shows the destination and the name for the number. (For Group Dial, the group name and the number of destinations are shown.) Check the contents and if everything is correct, tap . To specify a different destination, tap and then re-enter the three-digit coded dial number. Displaying Destinations in Address Book(P. 377) If you want to specify multiple destinations (e-mail) Repeat steps 2 and 3. Up to 50 destinations can be specified.

Pour supprimer des destinations (e-mail)

If you specified multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary. 1 Select Confirm/Edit>.  2 Select a destination you want to delete.  3 Tap. - If you select Group Dial in step 2, is displayed. Tapping this item displays destinations registered in the group.  4 Tap.

REMARQUE

Si vous souhaitez supprimer facilement et rapidement des destinations sans afficher la liste des destinations

- Before tapping in step 1, you can tap / to toggle the destinations you specified. Display a destination you want to delete, and press C.

LIENS

Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 187) Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder(P. 194)

Spécification des destinations avec les touches de numérotation abrégée

36WC-050  Tap one-touch buttons in the screen to specify destinations.

REMARQUE

You need to register destinations before using one-touch dialing. Registering Destinations for One-Touch Dial(P. 55)

1 Appuyez sur et touchez l'une des touches de à .


REMARQUE :

If a confirmation screen appears If is set to , a confirmation screen appears with the destination and destination name registered to the one-touch button (if a destination registered for Group Dial, the group name and number of destinations appears). Confirm the destinations are correct, and tap . If destinations are incorrect, tap and tap the one-touch buttons again. ☐Checking Destinations before Sending Documents (imageRUNNER 2206iF)(P. 377)  Selecting several destinations (e-mail) Destinations can be added from the Address Book, coded dial numbers, One-Touch, and Recall Settings. Tap .

2 Spécifiez les paramètres de numérisation si nécessaire.

- Select the settings. O Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 199) 

3 Appuyez sur pour commencer l'envoi.

Scanning starts. If you want to cancel sending, press Tap .

Pour supprimer des destinations (e-mail)

If you specified multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary. 1 Select .   2 Select a destination you want to delete.  3 Tap . - If you specified Group Dial in step 2, is displayed. Tapping this item displays destinations registered in the group. 

REMARQUE

If you want to easily and quickly delete destinations without displaying a list of destinations Before tapping in step 1, you can tap / to toggle the destinations you specified. Display a destination you want to delete, and press C

LIENS

Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 187) Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder(P. 194)

Spécification des destinations précédemment utilisées

36WC-051  You can select a destination from among the past three destinations. When you specify a previously used destination, the machine also sets the same scan settings such as density you used the last time you sent documents to that destination.

IMPORTANT

- When is set to , you cannot use this feature. Disabling Use of Previously Used Destinations (P. 376) - Turning OFF the machine or setting to deletes the past destinations, and disables this feature. Limiting Available Destinations(P. 374) - When using the machine with a USB connection, exit sleep mode before scanning. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 66)

REMARQUE

- When you specify a destination using this feature, any destinations that you have already specified are deleted.

1 Appuyez sur et touchez .

 - When the logon screen appears, use the numeric keys to enter the user name and password. Then select the authentication server and press ID. Logging on to the Machine(P. 18)

2 Touchez ou .


3 Sélectionnez .

■Si est sélectionné à l'étape 2

 

■Si est sélectionné à l'étape 2

 

4 Sélectionnez une destination.

- When you transmit to multiple destinations, only the address specified for the first transmission is displayed in the log, but all the destinations are specified.  The selected destination and its scan settings are specified. You can also change the settings before sending.

Pour supprimer des destinations (e-mail)

When you transmitted to multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary.

1 Sélectionnez .

 

2 Sélectionnez une destination à supprimer.


3 Touchez .

- If you select Group Dial in step 2, is displayed. Tapping this item displays destinations registered in the group. 

4 Touchez .

REMARQUE

If you want to easily and quickly delete destinations without displaying a list of destinations - Before tapping in step 1, you can tap / to toggle the destinations you specified. Display a destination you want to delete, and press 

LIENS

Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 187) Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder(P. 194)

Spécification de destinations sur un serveur LDAP (e-mail)

36WC-054  If your office has an LDAP server installed, you can specify a destination using user information in the server. Access the LDAP server via the machine to search for the appropriate user information and specify it as destination.

REMARQUE

- You need to specify the settings for connecting to an LDAP server beforehand. Registering LDAP Servers(P. 323)

1 Appuyez sur et touchez .

 - When the logon screen appears, use the numeric keys to enter the user name and password. Then select the authentication server and press ID. Logging on to the Machine(P. 18)

2 Touchez .


3 Sélectionnez Spécifier depuis serveur LDAP>.

 

4 Sélectionnez le serveur LDAP que vous utilisez.


5 Sélectionnez les critères de recherche.

- Personal names, fax numbers, e-mail addresses, organization names, and Organization Unit names are available criteria for searching destinations. 

6 Saisissez la chaîne de caractères cible de la recherche à l'aide des touches numériques, puis touchez .

On how to enter text, see Entering Text(P. 24).  To specify multiple search criteria, repeat steps 5 and 6.

7 Touchez .


8 Spécifiez la méthode de recherche.

 a Searches and displays the users that meet all the search criteria specified in steps 5 and 6.

If users that meet even one of the criteria specified in steps 5 and 6 are found, displays all those users.

9 Touchez .

 The users meeting your search criteria are displayed.

REMARQUE :

- If the authentication screen appears when you tap , enter the user name of the machine and the password registered in the LDAP server, and tap . Registering LDAP Servers(P. 323)

10 Cochez la case de l'utilisateur que vous souhaitez spécifier comme destination.

Up to 10 destinations can be specified from an LDAP server.  To cancel selection, tap a selected user.

REMARQUE :

- If you have already specified a destination using the numeric keys, up to nine destinations can be specified using an LDAP server. - You cannot specify the selected destinations as Cc or Bcc addresses.

11 Touchez .

- When searching for destinations using a different set of search conditions, repeat steps 3 to 11.

■ Pour supprimer des destinations

If you specified multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary. 1 Select .   2 Select a destination you want to delete. 

3 Touchez .

- If you select Group Dial in step 2, is displayed. Tapping this item displays destinations registered in the group. 

4 Touchez .

REMARQUE

If you want to easily and quickly delete destinations without displaying a list of destinations - Before tapping in step 1, you can tap / to toggle the destinations you specified. Display a destination you want to delete, and press C

LIENS

Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 187)

Modification des paramètres par défaut

36WC-052 The default settings are the settings that are displayed whenever you turn ON the machine, or when you press . If you change these default settings to match the operations that you perform frequently, you can eliminate the need to configure the same settings every time you scan.

E-mail

 Select the setting Change the default value of the selected item Apply> 

Paramètres

Select the item you want to set, and change the default value.

■ Dossier partagé

 Select the setting Change the default value of the selected item Apply 

Paramètres

Select the item you want to set, and change the default value.

LIENS

Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 187) Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder(P. 194) Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 199) Scan Settings(P. 473)

Vérification de l'état et du journal des documents envoyés (E-mail/Dossier partagé)

36WC-053 You can check the status and log for scanned documents sent directly from the machine.

IMPORTANT

- When is set to , you cannot check the logs for sent documents. Display Job Log (P. 497) - When using the machine with a USB connection, exit sleep mode before scanning. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 66)

1 Appuyez sur

2 Touchez .


3 Vérifiez les statuts et les journaux des documents envoyés.

Pour vérifier les statuts des documents envoyés

1 Touchez .


2 Sélectionnez le document dont vous voulez vérifier le statut.

 a   

a

Displays a list of the documents that are being sent or are waiting to be processed.

Détails>

Displays detailed information about the document selected from the list. If you specified multiple destinations, the number of specified destinations is displayed on the screen. To check the details of specified multiple destinations, tap .

Pour vérifier les journaux des documents envoyés

1 Touchez .


2 Sélectionnez le document dont vous voulez vérifier le journal.


a

Displays a list of the documents that were sent. is displayed when a document was sent successfully, and is displayed when a document failed to be sent because it was canceled or there was some error.

Détails>

Displays detailed information about the document selected from the list.

REMARQUE :

When a three-digit number is shown in the case of This number represents an error code. Countermeasures for Each Error Code(P. 530)

LIENS

Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 187) Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder(P. 194) Canceling Sending Documents (E-Mail/Shared Folder)(P. 197) Fax TX Result Report (imageRUNNER 2206iF)(P. 586) Communication Management Report(P. 590)

Connexion avec les appareils mobiles

Connexion avec les appareils mobiles 230

Connecting with Mobile Devices 231 Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection) 232 Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode) 233

Utilisation de la machine via des applications 235

Utilisation d'AirPrint 236

Printing with AirPrint 241 Scanning with AirPrint 244 Faxing with AirPrint (imageRUNNER 2206iF) 246 If AirPrint Cannot Be Used 248

Utilisation de Google Cloud Print 249

Gestion de la machine par télécommande 251

Connexion avec les appareils mobiles

36WC-055 Linking the machine with mobile devices such as smart phones and tablets enables you to use an appropriate application to perform printing, or other operation with ease. In addition, you can operate the machine from mobile devices via remote control to confirm printing status and change the settings of the machine.  Connecting with Mobile Devices(P. 231) Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 233) Utilizing the Machine through Applications(P. 235) Using AirPrint(P. 236) Using Google Cloud Print(P. 249) Managing the Machine by the Remote Control(P. 251)

IMPORTANT

Depending on your mobile device, the machine may not operate correctly.

Connexion avec les appareils mobiles

36WC-056 There are two methods used to connect a mobile device with the machine: connecting via a wireless LAN router, and communicating wirelessly and directly with the machine. Select a connection method in accordance with the communication environment and the device you are using.

- Connexion via un routeur LAN sans fil

Just as connecting a computer to the machine, connect a mobile device to the machine via a wireless LAN router. Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection)(P. 232) 

- Connexion directe

Directly connect a mobile device to the machine wirelessly without using wireless LAN. It is possible to immediately connect to the machine wirelessly even outside of a wireless LAN environment. Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 233) 

Connexion via un routeur LAN sans fil (connexion LAN)

36WC-05U If a wireless LAN router is connected to the network connected to the machine, you can establish a communication with a mobile device via the wireless LAN router in the same way for a computer. For information about how to connect a mobile device to your wireless LAN router, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact your manufacturer. Connect the machine to a router via the wired or wireless LAN. Connecting to a Network(P. 255) 

REMARQUE

- If your mobile devices do not support IPv6, use the IPv4 address. Setting IPv4 Address(P. 275) 1 Press 2 Select . 3 Display the IP address of the machine. IPv4 - Select ▶ . IPv6 - Select ▶▶. 4 Connect from the mobile device to the IP address that appears on the screen.

Connexion directe (mode point d'accès)

36WC-05W Even in an environment without a wireless LAN router, using "Access Point Mode," which can directly connect a mobile device to the machine wirelessly, enables you to connect the mobile device on hand to the machine without difficult settings.  Preparing for Direct Connection (Access Point Mode)(P. 233) Connecting Directly(P. 233)

Préparation pour la connexion directe (mode point d'accès)

Establish a connection by using Access Point Mode in the following order (only for IPv4 environment).  Preparing the mobile device - Configure settings to connect the mobile device to Wi-Fi.  Put the machine into the connection standby status. - ▶▶▶ set to .

REMARQUE

Spécification de la valeur du délai avant arrêt automatique

- You can specify the time to automatically establish a disconnection when the direct connection is enabled. Time Until Direct Connection Termination (P. 434)

Connexion de plusieurs appareils mobiles en même temps

- Configure the machine's SSID and network key arbitrarily. The network key can be left blank. Access Point Mode Settings (P. 434)

Connexion directe

IMPORTANT

It may take time until a connection of the machine and the mobile device is established. 1 Select in the screen. Screen(P. 12) - If a message appears, continue by following the instructions on the screen. 2 Configure the Wi-Fi settings from the mobile device using the SSID and network key information that appear on the display. 3 When the target operation is completed, select .

IMPORTANT

- While connecting via direct connection, you may not be able to connect to the Internet depending on the mobile device you are using. - If a wireless connection from the mobile device is not performed within 5 minutes while the SSID and network key are displayed, the connection waiting state terminates. - If the status without data transmission between the mobile device and the machine continues during communication by direct connection, the communication may end. Power saving performance of sleep mode degrades while connecting via direct connection. - If the machine is used with a wireless LAN, you need to keep the machine connected to the wireless LAN when using direct connection. When the machine is not connected to a wireless LAN or the connection process is not complete yet, the direct connection process cannot begin. If the connection between the machine and the wireless LAN is lost during communication through direct connection, the communication may end. - When you finish the desired operation, be sure to terminate the connection between the machine and the mobile device. If they remain connected, power saving performance of sleep mode degrades. - If you use the direct connection, do not set the IP address manually on the mobile device. Doing so may prevent proper communication after using the direct connection.

Utilisation de la machine via des applications

36WC-05X Perform printing and other operations from the mobile device connected to the machine using applications. Various applications including those exclusive to Canon are supported. Use properly in accordance with your device, the application, and the situation.

Utilisation de Canon PRINT Business

This application is used to perform printing and other operations from mobile devices that support iOS/Android. When printing, it is not necessary to perform operations on the machine. For more information on supported operating systems, detailed setting methods, and operations, see the application's Help or the Canon website (http://www.canon.com/gomp/).

IMPORTANT

- You can download Canon PRINT Business for free, but you will be charged the Internet connection fee.

■ Impression avec Canon Print Service

You can easily print from the menu of applications that support the Android print subsystem. For more information on supported operating systems and detailed settings and procedures, see the Canon website (http://www.canon.com/).

■ Impression avec Mopria®

The machine also supports Mopria®. Using Mopria® enables you to print from mobile devices that support Android using common operations and settings, even if manufacturers and models differ. For example, if you are using printers supporting Mopria® made by multiple manufacturers or a printer supporting Mopria® that is located in a place you are visiting, you can print without installing an application exclusive for each manufacturer or model. For more information on supporting models or operation environments, see http://www.mopria.org. 

■ Impression avec Google Cloud Print

You can use applications and services which support Google Cloud Print to print from a computer or mobile device without using a printer driver. Using Google Cloud Print(P. 249) This section describes the settings required to use AirPrint and the procedures to be performed using Apple devices. 

Paramètres AirPrint

Configuring AirPrint Settings(P. 236) Displaying the Screen for AirPrint(P. 239)

Fonctions d'AirPrint

Printing with AirPrint(P. 241) Scanning with AirPrint(P. 244) Faxing with AirPrint (imageRUNNER 2206iF)(P. 246)

Dépannage

If AirPrint Cannot Be Used(P. 248)

Configuration des paramètres AirPrint

You can register information, including the name of the machine and installation location, that is used for identifying the machine. You can also disable the AirPrint function of the machine. Use the Remote UI to change these settings.

NOTE

- For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 420). 1 Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 409) 2 Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screens(P. 411) If you are using a mobile device, such as an iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch, read "click" as "tap" in this section. 3 Select [Network Settings] > [AirPrint Settings]. 4 Click [Edit].

5 Spécifiez les paramètres requis.


[Utiliser AirPrint]

Select the check box to enable AirPrint. To disable AirPrint, clear the check box.

[Nom de l'imprimante]

Enter the name of the machine. If an mDNS name has already been registered in [mDNS Settings] ( C Configuring DNS(P. 316)), the registered name is displayed.

[Emplacement]

Enter the location of the machine. If a location has already been registered in [Device Information] ([System Management] in [System Management Settings] (Settings/Registration)), the registered name is displayed.

[Latitude]

Enter the latitude of the location where the machine is installed.

[Longitude]

Enter the longitude of the location where the machine is installed.

6 Cliquez sur [OK].

IMPORTANT

Si vous sélectionnez [Utiliser AirPrint], les paramètres suivants sont activés.

- [IPP Print Settings] (IPv4 Settings) - (IPv6 Settings) Network Link Scan Settings

NOTE

- If you change [Printer Name] that you have once specified, you may be unable to print any more from the Mac that has been able to be used for printing so far. This phenomenon occurs because ( Configuring DNS(P. 316) ) of IPv4 is also changed automatically. In this case, add the machine to the Mac again. - Entering the printer name makes it easier to identify multiple printers that support AirPrint.

Modification des paramètres des fonctions disponibles avec AirPrint

If you want to disable functions that you are not going to use with AirPrint or encrypt communications, configure the necessary setting using the control panel or Remote UI.

Modification des paramètres d'impression et de télécopie

To perform printing or fax sending with AirPrint, IPP protocol is used.

Activation/désactivation de la fonction

You can specify whether to perform printing and fax sending with AirPrint. The factory default setting is [On].  Log in to the Remote UI in System Manager Mode ( Starting Remote UI(P. 409)) [Settings/Registration] [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings] [Edit] in [IPP Print Settings] Clear or select the [Use IPP Printing] check box [OK]

Modification du paramètre TLS

You can specify whether to encrypt communications using TLS when performing printing or sending faxes with AirPrint. The factory default setting is [On].  Log in to the Remote UI in System Manager Mode ( Starting Remote UI(P. 409)) [Settings/Registration] [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings] [Edit] in [IPP Print Settings] Clear or select the [Use TLS] check box [OK]

Modification des paramètres de numérisation

Configure the scan setting using AirPrint.

Réglage de la fonction à activer ou désactiver

You can turn on/off the scan function available with AirPrint. The factory default setting is .  Set to or

Modification des paramètres TLS

You can specify whether or not to encrypt TLS communications when scanning data using AirPrint. The factory default setting is <On> .  Set to or

Affichage de l'écran pour AirPrint

You can display the screen for AirPrint, on which you can not only access the AirPrint Settings but also view information about consumables, such as paper and toner cartridge, etc. Further, you can configure security function settings ( Enabling TLS Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI(P. 385)). 1 Select [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners], then add the machine to the Mac you are using. - If the machine has already been added, this operation is not required. 2 Select this machine from the list of printers in [Printers & Scanners]. 3 Click [Options & Supplies]. 4 Click [Show Printer Webpage]. 5 Log in to the Remote UI. To change the AirPrint settings, it is necessary to log in as an administrator.

Page dédiée à AirPrint

When you log in with administrator privileges, the AirPrint-dedicated page is displayed as shown below. 

1 [Paramètres AirPrint]

Enables you to check the values entered in the AirPrint settings, such as the name and location of the machine. You can click [Edit] to change the settings.

2 [Autres paramètres]

[Print Security Settings] Configure the print security settings using TLS or authentication. [Scan Security Settings] Configure the scan security settings using TLS. [TLS Settings] Enables you to change the key and certificate used for TLS. Enabling TLS Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI(P. 385) [Key and Certificate Settings] Enables you to generate and install a key and certificate, or request a certificate to be issued. ° Enabling TLS Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI(P. 385)

3 [Informations sur les consommables]

Enables you to check the information of a paper source and consumables of the machine and the device version.

Marques commerciales

Apple, Bonjour, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Mac, macOS, OS X and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc. You can print from an iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, or Mac without using a printer driver.  Printing from an iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch(P. 241) Printing from a Mac(P. 242)

Configuration système requise

One of the following Apple devices is required to print with AirPrint. - iPad (all models) iPhone (3GS or later) - iPod touch (3rd generation or later) Mac (Mac OS X 10.7 or later)* *OS X v10.9 or later when using a USB connection

Environnement réseau

One of the following environments is required. An environment where an Apple device and the machine are connected to the same LAN An environment where an Apple device and the machine are connected directly An environment where a Mac is connected to the machine via USB

IMPORTANT

- For printing, it is required to set [Use IPP Printing] to [On]. Changing the Setting of Functions Available with AirPrint(P. 238)

Impression à partir d'un iPad, d'un iPhone ou d'un iPod touch

1 Make sure that the machine is turned ON and connected to the Apple device. For how to make sure of this, see Connecting to a Network(P. 255). For information on the Direct Connection, see Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 233). 2 From the application on your Apple device, tap to display the menu options.

3 Touchez [Imprimer].

4 Sélectionnez cette machine dans [Imprimante].

The printers connected to the network are displayed here. Select this machine in this step.

IMPORTANT :

- The screen for selecting this machine in [Printer] is not displayed on applications that do not support AirPrint. You cannot print by using those applications.

5 Spécifiez les paramètres d'impression si nécessaire.

REMARQUE :

The available settings and paper sizes differ depending on the application you are using.

6 Touchez [Imprimer].

Printing starts.

REMARQUE :

Checking the print status During printing, press the Home button of the Apple device twice tap [Print].

Impression à partir d'un Mac

1 Assurez-vous que la machine est sous tension et connectée au Mac.

For how to make sure of this, see Connecting to a Network(P. 255).

2 Ajoutez la machine au Mac à partir de [Préférences Système] ▸ [Imprimantes et scanners].

- If the machine has already been added, this operation is not required.

3 Ouvrez un document dans une application et affichez la boîte de dialogue d'impression.

- How to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction manual or Help for the application you are using.

4 Sélectionnez la machine dans la boîte de dialogue d'impression.

The printers connected to the Mac are displayed. Select this machine in this step.

5 Spécifiez les paramètres d'impression si nécessaire.

REMARQUE :

The available settings and paper sizes differ depending on the application you are using.

6 Cliquez sur [Imprimer].

Printing starts. 36WC-05A You can use AirPrint to transfer the data scanned by the machine directly to a Mac. 

Configuration système requise

To scan with AirPrint, you need a Mac with OS X 10.9 or later installed. To scan using TLS, you need a Mac with OS X 10.11 or later installed.

Environnement réseau

One of the following environments is required. An environment where an Apple device and the machine are connected to the same LAN An environment where a Mac is connected to the machine via USB

IMPORTANT

- For scanning, it is required to set to . Changing the Setting of Functions Available with AirPrint(P. 238) - Before scanning, it is required to put the machine into online state. When the auto online function () is set to , first put the machine into online state by selecting , then start the procedure for scanning. - You cannot scan while settings for operations are being made, or while the machine is performing any operation whatsoever.

Numérisation depuis un Mac

1 Make sure that the machine is turned ON and connected to the Mac. For how to make sure of this, see Connecting to a Network(P. 255). 2 Add the machine to the Mac from [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners]. If the machine has already been added, this operation is not required. 3 Select this machine from the list of printers in [Printers & Scanners]. 4 Click [Scan]. 5 Click [Open Scanner]. The [Scanner] screen is displayed. 6 Configure the scan settings as necessary. 7 Click [Scan]. The original is scanned, and the image is displayed.

Envoi de télécopies avec AirPrint (imageRUNNER 2206iF)

36WC-05C You can send faxes from a Mac in almost the same way as when you print from a Mac.    

Configuration système requise

To send faxes with AirPrint, you need a Mac with OS X 10.9 or later installed.

Environnement réseau

One of the following environments is required. An environment where an Apple device and the machine are connected to the same LAN An environment where a Mac is connected to the machine via USB

IMPORTANT

- For faxing, it is required to set [Use IPP Printing] to [On]. Changing the Setting of Functions Available with AirPrint(P. 238)

Envoi de télécopies depuis un Mac

1 Make sure that the machine is turned ON and connected to the Mac. For how to make sure of this, see Connecting to a Network(P. 255). 2 Add the machine to the Mac from [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners]. If the machine has already been added, this operation is not required. 3 Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box. - How to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction manual for the application you are using. 4 Select this machine in the print dialog box. The printers connected to the Mac are displayed. Select the fax driver of this machine in this step. 5 Specify the destination.

6 Cliquez sur [Fax].

Fax sending starts.

Si AirPrint ne peut pas être utilisé

36WC-05L If AirPrint cannot be used, try taking the following solutions. - Make sure that the machine is turned ON. If the machine is turned ON, first turn it OFF, then wait for at least 10 seconds and then turn it back ON to check if the problem is solved. - Make sure that no error messages are displayed on the machine. - Make sure that Apple devices and the machine are connected to the same LAN. If the machine is turned ON, it may take several minutes before the machine is ready for communication. Make sure that Bonjour on your Apple device is enabled. - Make sure that the machine is configured to enable execution of jobs from a computer even when no department ID and password are entered. Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown(P. 350) - For printing, make sure that the paper is loaded in the machine and that the machine contains a sufficient amount remaining in the toner cartridge and the drum unit. Displaying the Screen for AirPrint(P. 239) - For scanning, make sure that the machine's setting for Network Link Scan is . Changing the Setting of Functions Available with AirPrint(P. 238)

Utilisation de Google Cloud Print

36WC-05R Google Cloud Print is a service that enables a user with a Google account to print from a smartphone, tablet, or computer connected to the Internet using applications compatible with Google Cloud Print. Unlike conventional printing from a computer, it does not require a printer driver.  Checking the Settings of the Machine(P. 249) Registering the Machine with Google Cloud Print(P. 249)

IMPORTANT

- An environment in which you can connect to the internet is required when registering the machine and when printing using Google Cloud Print. In addition, the customer is responsible for any fees regarding internet connection. Google Cloud Print may not be available, depending on your country or region.

REMARQUE

- A Google account is required to use Google Cloud Print. If you do not have a Google account, create one on the Google website.

Vérification des paramètres de la machine

Check the following before configuring cloud printing. - Make sure that the IPv4 address or IPv6 address is specified for the machine, and that the machine is able to communicate with computers on a network. Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 258) Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 259) - Check whether the date and time of the machine are specified correctly. Date/Time Settings(P. 449) - If Department ID Management is set, make sure that you can print from a computer without entering a Department ID or PIN. Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown(P. 350)

Enregistrement de la machine auprès de Google Cloud Print

Registering the machine with Google Cloud Print enables you to print from anywhere using the service.

REMARQUE

- For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 420). 1 Start the Remote UI and log in as an administrator. Starting Remote UI(P. 409) 2 Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screens(P. 411) 3 Select [Network Settings] > [Google Cloud Print Settings]. 4 Click [Edit] for [Basic Settings]. 5 Select the [Use Google Cloud Print] check box [OK]. 6 Click [Register] in [Registration Status].

NOTE :

Re-Registering the Machine To re-register the machine, delete its registration before registering it again. 7 Click the URL link displayed for [URL for Registration]. 8 Follow the instructions on the screen to register the machine. ⇔ Printing can now be performed from applications that support Google Cloud Print, such as Google Chrome™.

NOTE :

- For information on the latest applications that support Google Cloud Print, check the Google Cloud Print home page.

NOTE

Configuration des paramètres sur le panneau de commande

- You can also enable or disable the Cloud Print function from the screen. Google Cloud Print Settings(P. 497)

Enregistrement à partir d'un appareil mobile ou de Google Chrome

- You can register the machine from a mobile device or Google Chrome. The machine's display shows the confirmation screen before completion of the registration. Select to complete the registration. - For information on registration methods, see the manual of your device or the Google Cloud Print website.

Gestion de la machine par la télécommande

36WC-05S You can use the Remote UI from a smart phone or tablet Web browser. You can confirm the machine status or perform various settings from a mobile device. 

Navigateurs Web pris en charge

Web browsers supporting the Remote UI for mobile devices are the following.

Android OS

- Chrome

iOS

Safari

Démarrage de l'interface utilisateur distante à partir d'appareils mobiles

Enter the IP address of the machine on the Web browser to start the Remote UI. Prior to operation, confirm the IP address set for the machine ( Viewing Network Settings(P. 282)). If it is unknown, ask your network administrator. 1 Start the Web browser of the mobile device. 2 Enter "http:///" in the address entry column. - If you want to use an IPv6 address, enclose the IPv6 address with brackets. Example: http://[fe80::2e9e:fcff:fe4e:dbce]/ LINKS Using Remote UI(P. 408)

Réseau

Réseau 253

Connexion à un réseau 255

Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN 257 Connecting to a Wired LAN 258 Connecting to a Wireless LAN 259 Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode 261 Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode 263 Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router 266 Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings 269 Checking the SSID and Network Key 273

Configuration des adresses IP 274

Setting IPv4 Address 275 Setting IPv6 Addresses 278

Affichage des paramètres réseau 282

Configuration de la machine pour l'impression ou la télécopie depuis un ordinateur 286

Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions 287 Configuring Printer Ports 290 Setting Up Print Server 293

Configuration des paramètres de numérisation (e-mail/dossiers partagés) 296

Configuring Scan Settings (Sending E-Mail) 297 Configuring Basic E-Mail Settings 298 Configuring E-Mail Communication Settings 302

Configuration de la machine pour la numérisation vers des dossiers partagés 306

Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location 307

Configuration de la machine pour votre environnement réseau 311

Configuring Ethernet Settings 312 Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit 314 Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network 315 Configuring DNS 316 Configuring SMB 321 Registering LDAP Servers 323 ConfiguringSNTP 329 Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP 332 The machine has been designed for flexibility of use across a variety of environments, and it includes advanced technologies in addition to basic network features. Do not worry if you are not a network expert, because the machine has also been designed for convenience and ease of use. Relax and proceed with the network setup one step at a time. - Connecting to a Computer/Viewing the Machine's Network Settings  Connecting to a Network(P. 255)  Viewing Network Settings(P. 282) ■ Configuring or Preparing for Print/PC Fax/Scan Functions  Configuring the Machine for Printing or Faxing from a Computer(P. 286)  Configuring Scan Settings (E-Mail/Shared Folders) (P. 296) - Customizing the Machine for More Convenient Network Experience  Configuring the Machine for Your Network Environment(P. 311) You can directly communicate with the machine from your mobile device without the need to configure difficult network settings. Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 233)

Connexion à un réseau

36WC-061 When connecting the machine to a wired or wireless local area network (LAN), you need to set an IP address unique to the selected network. Select "wired" or "wireless" depending on your communication environment and networking devices. For specific IP address settings, contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator. 

IMPORTANT

If the machine is connected to an unsecured network, your personal information might be leaked to a third party.

REMARQUE

- The machine cannot connect to both wired and wireless LANs at the same time. - The machine does not come with a LAN cable or router. Have them ready as necessary. - For more information about your networking devices, see the instruction manuals for the devices or contact your manufacturer.

Avant de commencer

Follow these steps to connect the machine to a network. 

Vérifiez les paramètres de votre ordinateur.

- Make sure that the computer is correctly connected to the network. For more information, see the instruction manuals for the devices you are using, or contact the device manufacturers. - Make sure that the network settings have been completed on the computer. If the network has not been set up properly, you will not be able to use the machine on the network, even if you perform the rest of the procedure below.

REMARQUE :

Depending on the network, you may need to change settings for the communication method (half-duplex/full-duplex) or the Ethernet type (10BASE-T/ 100BASE-TX) ( Configuring Ethernet Settings(P. 312)). For more information, contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator. - To check the MAC address of the machine. Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN(P. 283) Viewing the MAC Address and Information for Wireless LAN(P. 283) To connect to an IEEE 802.1X network, see Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication(P.389).   Select wired or wireless LAN. Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN (P. 257)   Connect to a wired or wireless LAN. - Proceed to the section that corresponds to the setting you selected in step 2. Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 258) Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 259)   Set the IP address as necessary. - This step is required when you want to assign a specific IP address to the machine or change the dynamic IP addressing protocol from the default DHCP. Setting IP Addresses(P. 274)

Choix entre réseau local filaire ou sans fil

36WC-062 After you decide on wired or wireless LAN to connect the machine to the computer, select wired LAN or wireless LAN using the control panel. Note that if you change the setting from to or vice versa, you will need to uninstall the drivers installed on your computer and then reinstall them. For more information, see the manuals for the relevant drivers on the online manual website. 1 Tap in the screen. 2 Tap . - If a screen for entering a System Manager ID and PIN is displayed, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, tap , and press ID. Setting the System Manager ID(P. 343) 3 Tap . 4 Tap or . 

LIENS

Connecting to a Network(P. 255) Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 258) Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 259) Connect the machine to a computer via a router. Use a LAN cable to connect the machine to the router. 

1 Connectez un câble LAN.

- Connect the machine to a router by using a LAN cable. - Push the connector in until it clicks into place. 

2 Attendez environ 2 minutes.

While you wait, the IP address is set automatically.

REMARQUE :

You can set the IP address manually. Setting IP Addresses(P. 274)

LIENS

Connecting to a Network(P. 255)

Connexion à un réseau local sans fil

36WC-064 Wireless routers (or access points) connect the machine to a computer via radio waves. If your wireless router is equipped with Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS), configuring your network is automatic and easy. If your networking devices do not support automatic configuration, or if you want to specify authentication and encryption settings in detail, you need to manually set up the connection. Make sure that your computer is correctly connected to the network.  Setting Up Connection Using WPS(P. 259) Manually Setting Up Connection(P. 260)

IMPORTANT

Risque de fuite d'informations

Use wireless LAN connection at your own discretion and at your own risk. If the machine is connected to an unsecured network, your personal information might be leaked to a third party because radio waves used in wireless communication can go anywhere nearby, even beyond walls.

Sécurité du réseau local sans fil

The wireless LAN security that is supported by the machine is listed below. For the wireless security compatibility of your wireless router, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact your manufacturer. 128 (104)/64 (40) bit WEP WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP) WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP)

REMARQUE

Périphériques requis pour la connexion au réseau local sans fil

- The machine does not come with a wireless router. Have the router ready as necessary. - The wireless router must conform to IEEE 802.11b/g/n and be able to communicate in 2.4 GHz frequency band. For more information, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact your manufacturer.

Configuration de la connexion à l'aide de WPS

When using WPS, two modes are available: push button mode and PIN code mode.

Mode bouton-poussoir

Find the WPS mark shown below on the package of your wireless router. Also make sure that there is a WPS button on your networking device. Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 261) 

Mode code PIN

Some WPS routers do not support the push button mode. If WPS PIN code mode is mentioned on the package or in the instruction manuals of your networking device, set up the connection by entering the PIN code. Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P. 263)

REMARQUE

If the wireless router is set to use WEP authentication, you may not be able to set up connection using WPS.

Configuration manuelle de la connexion

When manually setting up a wireless connection, you can either select a wireless router or manually enter the required information. Regardless of the method, make sure that you have the required setup information, including the SSID and network key (Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 273)).

Sélection d'un routeur sans fil

Select this setup option if you need to manually set up the connection but want to complete the setup as easily as possible. Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 266)

Saisie manuelle des informations de configuration

If you want to specify security settings in detail, such as authentication and encryption settings, manually enter the SSID and network key to set up the connection. Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 269)

LIENS

Connecting to a Network(P. 255) Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN (P. 257)

Configuration de la connexion à l'aide du mode bouton poussoir WPS

36WC-065 If your wireless router supports WPS push button mode, you can easily set up a connection with a WPS button.

IMPORTANT

How to operate the wireless router may vary on each device. See the instruction manuals for your networking device for help. 1 Tap in the screen. 2 Tap . - If a screen for entering a System Manager ID and PIN is displayed, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, tap , and press ID. Setting the System Manager ID(P. 343) 3 Tap . - If the message is displayed, tap . - If the message is displayed, tap . 4 Read the message that is displayed, and tap . 5 Tap.  6 Tap .  7 Press and hold the WPS button on the wireless router. The button must be pressed within 2 minutes after tapping in step 6. Depending on the networking device, you may need to press and hold the button for 2 seconds or longer. See the instruction manuals for your networking device for help. 

REMARQUE :

If an error message is displayed during setup Tap < Close> and return to step 5.

8 Vérifiez que le voyant Wi-Fi clignote sur le panneau de commande.

- The Wi-Fi indicator blinks when a wireless router is detected.  - When the setup is completed, the screen below is displayed, and approximately 2 seconds later, the Wi-Fi indicator lights up.   Wait approximately 2 minutes until the IP address settings of the machine are completed.

IMPORTANT :

Signal strength When more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device with the strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).

REMARQUE

Réduction de la consommation d'énergie

You can set the machine to enter based on signals emitted from the wireless router. © Power Save Mode (P. 433)

Si l'adresse IP de la machine a changé

In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.

LIENS

Connexion à un réseau local sans fil (P. 259)

Configuration de la connexion à l'aide du mode code PIN WPS

36WC-066 If your wireless router supports WPS PIN code mode, generate a PIN code with the machine and register the code to the networking device.

IMPORTANT

How to operate the wireless router may vary on each device. See the instruction manuals for your networking device for help. 

Depuis un ordinateur

1 Access your wireless router from a computer and display the screen for entering a WPS PIN code. For more information, see the instruction manuals for your networking device. 

Depuis le panneau de commande

2 Tap in the screen. 3 Tap . - If a screen for entering a System Manager ID and PIN is displayed, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, tap , and press ID. Setting the System Manager ID(P. 343) 4 Tap . If the message is displayed, tap . - If the message is displayed, tap . 5 Read the message that is displayed, and tap . 6 Tap .  7 Tap . A PIN code is generated.  

Depuis un ordinateur

8 Enregistrez le code PIN généré sur le routeur sans fil.

- Register the PIN code on the setup screen displayed in step 1. The PIN code must be registered within 10 minutes after tapping in step 7.

REMARQUE :

If an error message is displayed during setup Tap and return to step 6. 

Depuis le panneau de configuration

9 Vérifiez que le témoin Wi-Fi clignote sur le panneau de configuration.

- The Wi-Fi indicator blinks when a wireless router is detected.  - When the setup is completed, the screen below is displayed, and approximately 2 seconds later, the Wi-Fi indicator lights up.  Wait approximately 2 minutes until the IP address settings of the machine are completed.

IMPORTANT :

Intensité du signal

When more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device with the strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).

REMARQUE

Réduction de la consommation d'énergie

You can set the machine to enter based on signals emitted from the wireless router. Power Save Mode (P. 433)

Si l'adresse IP de la machine a changé

In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.

LIENS

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 259)

Configuration de la connexion en sélectionnant un routeur sans fil

36WC-067 You can search the wireless routers (or access points) available for connection and select one from the display of the machine. For the network key, enter a WEP key or TKIP. Before selecting a wireless router, check and write down the required setup information, including the SSID and network key (Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 273)).

REMARQUE

Paramètres de sécurité

If the wireless connection is set up by selecting a wireless router, the WEP authentication method is set to or the WPA/WPA2 encryption method is set to (AES-CCMP or TKIP). If you want to select for WEP authentication or for WPA/WPA2 encryption, you need to set up the connection using the manual entry method ( Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 269)). 1 Tap in the screen. 2 Tap . If a screen for entering a System Manager ID and PIN is displayed, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, tap , and press ID. Setting the System Manager ID(P. 343) 3 Tap . If the message is displayed, tap . - If the message is displayed, tap . 4 Read the message that is displayed, and tap . 5 Tap.  6 Tap . The machine starts searching for available wireless routers. 

REMARQUE :

If is displayed See Countermeasures for Each Message(P. 519).

7 Sélectionnez un routeur LAN sans fil.

- Select the router whose SSID matches the one that you have written down. 

REMARQUE :

If your wireless router is not found Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network. Installation/ Settings Problems(P. 539)

8 Saisissez la clé réseau que vous avez notée.

- Enter the network key using the numeric keys, and tap . Entering Text(P. 24)

WEP


WPA-PSK ou WPA2-PSK


9 Touchez .


REMARQUE :

If an error message is displayed during setup Tap , check whether the network key is correct, and return to step 5.

10 Vérifiez que le voyant Wi-Fi clignote sur le panneau de commande.

- The Wi-Fi indicator blinks when a wireless router is detected.  - When the setup is completed, the screen below is displayed, and approximately 2 seconds later, the Wi-Fi indicator lights up.   Wait approximately 2 minutes until the IP address settings of the machine are completed.

IMPORTANT :

Signal strength When more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device with the strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).

REMARQUE

Réduction de la consommation d'énergie

You can set the machine to enter based on signals emitted from the wireless router. Power Save Mode (P. 433)

Si l'adresse IP de la machine a changé

In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.

LIENS

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 259)

Configuration de la connexion en spécifiant des paramètres détaillés

36WC-068 If you want to specify the security settings in detail or cannot establish the wireless connection using the other procedures, manually enter all the required information for the wireless LAN connection. Before specifying detailed settings, check and write down the required information, including the SSID, network key, and wireless security protocols (Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 273)). 1 Tap in the screen. 2 Tap . If a screen for entering a System Manager ID and PIN is displayed, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, tap , and press ID. Setting the System Manager ID(P. 343) 3 Tap . - If the message is displayed, tap . - If the message is displayed, tap . 4 Read the message that is displayed, and tap . 5 Select Enter Manually>. 6 Enter the SSID that you have written down. - Enter the SSID using the numeric keys, and tap . Entering Text(P. 24)  7 Specify the security settings based on the information that you have written down. - If you do not need to specify the security settings, tap . 

Utilisation de WEP

1 Tap. 2 Select an authentication method. 

a

Sets open system authentication, which is also called "open authentication."

Uses the WEP key as a password.

REMARQUE :

When is selected When connecting to a wireless LAN, the machine experiences an authentication error if the shared key authentication is set on the wireless router. If this happens, the machine automatically changes the setting to and retries the connection. 3 Tap .  4 Select the WEP key(1 to 4) you want to edit. Up to four WEP keys can be registered.  5 Enter the network key that you have written down. - Enter the network key using the numeric keys, and tap . ☐Entering Text(P. 24)  6 Tap . 7 Tap the WEP key you have edited.

Utilisation de WPA-PSK ou WPA2-PSK

1 Tap . 2 Select an encryption method. 

a

Sets the machine to automatically select AES-CCMP or TKIP to match the setting of the wireless router.

b

Sets AES-CCMP as the encryption method. 3 Enter the network key that you have written down. - Enter the network key using the numeric keys, and tap . ☐Entering Text(P. 24) 

8 Touchez .


REMARQUE :

If an error message is displayed during setup Tap < Close>, check whether the specified settings are correct, and return to step 5.

9 Vérifiez que le voyant Wi-Fi clignote sur le panneau de commande.

- The Wi-Fi indicator blinks when a wireless router is detected.  - When the setup is completed, the screen below is displayed, and approximately 2 seconds later, the Wi-Fi indicator lights up.   Wait approximately 2 minutes until the IP address settings of the machine are completed.

IMPORTANT :

Intensité du signal

When more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device with the strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).

REMARQUE

Réduction de la consommation d'énergie

You can set the machine to enter based on signals emitted from the wireless router. Power Save Mode (P. 433)

Si l'adresse IP de la machine a changé

In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.

LIENS

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 259)

Vérification du SSD et de la clé réseau

36WC-069 When manually setting up a wireless connection, you need to specify the SSID and network key of your wireless router. The SSID and network key may be indicated on these networking devices. Check your devices and write down the necessary information before setting up the connection. For more information, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact your manufacturer.

SSID	A name given for identifying a specific wireless LAN. Some other terms used for SSID include "access point name" and "network name."
Network Key	A keyword or password used for encrypting data or authenticating a network. Some other terms used for network key include "encryption key," "WEP key," "WPA/WPA2 passphrase," and "preshared key (PSK)."
Wireless Security Protocols (Authentication/ Encryption)	When manually setting up a wireless connection by specifying detailed settings, you need to specify security settings. Check the following information: • Security types (WEP/WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK) • Authentication method (Open System/Shared Key) • Encryption method (TKIP/AES-CCMP)

LIENS

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 259) Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 266) Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 269) 36WC-06A Connecting the machine to a network requires a unique network IP address. Two versions of IP addresses are available: IPv4 and IPv6. Configure these settings depending on the network environment. To use IPv6 addresses, you need to properly configure the IPv4 address settings.  36WC-06C  The machine's IPv4 address can be either assigned automatically by a dynamic IP addressing protocol, such as DHCP, or entered manually. When connecting the machine to a wired LAN, make sure that the connectors of the LAN cable are firmly inserted into the ports ( Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 258). You can test the network connection if necessary. Setting IPv4 Address(P. 275) Testing the Network Connection(P. 277)

Configuration de l'adresse IPv4

1 Tap in the screen. 2 Tap . If a screen for entering a System Manager ID and PIN is displayed, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, tap , and press ID. Setting the System Manager ID(P. 343) 3 Select . 4 Configure IP address settings.  AutoAcquire> Select to automatically assign an IP address via a protocol such as DHCP. When is displayed, automatic addressing is enabled. Manually Acquire> Select to configure the IP address settings by manually entering an IP address. In order to select this option, must be set to . Select when you want to view the current IP address settings.

Attribution automatique d'une adresse IP

1 Select .  2 Tap , , or . 

REMARQUE :

If you do not want to use DHCP/BOOTP/RARP to assign an IP address Select . If you select , , or when these services are unavailable, the machine will waste time and communications resources searching the network for these services. 3 Check that is set to . - If is selected, change the setting to . 4 Tap.

REMARQUE :

IP addresses assigned via DHCP/BOOTP/RARP override the address obtained via Auto IP.

Saisie manuelle d'une adresse IP

1 Check that is set to .  - If is displayed, tap , and set both and to . 2 Tap. 3 Specify the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address (or default gateway). - Specify the settings in the following order: ▷ ▷ . - Enter each setting using the numeric keys, and tap .   

REMARQUE

Vérification que les paramètres sont corrects

Make sure that the Remote UI screen can be displayed with your computer ( 已 Starting Remote UI(P. 409)). If a computer is not available, you can check the connection by using the control panel ( 已 Testing the Network Connection(P. 277)).

Lorsque vous avez modifié l'adresse IP après l'installation du pilote d'imprimante

When the MFNP port is used, the connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet; therefore, you do not need to add a new port. When the standard TCP/IP port is used, you need to add a new port. 口 Configuring Printer Ports(P. 290) *If you do not know which port is used, see 📁Checking the Printer Port(P. 657) .

Test de la connexion réseau

1 Tap in the screen. 2 Tap . If a screen for entering a System Manager ID and PIN is displayed, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, tap , and press ID. Setting the System Manager ID(P. 343) 3 Select . 4 Enter the IPv4 address of another device on the network, and tap .    - If a proper connection has been established, the result is displayed as shown above.

LIENS

Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 278) Viewing Network Settings(P. 282)  The IPv6 addresses of the machine can be configured via the Remote UI. Before setting IPv6 addresses, check the IPv4 address settings ( O Viewing IPv4 Settings(P. 282)). You need to set the correct IPv4 settings to use IPv6 addresses. Note that the scan function that uses the scanner driver or MF Scan Utility is not available in an IPv6 environment. The machine can use up to nine of the following IPv6 addresses:

Type	Maximum number available	Description
Link-local address	1	An address that is only valid within a subnet or link and cannot be used to communicate with devices beyond a router. A link-local address is automatically set when the IPv6 function of the machine is enabled.
Manual address	1	An address that is entered manually. When using this address, specify the prefix length and default router address.
Stateless address	6	An address that is generated automatically using the MAC address of the machine and the network prefix that is advertised by the router. Stateless addresses are discarded when the machine is restarted (or turned ON).
Stateful address	1	An address obtained from a DHCP server using DHCPv6.

1 Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 409) 2 Click [Settings/Registration].  3 Click [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings]. 

4 Cliquez sur [Modifier] dans [Paramètres IPv6].


5 Cochez la case [Utiliser IPv6] et configurez les paramètres requis.


[Utiliser IPv6]

Select the check box to enable IPv6 on the machine. When not using IPv6, clear the check box.

[Utiliser l'adresse sans état]

Select the check box when using a stateless address. When not using a stateless address, clear the check box.

[Utiliser l'adresse manuelle]

When you want to manually enter an IPv6 address, select the check box and enter the IP address, prefix length, and default router address in the corresponding text boxes.

[Adresse IP]

Enter an IPv6 address. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast address) cannot be entered.

[Longueur du préfixe]

Enter a number that indicates how many bits are available for the network address.

[Adresse de la passerelle par défaut]

Specify the IPv6 address of the default router as necessary. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast address) cannot be entered.

[Utiliser DHCPv6]

Select the check box when using a stateful address. When not using DHCPv6, clear the check box.

6 Cliquez sur [OK].


REMARQUE

Vérification que les paramètres sont corrects

Make sure that the Remote UI screen can be displayed with your computer by using the IPv6 address of the machine. Starting Remote UI(P. 409)

Utilisation du panneau de commande

IPv6 settings can also be accessed from in the screen. © IPv6 Settings(P. 437)

LIENS

Setting IPv4 Address(P. 275) Viewing Network Settings(P. 282) Viewing IPv4 Settings(P. 282) Viewing IPv6 Settings(P. 282) Viewing Direct Connection Information(P. 283) Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN(P. 283) Viewing the MAC Address and Information for Wireless LAN(P. 283)

REMARQUE

- The IP address is not correctly configured if it is displayed as "0.0.0.0". - Connecting the machine to a switching hub or bridge may result in a connection failure even when the IP address is correctly configured. This problem can be solved by setting a certain interval before the machine starts communicating. Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 315) - You can print a list of the current network settings. User Data List/System Manager Data List(P. 595)

Affichage des paramètres IPv4

  Network Information> Select the setting to view Check the settings   

Affichage des paramètres IPv6

  Network Information> Select the setting to view Check the settings    

Affichage des informations de connexion directe

  Network Information> Direct Connection Information> Connection Details Check the settings 

Affichage de l'adresse MAC pour le réseau local filaire

1 Tap in the screen. 2 Tap . - If a screen for entering a System Manager ID and PIN is displayed, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, tap , and press ID. Setting the System Manager ID(P. 343) 3 Tap .  Viewing the MAC Address and Information for Wireless LAN 1 Tap in the screen.

2 Touchez .

- If a screen for entering a System Manager ID and PIN is displayed, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, tap , and press ID. Setting the System Manager ID(P. 343)

3 Touchez [OK].

- If the message is displayed, tap . - If the message is displayed, tap .

4 Lisez le message affiché, puis touchez [OK].

5 Touchez [OK].

6 Sélectionnez le paramètre à afficher.


■ Affichage des informations WEP et WPA/WPA2-PSK

1 Tap . 2 Confirm and tap the current security setting. - If the security settings are not configured, is displayed. 3 Select the setting to view.

WEP


WPA/WPA2-PSK


REMARQUE :

and can be viewed from 念 . Press 念 念 念 念 and select the setting to view.

LIENS

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 259) Setting IPv4 Address(P. 275) Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 278) Configuring DNS(P. 316)

Configuration de la machine pour l'impression ou l'envoi de télécopies depuis un ordinateur

36WC-06H When using the machine as a network printer or a PC-to-fax machine, you can configure the protocols and ports used for printing and create a print server for the machine. Before configuring the machine for printing or faxing from a computer, perform the basic setup procedures, including the printer driver installation. 

REMARQUE

- Printing protocols are rules for delivering document data created on a computer to the machine, and can be selected according to the printing purpose or the network environment. - Ports are gateways for passing document data from a computer to the printer. Incorrect port settings are often the cause when documents cannot be printed from a network computer.

Configuration des protocoles d'impression et des fonctions WSD

36WC-06J Configure the protocols that are used for printing documents from a networked computer. The protocols supported by the machine include LPD, RAW, and WSD (Web Services on Devices).

REMARQUE

To change protocols' port numbers, see Changing Port Numbers(P. 367). 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 409) 2 Click [Settings/Registration].  3 Click [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].  4 Configure printing protocols.

■ Configuration de LPD ou RAW

1 Cliquez sur [Modifier] dans [Paramètres d'impression LPD] ou [Paramètres d'impression RAW].


2 Configurez les paramètres nécessaires.


[Utiliser l'impression LPD]

Select the check box to print via LPD. When not using LPD printing, clear the check box.

[Utiliser l'impression RAW]

Select the check box to print via RAW. When not using RAW printing, clear the check box.

3 Cliquez sur [OK].

■Configuration de WSD

1 Cliquez sur [Modifier] dans [Paramètres WSD].


2 Configurez les paramètres nécessaires.


[Utiliser l'impression WSD]

Select the check box to print via WSD. When not using WSD printing, clear the check box.

[Utiliser la navigation WSD]

Select the check box to obtain information about the machine from a computer via WSD. This check box is automatically selected when the [Use WSD Printing] check box is selected.

[Utiliser la numérisation WSD]

WSD scanning enables you to scan documents to a computer without installing the scanner driver. Select the check box to scan documents via WSD. When not using WSD scanning, clear the check box.

[Utiliser la numérisation depuis l'ordinateur]

Select the check box to use WSD scanning by operating the machine with the control panel. This check box can only be selected when the [Use WSD Scanning] check box is selected. To perform scanning, tap and specify a WSD-connected computer as a scan destination. ( Scanning from the Machine(P. 175)).

[Utiliser la découverte multicast]

Select the check box to set the machine to reply to multicast discovery messages. If the check box is cleared, the machine stays in sleep mode even when multicast discovery messages are flowing on the network. 3 Click [OK].

REMARQUE

Utilisation du panneau de commande

LPD, RAW, and WSD settings can also be accessed from in the screen. LPD Print Settings(P. 438) RAW Print Settings(P. 438) WSD Settings(P. 438)

Configuration des périphériques réseau WSD

The WSD printer and scanner can be added from the printer folder. Open the printer folder ( Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 652) ) click [Add a device] or [Add a printer] and follow the on-screen instructions. For more information about how to install the driver for the WSD network, see the manuals for the relevant drivers on the online manual website.

LIENS

Configuring Printer Ports(P. 290)

Configuration des ports d'imprimante

36WC-06K Printing errors can occur when the IP address of the machine has been changed, or when a printer has been added via the Windows printer folder. These errors are typically caused by incorrect printer port settings. For example, an incorrect port number or port type may have been specified. In such situations, your attempt to print fails because the document data cannot reach the machine. To fix this type of problem, configure the printer port settings on the computer.

IMPORTANT

To perform the following procedure, log on to your computer with an administrator account. 1 Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 652) 2 Right-click your printer icon and click [Printer properties] (or [Properties]).  3 Click the [Ports] tab and configure the required settings. 

Ajout d'un port

If the IP address of the machine has been changed, add a new port. Adding a port is also an effective solution when an incorrect port type was selected in the Windows printer folder during the printer driver installation. 1 Click [Add Port]. 2 Select [Canon MFNP Port] in [Available port types] and click [New Port].  3 Click [Auto Detect], select the machine when it is detected, and click [Next]. 

REMARQUE :

If the machine is not detected Click [Refresh]. If the problem persists, click [IP address] or [MAC address], enter the IP address or MAC address of the machine Viewing Network Settings(P. 282), and then click [Next].  4 Click [Add] [Finish]. 5 Click [Close].

Modification du type ou du numéro de port

If the printing protocols ( Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 287) ) or port numbers ( Changing Port Numbers(P. 367) ) have been changed on the machine, the corresponding settings on the computer must also be configured. This change is only available for LPR or RAW ports. 1 Click [Configure Port]. 2 Click the [LPR] or [RAW] radio button in [Protocol Type], change the number in the [Port Number] text box as necessary, and then click [OK]. 

4 Cliquez sur [Fermer].

LINKS Setting Up Print Server(P. 293) With a print server, you can reduce the load on the computer that you print from. The print server also enables each computer to install the drivers over the network, which saves you the trouble of installing the drivers on each computer by using the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM. To set up a computer on the network as a print server, configure the settings for sharing the printer.

IMPORTANT

To perform the following procedure, log on to your computer with an administrator account. - You may be unable to install drivers over the network depending on the operating system and the bit architecture (32-bit or 64-bit) of the print server and client computers. - When implementing a print server in a domain environment, consult your Network Administrator.

REMARQUE

Pour obtenir les informations sur le périphérique lors de l'utilisation d'un serveur d'impression

"Canon Driver Information Assist Service" must be added during the printer driver installation. For more information, see the manuals for the relevant drivers on the online manual website. 1 Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 652) 2 Right-click your printer icon and click [Printer properties] (or [Properties]).  3 Click the [Sharing] tab, select [Share this printer], and enter the share name of the machine. 

REMARQUE :

When [Change Sharing Options] is displayed Click [Change Sharing Options]. If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears, click [Yes] (or [Continue]). 

4 Installez des pilotes supplémentaires si nécessaire.

- This operation is required if you want to install the drivers in other computers running a different bit architecture via the print server. 1 Click [Additional Drivers]. 2 Select the check box for the bit architecture that other computers are running, and click [OK].  - Select additional drivers from the following, according to the operating system of the print server.

Print server	Select the check box for
32-bit operating systems	[x64]
64-bit operating systems	[x86]

REMARQUE :

If you do not know whether your Windows 7/8.1/10/Server 2008/Server 2012/Server 2016 is a 32-bit or 64-bit operating system, see ☐Checking the Bit Architecture(P. 655). 3 Insert the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer, click [Browse] to specify the folder that contains the drivers, and then click [OK]. - If the print server runs a 32-bit operating system, select [intdrv] [UFRII] [x64] [Driver] folders on the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM. - If the print server runs a 64-bit operating system, select [intdrv] [UFRII] [32BIT] [Driver] folders on the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM. 4 Follow the on-screen instructions to install the drivers.

5 Cliquez sur [OK].

■ Installing the Drivers on a Computer via the Print Server 1 Locate the shared printer in the print server. Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server(P. 653) 2 Double-click the shared printer. 3 Follow the on-screen instructions to install the drivers. LINKS Printing from a Computer(P. 156)

Configuration des paramètres de numérisation (e-mail/dossiers partagés)

36WC-070 To send scanned originals directly by e-mail or save them to shared folders, you need to configure the network. The Send Function Setting Tool, an application that is included with the machine, will assist you with the required setup. Set the necessary configuration depending on your purpose and network environment.

NOTE

For imageRUNNER 2206N, this function can only be used when the optional Color Send Kit is attached.

Numérisation vers e-mail

 Configuring Scan Settings (Sending E-Mail)(P. 297)

Numérisation vers dossiers partagés

 Configuring the Machine for Scanning to Shared Folders(P. 306)

LIENS

System Environment(P. 637) Scan Function(P. 633)

Configuration des paramètres de numérisation (envoi d'e-mail)

36WC-071 Before configuring the machine for scanning to e-mail, check the setup flow shown below.  Make sure that the machine and the computer are correctly connected. Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 259) Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 258)   Make sure that you have the following information: The IP address of the machine. Viewing Network Settings(P. 282) An e-mail address to be registered as a destination. - Information about the e-mail server, including the SMTP server name, port numbers, whether authentication is required, and the user name and password for authentication.

REMARQUE :

- For more information about the e-mail server settings, contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.   Make sure that the computer meets the following system requirements for the Send Function Setting Tool (sending e-mail): - System requirements for the Send Function Setting Tool System Environment(P. 637)

REMARQUE :

- Also make sure that and are set to . Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 382) Disabling Remote UI(P. 383)   Set the machine configuration. - Configuring Basic E-Mail Settings Configuring Basic E-Mail Settings(P. 298) - Configuring E-Mail Communication Settings Configuring E-Mail Communication Settings(P. 302) - Configuring Detailed E-Mail Communication Settings (Authentication, Encryption, etc.) Configuring E-Mail Communication Settings(P. 302)

Configuration des paramètres e-mail de base

36WC-072 This section describes how to configure the e-mail settings by using the Send Function Setting Tool. With the Send Function Setting Tool, you can also register e-mail addresses to the Address Book.

REMARQUE

- The Send Function Setting Tool helps you configure the basic settings for sending e-mails. Instead of the Send Function Setting Tool, you can use the Remote UI to configure more detailed settings such as the settings for POP authentication before sending or for encrypted communication. Configuring E-Mail Communication Settings(P. 302)

1 Démarrez l'outil de configuration des fonctions d'envoi.

À l'aide d'un navigateur Web

Enter "http:///sendsupport_login.html" in the address field of a Web browser, and press the [ENTER] key. 

À l'aide du CD-ROM/DVD-ROM fourni

1 Insert the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer. - Select a language and click [OK] if you are prompted to do so. 2 Click [Start Software Programs].  Software Programs/Manuals Setup  Installs the standard programs and the manuals.   Starts programs required for configuring settings, etc. Manuals Displays manuole.

REMARQUE :

- If the above screen is not displayed, see Displaying the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] Screen(P. 654). - If [AutoPlay] is displayed, click [Run MInst.exe]. 3 Click [Start] for [Send Function Setting Tool]. 4 Click [Next]. - If you want to view "Send Setting Guide," click [How to Set]. 

REMARQUE :

Si l'écran ci-dessous apparaît

- Click [Yes].  5 Select the machine from [Device List] and click [Next]. 

REMARQUE :

If the machine is not displayed in [Device List] - Click [Search Again]. If the problem persists, click [Search by IP Address], enter the IP address of the machine, and then click [OK]. 6 Confirm the settings and click [OK].

2 Cliquez sur [Démarrer].

 - If the logon screen is displayed, enter the appropriate ID and PIN in the corresponding text boxes, and click [Logon].

3 Cliquez sur [Paramètres d'envoi par e-mail].

 - If the screen prompting you to enter the Address Book PIN is displayed, enter the PIN for the Address Book, and click [OK]. Setting a PIN for Address Book (P. 373)

4 Spécifiez les paramètres requis.


[Enregistrement]

[One-touch Speed Dial Number] With the Send Function Setting Tool, you can register an e-mail address into in the Address Book. Select a number from the drop-down list.

[Nom pour la numérotation abrégée à une touche]

Enter the name for identifying the destination to be registered. Set a name that will be easy for you to find later in the Address Book.

b [Paramètres de destination d'envoi]

[Adresse e-mail de destination]

Enter the e-mail address that you want to send your scanned documents to.

[Paramètres du serveur SMTP]

[Serveur SMTP]

Enter the SMTP server name.

[Authentification SMTP]

Click the [Not Set] or [Set] radio button to match the authentication settings of the SMTP server. When [Set] is selected, enter the user name in the [UserID] text box and password in the [Password] text box.

REMARQUE :

Méthodes d'authentification pour l'envoi d'e-mails

- To prevent e-mail transmissions by unauthorized users, the machine supports SMTP authentication (SMTP AUTH) and POP before SMTP. For more information about the required authentication method, contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator. - POP before SMTP authentication can only be configured by using the Remote UI. Configuring E-Mail Communication Settings(P. 302)

5 Cliquez sur [Suivant].

6 Confirmez les paramètres et cliquez sur [Enregistrer].

7 Redémarrez la machine.

- Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.

IMPORTANT

Additional settings may be required depending on the network you are using. For more information, contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator. To enable TLS for e-mailing, see Configuring E-Mail Communication Settings(P. 302). To change port numbers, see Changing Port Numbers(P. 367).

LIENS

Configuring Scan Settings (Sending E-Mail)(P. 297) Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 187) Registering in the Address Book(P. 49)

Configuration des paramètres de communication e-mail

36WC-073 Use the Remote UI to configure the detailed send settings, such as the settings for POP authentication and encryption of communication before you send e-mail. Contact your provider or network administrator for the required settings. 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 409) 2 Click [Settings/Registration].  3 Click [Network Settings] [E-Mail Settings].  4 Click [Edit]. 

5 Spécifiez les paramètres requis.


[Serveur SMTP]

Enter up to 48 alphanumeric characters as the SMTP server name (or IP address) for sending e-mail.

[Adresse e-mail]

Enter up to 120 characters for the e-mail address that you want to use for the machine.

[Serveur POP]

Enter up to 48 alphanumeric characters as the POP3 server name or IP address for sending e-mail.

[Identifiant utilisateur]

Enter up to 64 alphanumeric characters as the user name for the specified e-mail account when a POP3 server is used.

[Définir/Modifier le mot de passe]

To set or change the password when a POP3 server is used, select this check box and enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters in [Password].

■Configuration de l'authentification POP avant l'envoi

POP before SMTP authentication prevents unauthorized users from using e-mail by performing user authentication on the POP3 server. 

[Utiliser l'authentification POP avant l'envoi]

To use the POP3 server for authentication before you send e-mail, select the check box.

[Utiliser l'authentification APOP]

Select the check box to use APOP to encrypt the password during the authentication process.

■Configuration de l'authentification SMTP

If you configure SMTP authentication (SMTP AUTH), user identification by user name and password is performed at the time of sending e-mail. 

[Utiliser l'authentification SMTP (SMTP AUTH)]

To enable authentication on the SMTP server, select the check box and enter up to 64 characters in the [UserID] text box.

[Définir/Modifier le mot de passe]

To specify or change the password, select the check box and enter up to 32 characters in the [Password] text box.

■Configuration de la communication chiffrée

You can configure encryption of communication with an SMTP or POP3 server. 

[Utiliser TLS pour SMTP]

Select the check box to use TLS for encrypting communication with the SMTP server. Select the check box for [Verify Certificate] or [Add CN to Verification Items] depending on your needs.

[Utiliser TLS pour POP]

Select the check box to encrypt communication with the POP3 server using TLS. Select the [Verify Certificate] and [Add CN to Verification Items] check boxes as required.

6 Cliquez sur [OK].


IMPORTANT

Depending on the network you are using, you may need to change the SMTP or POP3 port setting ( Changing Port Numbers(P. 367)). For more information, contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.

LIENS

Configuring Scan Settings (Sending E-Mail)(P. 297) Configuring Basic E-Mail Settings(P. 298) Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 187)

Configuration de la machine pour la numérisation vers des dossiers partagés

36WC-074 Before configuring the machine for scanning to shared folders, check the setup flow shown below.  Make sure that the machine and the computer are correctly connected. Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 259) Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 258)   Make sure that you have the following information: The IP address of the machine. Viewing Network Settings(P. 282) - The name of the computer where the shared folder is located. ☐Checking the Computer Name(P. 656) - Path to and the name of the shared folder (If access restrictions are set to the folder, the user name and password information is also needed).

REMARQUE :

For instructions on how to create a new shared folder, see "Send Setting Guide."   Make sure that the computer meets the following system requirements for the Send Function Setting Tool: - System requirements for the Send Function Setting Tool System Environment(P. 637)

REMARQUE :

- Also make sure that and are set to . Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 382) Disabling Remote UI(P. 383)   Set the machine configuration. Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location(P. 307)

Définition d'un dossier partagé comme emplacement d'enregistrement

36WC-075 The feature of scanning to shared folders is also called "Scan to SMB" because the feature uses Server Message Block (SMB), a Windows-specific technology. SMB is a protocol for sharing resources, such as files and printers, with more than one device in a network ( Configuring SMB(P. 321)). To configure the machine for saving your scanned documents into a shared folder in the network via SMB, specify the location of the shared folder from a computer in advance. This section describes how to specify the save location by using the Send Function Setting Tool.

REMARQUE

- You can also use the Remote UI to specify the location of the shared folder as save destination by registering the folder to the Address Book. Registering Address Book from Remote UI(P. 426)

1 Démarrez l'outil de réglage des fonctions d'envoi.

Utilisation d'un navigateur Web

Enter "http:///sendsupport_login.html" in the address field of a Web browser, and press the [ENTER] key. 

Utilisation du CD-ROM/DVD-ROM fourni

1 Insert the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer. - Select a language and click [OK] if you are prompted to do so. 2 Click [Start Software Programs].  

NOTE :

- If the above screen is not displayed, see Displaying the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] Screen(P. 654). - If [AutoPlay] is displayed, click [Run MInst.exe]. 3 Click [Start] for [Send Function Setting Tool]. 4 Click [Next]. - If you want to view "Send Setting Guide," click [How to Set]. 

NOTE :

Si l'écran ci-dessous apparaît

- Click [Yes].  5 Select the machine from [Device List] and click [Next]. 

NOTE :

If the machine is not displayed in [Device List] - Click [Search Again]. If the problem persists, click [Search by IP Address], enter the IP address of the machine, and then click [OK]. 6 Confirm the settings and click [OK].

2 Cliquez sur [Démarrer].

 - If the logon screen is displayed, enter the appropriate ID and PIN in the corresponding text boxes, and click [Logon].

3 Cliquez sur [Paramètres de stockage dans un dossier partagé].

 - If the screen prompting you to enter the Address Book PIN is displayed, enter the PIN for the Address Book, and click [OK]. Setting a PIN for Address Book (P. 373)

4 Spécifiez les paramètres requis.


[Enregistrement]

[One-touch Speed Dial Number] With the Send Function Setting Tool, you can register a shared folder for saving scanned documents into in the Address Book. Select a number from the drop-down list.

[Nom pour la numérotation abrégée à une touche]

Enter the name for identifying the destination to be registered. Set a name that will be easy for you to find later in the Address Book.

b [Paramètres de destination de stockage]

[Protocole]

The protocol that is used for sending scanned documents to a shared folder is displayed.

[Nom de l'ordinateur de la destination de stockage]

Enter the name or the IP address of the computer where the shared folder is located.

[Nom du dossier partagé sur l'ordinateur de destination]

Enter the name of (or path to) the shared folder. For example, if the shared folder is a subfolder named "share" and is contained in the [Public] folder in drive C (path: C:\users\public\share), enter "users\public\share." 

[État des paramètres du dossier partagé]

[Restriction d'accès au dossier partagé]

Click the [Not Set] or [Set] radio button to match the access restrictions set to the shared folder. When [Set] is selected, enter the user name in the [Registered User Name] text box and password in the [Password to Access] text box.

5 Cliquez sur [Suivant].

6 Confirmez les paramètres et cliquez sur [Enregistrer].

7 Redémarrez la machine.

- Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.

LIENS

Configuring the Machine for Scanning to Shared Folders(P. 306) Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder(P. 194)

Configuration de la machine pour votre environnement réseau

36WC-06R The configuration of a network varies depending on the purpose of the network. Specify the settings necessary to suit your network environment. 

Configuration des paramètres Ethernet

36WC-06S Ethernet is a standard for communicating data in a local area network (LAN). You can set the communication mode (half-duplex/full-duplex) and the Ethernet type (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX). In general, the machine can be used without changing the defaults ( Ethernet Driver Settings(P. 442)), but you can change these settings to suit your network environment.

1 Touchez l'écran.

2 Touchez .

If a screen for entering a System Manager ID and PIN is displayed, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, tap , and press ID. Setting the System Manager ID(P. 343)

3 Sélectionnez ▶ .

4 Sélectionnez si vous souhaitez configurer les paramètres Ethernet automatiquement ou manuellement.


■ Configuration automatique des paramètres Ethernet

Tap . The machine detects and automatically sets the communication mode and the Ethernet type that can be used.

■ Configuration manuelle des paramètres Ethernet

1 Tap. 2 Select the communication mode. - Tap ▷ tap or . 

a

Alternately sends and receives communication data. Select when the machine is connected to a networking device using half duplex.

b

Simultaneously sends and receives communication data. Use this setting for most environments. 3 Select the Ethernet type. - Tap ▶ tap <10BASE-T> or <100BASE-TX>.  4 Tap.

LIENS

Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit(P. 314) Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 315)

Modification de l'unité de transmission maximale

36WC-06U In most Ethernet networks, the maximum size of a packet that can be sent is 1500 bytes. A packet refers to a chunk of data into which the original data is divided before being sent. The maximum transmission unit (MTU) may vary on each network. Change the settings of the machine as necessary. For more information, contact your Network Administrator. 1 Tap in the screen. 2 Tap . If a screen for entering a System Manager ID and PIN is displayed, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, tap , and press ID. Setting the System Manager ID(P. 343) 3 Select . 4 Select the MTU. 

LIENS

Configuring Ethernet Settings(P. 312) Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 315)

Définition d'un délai d'attente pour la connexion à un réseau

36WC-06W When a network is designed to enjoy redundant connectivity with multiple switching hubs or bridges, it must have a mechanism to prevent packets from looping. One effective solution is to define the role of each switch port. However, communication may still be disrupted for several tens of seconds immediately after you change the way that network devices are connected, or if you add a new device. If this type of problem occurs, set a wait time for connecting to the network.

1 Touchez l'écran.

2 Touchez .

If a screen for entering a System Manager ID and PIN is displayed, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, tap , and press ID. Setting the System Manager ID(P. 343)

3 Touchez .

4 Saisissez le délai d'attente en secondes, puis touchez .

Use / or the numeric keys to enter the time. 

LIENS

Configuring Ethernet Settings(P. 312) Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit(P. 314) DNS (Domain Name System) provides a service for name resolution that associates a host (or domain) name with an IP address. Configure the DNS, mDNS, or DHCP option settings as necessary. Note that the procedures for configuring DNS are different for IPv4 and IPv6.  1 Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 409) 2 Click [Settings/Registration].  3 Click [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].  4 Configure DNS settings.

- Configuration du DNS IPv4

1 Cliquez sur [Modifier] dans [Paramètres IPv4].


2 Configurez les paramètres DNS IPv4.


[Paramètres DNS]

[Primary DNS Server Address] Enter the IP address of a DNS server. [Secondary DNS Server Address] Enter the IP address of a secondary DNS server, if any.

[Nom d'hôte]

Enter up to 47 alphanumeric characters for the host name of the machine that is to be registered to the DNS server.

[Nom de domaine]

Enter up to 47 alphanumeric characters for the name of the domain the machine belongs to, such as "example.com."

[Mise à jour dynamique du DNS]

Select the check box to dynamically update the DNS records whenever the machine's IP address is changed. When specifying the interval between updates, enter the time in hours in the [DNS Dynamic Update Interval] text box.

b [Paramètres mDNS]

[Utiliser mDNS]

Adopted by Bonjour, mDNS (multicast DNS) is a protocol for associating a host name with an IP address without using DNS. Select the check box to enable mDNS and enter the mDNS name in the [mDNS Name] text box. 

[Paramètres des options DHCP]

[Acquérir le nom d'hôte]

Select the check box to enable Option 12 to obtain the host name from the DHCP server.

[Mise à jour dynamique du DNS]

Select the check box to enable Option 81 to dynamically update the DNS records through the DHCP server.

[Acquérir l'adresse du serveur SMTP] *

Select the check box to enable Option 69 to obtain an SMTP server address from the DHCP server. *Optional for the imageRUNNER 2206N

[Acquérir l'adresse du serveur POP] *

Select the check box to enable Option 70 to obtain a POP3 server address from the DHCP server. *Optional for the imageRUNNER 2206N

3 Cliquez sur [OK].


■ Configuration du DNS IPv6

1 Cliquez sur [Modifier] dans [Paramètres IPv6].


2 Configurez les paramètres DNS IPv6.

- The [Use IPv6] check box must be selected to configure the settings. Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 278) 

[Paramètres DNS]

[Adresse du serveur DNS principal]

Enter the IP address of a DNS server. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast address) cannot be entered.

[Adresse du serveur DNS secondaire]

Enter the IP address of a secondary DNS server, if any. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast address) cannot be entered.

[Utiliser le même nom d'hôte/nom de domaine que IPv4]

Select the check box to use the same host and domain names as in IPv4.

[Nom d'hôte]

Enter up to 47 alphanumeric characters for the host name of the machine that is to be registered to the DNS server.

[Nom de domaine]

Enter up to 47 alphanumeric characters for the name of the domain the machine belongs to, such as "example.com."

[Mise à jour dynamique DNS]

Select the check box to dynamically update the DNS records whenever the machine's IP address is changed. To specify the type(s) of addresses you want to register to the DNS server, select the check box for [Register Manual Address], [Register Stateful Address], or [Register Stateless Address]. To specify the interval between updates, enter the time in hours in the [DNS Dynamic Update Interval] text box.

b [Paramètres mDNS]

[Utiliser mDNS]

Adopted by Bonjour, mDNS (multicast DNS) is a protocol for associating a host name with an IP address without using DNS. Select the check box to enable mDNS.

[Utiliser le même nom mDNS que IPv4]

Select the check box to use the same mDNS name as in IPv4. To set a different name, clear the check box and enter the mDNS name in the [mDNS Name] text box.

3 Cliquez sur [OK].


REMARQUE

Utilisation du panneau de commande

DNS settings can also be accessed from in the screen. IPv4 Settings(P. 435) IPv6 Settings(P. 437)

LIENS

Setting IPv4 Address(P. 275) Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 278) Viewing Network Settings(P. 282)  Server Message Block (SMB) is a protocol for sharing resources, such as files and printers, with more than one device in a network. The machine uses SMB to store scanned documents into a shared folder. Depending on your network, you may have to set the NetBIOS name and workgroup name.

REMARQUE

For imageRUNNER 2206N, this function can only be used when the optional Color Send Kit is attached.

Nom NetBIOS

In a Windows network that uses NetBIOS, NetBIOS names are used for identifying network-connected computers as well as for file sharing and other network services. Most computers use the computer name as the NetBIOS name.

Nom du groupe de travail

Workgroup name is a name for grouping multiple computers so that basic network functions, such as file sharing, become available in a Windows network. Specify the workgroup name to identify the group that the machine belongs to. 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 409) 2 Click [Settings/Registration].  3 Click [Network Settings] > [SMB Settings]. 

4 Cliquez sur [Modifier].


5 Spécifiez les paramètres requis et cliquez sur [OK].


[Nom NetBIOS]

Enter up to 15 alphanumeric characters for the NetBIOS name of the machine.

[Nom du groupe de travail]

Enter up to 15 alphanumeric characters for the name of the workgroup that the machine belongs to.

Enregistrement des serveurs LDAP

36WC-078  If an LDAP server is implemented in the network, you can search the server for fax numbers or e-mail addresses, and then specify them as destinations or register them in the Address Book. Note also that if send function authentication ( LDAP Server Authentication(P. 354) ) is enabled, you must register the server used for authentication. You can register a maximum of five LDAP servers each for searching and for authentication to the machine. Register LDAP servers via the Remote UI.

REMARQUE

For imageRUNNER 2206N, this function can only be used when the optional Color Send Kit is attached. - For information about LDAP servers that are supported by the machine, see Management Functions(P. 636) and System Environment(P. 637).

1 Démarrez l'interface utilisateur distante et connectez-vous en mode Gestionnaire système. Démarrage de l'interface utilisateur distante (P. 409)

2 Cliquez sur [Paramètres/Enregistrement].


3 Cliquez sur [Paramètres réseau] [Paramètres du serveur LDAP].


4 Cliquez sur [Enregistrer un nouveau serveur] pour [Serveur LDAP (pour recherche)] ou [Serveur LDAP (pour authentification)].

- LDAP server registration is separated, with registration either for searching or for authentication. To use an LDAP server for searching for fax and e-mail destinations, register it for searching, and to use it for authenticating sending of faxes or scans, register it for authenticating. 

REMARQUE :

To edit registered server information - Click a text link under [Server Name] for the edit screen. To delete registered server information - Click [Delete] on the right of the server name you want to delete click [OK].

5 Enregistrez le serveur LDAP.

Enregistrez le serveur utilisé pour les recherches

Register the server for searching for fax, e-mail destinations. 

[Nom du serveur]

Enter up to 24 characters for identifying the LDAP server.

[Adresse du serveur]

Enter the IP address of the LDAP server or enter up to 47 alphanumeric characters for the host name of the server (example:ldap.example.com).

IMPORTANT :

[Adresse du serveur] et DNS

To prevent errors from occurring when searching for destinations, make sure to check the following: - If the host name is entered for [Server Address], make sure that a DNS server is available in the network. - If the IP address is entered for [Server Address], check whether the DNS server supports only forward lookup. If the server supports only forward lookup, select [Do Not Use] or [Use] for [Login Information]. If you select [Use (Security Authentication)], make sure that the DNS server supports reverse lookup.

[Position to Start Search]

Specify the node in the directory information tree (DIT) that you want to start search from. Leaving the text box blank sets the machine to start search from an arbitrary node selected automatically. Depending on the type of characters used, up to 120 characters can be entered. - When specifying the node, enter "DC=", followed by a host name (a dot-delimited character string in the Active Directory domain name), and separate each of the entries with a comma. If the domain name is "john.example.com", for example, enter "DC=john,DC=example,DC=com." 

[Utiliser TLS]

Select the check box to encrypt communication with the LDAP server using TLS.

REMARQUE :

This is enabled only when [Use] or [Use (Security Authentication)] is selected in [Login Information].

[Numéro de port]

Enter the port number used for communicating with the LDAP server.

[Délai d'expiration de la recherche]

Specify how long the machine searches. Enter between 30 and 300 seconds.

[Informations de connexion]

Select [Do Not Use], [Use], or [Use (Security Authentication)] depending on the type of authentication implemented by the LDAP server. When [Use] or [Use (Security Authentication)] is selected, the user name and password must be specified.

[Do Not Use]	Select not to authenticate the machine using the login information.
[Use]	Select to authenticate the machine using the login information.
[Use (Security Authentication)]	Select to use data obtained by Kerberos, a network authentication protocol, for the authentication password. If this setting is selected, the clock of the machine needs to be synchronized with that of the LDAP server.

[Afficher l'écran d'authentification lors de la recherche]

Select the check box to require the user to enter the user name and password when a search is requested. If the [Use Same Authentication Information as When Send Operation Started] check box is selected, the user name and password used for authentication when sending faxes or scans are also used here. If the check box is cleared, authentication is carried out using the information entered in [UserID] and [Password].

[Utiliser les mêmes informations d'authentification que lors du démarrage de l'envoi]

Set whether the authentication information when the fax or scan function was used is also used when searching. This check box is normally displayed selected; however, it is only valid when the [Display Authentication Screen When Searching] check box is selected.

[Identifiant utilisateur]

Enter the user name of the machine that was registered to the LDAP server. Depending on the type of characters used, up to 120 characters can be entered. - When [Use] is selected for [Login Information], enter the user name in the form "(domain name)\( (user name)" (example: domain1\user1). - When [Use (Security Authentication)] is selected, enter the user name only (example: user1).

[Définir/Modifier le mot de passe]

To specify or change the password, select the check box and enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters in the [Password] text box.

[Nom de domaine]

When [Use (Security Authentication)] is selected for [Login Information], enter up to 120 alphanumeric characters for the directory tree name in Active Directory (example: example.com).

[Confirmer le certificat TLS pour l'accès au serveur LDAP]

Select the check box to verify the certificate when encrypting communication with the LDAP server using TLS. Also, select the [Add CN to Verification Items] check box as necessary.

Enregistrement du serveur d'authentification

If the use of the fax and scan functions is restricted, register the server used for authentication. 

[Nom du serveur]

Enter up to 24 characters for identifying the LDAP server.

[Adresse du serveur]

Enter the IP address of the LDAP server or enter up to 47 alphanumeric characters for the host name of the server (example:ldap.example.com).

IMPORTANT :

[Adresse du serveur] et DNS

To prevent errors from occurring when searching for destinations, make sure to check the following: - If the host name is entered for [Server Address], make sure that a DNS server is available in the network. - If the IP address is entered for [Server Address], check whether the DNS server supports only forward lookup. If the server supports only forward lookup, select [Use] for [Login Information]. If you select [Use (Security Authentication)], make sure that the DNS server supports reverse lookup.

[Position de début de recherche]

Specify the node in the directory information tree (DIT) that you want to start search from. Leaving the text box blank sets the machine to start search from an arbitrary node selected automatically. Depending on the type of characters used, up to 120 characters can be entered. - When specifying the node, enter "DC=", followed by a host name (a dot-delimited character string in the Active Directory domain name), and separate each of the entries with a comma. If the domain name is "john.example.com", for example, enter "DC=john,DC=example,DC=com." 

[Utiliser TLS]

Select the check box to encrypt communication with the LDAP server using TLS.

REMARQUE :

This is enabled only when [Use] is selected in [Login Information].

[Numéro de port]

Enter the port number used for communicating with the LDAP server.

[Délai d'attente pour l'authentification/acquisition des attributs]

Specify how long authentication and attribute acquisition can continue in a range from 15 to 150 seconds.

[Attribut d'identifiant utilisateur]

Enter the attribute name, to be compared with a user name entered during authentication, of up to 64 alphanumeric characters (Example: "sAMAccountName").

REMARQUE :

No entry is required when [Use (Security Authentication)] is selected in [Login Information].

[Attribut d'adresse e-mail]

Enter the attribute name, to be used for obtaining an e-mail address from the authentication server, of up to 64 alphanumeric characters (Example: "mail").

[Informations de connexion]

Select [Use] or [Use (Security Authentication)] depending on the type of authentication implemented by the LDAP server.

[Use]	Select to authenticate the machine using the System Manager ID.
[Use (Security Authentication)]	Select to use data obtained by Kerberos, a network authentication protocol, for the authentication password. If this setting is selected, the clock of the machine needs to be synchronized with that of the LDAP server.

[Utiliser l'ID du gestionnaire système]

If [Use] is selected in [Login Information], this specifies whether authentication using the system manager ID is used. To use the system manager ID, select the check box and specify the user name and password for used for authentication. If you deselect this check box, login is anonymous (no user name).

[Identifiant utilisateur]

Enter the user name of the machine that was registered to the LDAP server in the form "(domain name)\( (user name)" (example: domain1\user1). Depending on the type of characters used, up to 120 characters can be entered.

[Définir/Modifier le mot de passe]

To specify or change the password, select the check box and enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters in the [Password] text box.

[Nom de domaine]

When [Use (Security Authentication)] is selected for [Login Information], enter up to 120 alphanumeric characters for the directory tree name in Active Directory (example: example.com).

Confirmer le certificat TLS pour l'accès au serveur LDAP

Select the check box to verify the certificate when encrypting communication with the LDAP server using TLS. Also, select the [Add CN to Verification Items] check box as necessary.

6 Cliquez sur [OK].

LIENS

Specifying Destinations in an LDAP Server(P. 121) Specifying Destinations in an LDAP Server (E-Mail)(P. 221) Configuring SNTP(P. 329) LDAP Server Authentication(P. 354)  Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) enables you to adjust the system clock by using the time server on the network. The protocol is typically used for synchronizing the machine and a server, such as when the machine needs to access an LDAP server with the security authentication that was enabled. The time is adjusted based on Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), so specify the time zone setting before configuring SNMP ( Date/Time Settings(P. 449)). SNMP settings can be specified via the Remote UI.

REMARQUE

- The SNTP of the machine supports both NTP (version 3) and SNMP (versions 3 and 4) servers. 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 409) 2 Click [Settings/Registration].  3 Click [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings]. 

4 Cliquez sur [Modifier] dans [Paramètres SNTP].


5 Cochez la case [Utiliser SNTP] et spécifiez les paramètres requis.


[Utiliser SNTP]

Select the check box to use SNTP for synchronization. If you do not want to use SNTP, clear the check box.

[Nom du serveur NTP]

Enter the IP address of the NTP or the SNMP server. If DNS is available on the network, you can enter a host name (or FQDN) of up to 255 alphanumeric characters instead (example: ntp.example.com).

[Intervalle d'interrogation]

Specify the interval between one synchronization and the next. Specify an interval from 1 to 48 hours.

6 Cliquez sur [OK].

REMARQUE

Test de communication avec le serveur NTP/SNTP

- You can view communication status with the registered server by clicking [Settings/Registration] [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings] and then clicking [Check NTP Server] in [SNTP Settings] that appears. If a proper connection has been established, the result is displayed as shown below. Note that this operation does not adjust the system clock. 

LIENS

Registering LDAP Servers(P. 323)

Surveillance et contrôle de la machine avec SNMP

36WC-06Y Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a protocol for monitoring and controlling communication devices in a network by using Management Information Base (MIB). The machine supports SNMPv1 and security-enhanced SNMPv3. You can check the status of the machine from a computer when you print documents or use the Remote UI. You can enable either SNMPv1 or SNMPv3, or both at the same time. Specify the settings for each version to suit your network environment and the purpose of use. 

SNMPv1

SNMPv1 uses information called "community" to define the scope of SNMP communication. Because this information is exposed to the network in plain text, your network will be vulnerable to attacks. If you want to ensure network security, disable SNMPv1 and use SNMPv3.

SNMPv3

With SNMPv3, you can implement network device management that is protected by robust security features. Note that TLS must be enabled for the Remote UI before configuring SNMPv3 ( Enabling TLS Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI(P. 385)).

NOTE

- The machine does not support the trap notification feature of SNMP. - To change the port number of SNMP, see Changing Port Numbers(P. 367). - SNMP management software, when installed on a computer on the network, enables you to configure, monitor, and control the machine remotely from the computer. For more information, see the instruction manuals for your management software. 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 409) 2 Click [Settings/Registration]. 

3 Cliquez sur [Network Settings] puis [SNMP Settings].


4 Cliquez sur [Edit].


5 Spécifiez les paramètres SNMPv1.

- If you do not need to change SNMPv1 settings, proceed to the next step. 

[UseSNMPv1]

Select the check box to enable SNMPv1. You can specify the rest of SNMPv1 settings only when this check box is selected.

[Use Community Name 1]/[Use Community Name 2]

Select the check box to specify a community name. If you do not need to specify a community name, clear the check box.

[Community Name]

Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for the name of the community.

[MIB Access Permission]

For each community, select [Read/Write] or [Read Only] for the access privileges to MIB objects.

[Read/Write]	Permits both viewing and changing the values of MIB objects.
[Read Only]	Permits only viewing the values of MIB objects.

[Use Dedicated Community]

Dedicated Community is a preset community, intended exclusively for Administrators using Canon software. Select the check box to use Dedicated Community. If you do not need to use Dedicated Community, clear the check box.

6 Spécifiez les paramètres SNMPv3.

If you do not need to change SNMPv3 settings, proceed to the next step. 

[UseSNMPv3]

Select the check box to enable SNMPv3. You can specify the rest of SNMPv3 settings only when this check box is selected.

[Enable User]

Select the check box to enable [User Settings 1]/[User Settings 2]/[User Settings 3]. To disable user settings, clear the corresponding check box.

[UserID]

Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for the user name.

[MIB Access Permission]

Select [Read/Write] or [Read Only] for the access privileges to MIB objects.

[Read/Write]	Permits both viewing and changing the values of MIB objects.
[Read Only]	Permits only viewing the values of MIB objects.

[Paramètres de sécurité]

Select [Authentication On/Encryption On], [Authentication On/Encryption Off], or [Authentication Off/ Encryption Off] for the desired combination of authentication and encryption settings.

[Algorithme d'authentification]

If you selected [Authentication On/Encryption On] or [Authentication On/Encryption Off] for [Security Settings], select the algorithm that corresponds to your environment.

[Algorithme de chiffrement]

If you selected [Authentication On/Encryption On] for [Security Settings], select the algorithm that corresponds to your environment.

[Définir/Modifier le mot de passe]

To set or change the password, select the check box and enter between 6 and 16 alphanumeric characters for the password in the [Authentication Password] or [Encryption Password] text box. For confirmation, enter the same password in the [Confirm] text box. Passwords can be set independently for authentication and encryption algorithms.

[Nom de contexte 1]/[Nom de contexte 2]/[Nom de contexte 3]

Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for the context name. Up to three context names can be registered.

7 Spécifiez les paramètres d'acquisition des informations de gestion de l'imprimante.

- With SNMP, the printer management information, such as printing protocols and printer ports, can be monitored and obtained regularly from a computer on the network. 

[Acquérir les informations de gestion de l'imprimante depuis l'hôte]

Select the check box to enable monitoring of the printer management information of the machine via SNMP. To disable monitoring of the printer management information, clear the check box.

8 Cliquez sur [OK].

REMARQUE

Désactivation de SNMPv1

Some of the functions of the machine become unavailable, such as obtaining machine information via the printer driver.

Utilisation du panneau de commande

You can also specify SNMPv1 settings and enable/disable SNMPv3 settings from the in the screen. © SNMP Settings(P. 440)

Activation de SNMPv1 et SNMPv3

If both versions of SNMP are enabled, it is recommended that MIB access permission in SNMPv1 be set to [Read Only]. MIB access permission can be set independently in SNMPv1 and SNMPv3 (and for each user in SNMPv3). Selecting [Read/Write] (full access permission) in SNMPv1 negates the robust security features that characterize SNMPv3 because most of the machine settings can then be controlled with SNMPv1.

LIENS

Enabling TLS Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI(P. 385)

Sécurité

Sécurité 338

Protection de la machine contre les accès non autorisés 339

Preventing Unauthorized Access 340 Setting Access Privileges 342 Setting the System Manager ID 343 Setting the Department ID Management 345 Setting a Remote UI PIN 352 LDAP Server Authentication 354 Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls 359 Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Rules 360 Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Rules 364 Changing Port Numbers 367 Setting a Proxy 369

Restriction des fonctions de la machine 371

Restricting Access to Address Book and Sending Functions 372 Setting a PIN for Address Book 373 Limiting Available Destinations 374 Prohibiting PC Faxing (imageRUNNER 2206iF) 375 Disabling Use of Previously Used Destinations 376 Checking Destinations before Sending Documents (imageRUNNER 2206iF) 377 Prohibiting Sequential Broadcasting (imageRUNNER 2206iF) 379 Restricting Printing from a Computer 380 Restricting USB Functions 381 Disabling HTTP Communication 382 Disabling Remote UI 383

Implémentation de fonctions de sécurité robustes 384

Enabling TLS Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI 385 Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication 389 Configuring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certificates 394 Generating Key Pairs 395 Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certificates 402 Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certificates 405

Sécurité

36WC-079 Confidential information is handled by information devices everywhere, including computers and printers, and any of these devices may become a target for malicious third parties at anytime. Attackers may directly gain unauthorized access to your devices, or indirectly take advantage of negligence or improper use. Either way, you may incur unanticipated losses when your confidential information is leaked. To counter these risks, the machine is equipped with a variety of security functions. Set the necessary configuration depending on your environment.

REMARQUE

- You can configure the best security system by building an environment that inhibits access to printers on your in-house network via the Internet and using such environment together with the machine's security features. Preventing Unauthorized Access(P. 340)

■ Établir les bases de la sécurité de l'information

 Protecting the Machine from Unauthorized Access(P. 339)

Préparation aux risques liés à la négligence ou à une mauvaise utilisation

 Restricting the Machine's Functions(P. 371)

■ Implémentation de fonctions de sécurité robustes

 Implementing Robust Security Features(P. 384)

Protection de la machine contre les accès non autorisés

36WC-07A Prevent unauthorized third parties from accessing and using the machine. You can implement multiple security measures, such as using firewalls and changing port numbers. 

Prévention des accès non autorisés

36WC-07C This section describes the security measures on how to prevent unauthorized access from the external network. This is a must-read for all users and administrators before using this machine, other printers, and multifunction machines connected to the network. In recent years, a printer/multifunction machine connected to the network can offer you a variety of useful functions, such as printing from a computer, operating from a computer using the remote function, and sending scanned documents via the Internet. On the other hand, it is essential to take security measures to reduce the security risk for information leakage, as a printer/multifunction machine has become more exposed to threats, such as unauthorized access and theft, when it is connected to the network. This section explains necessary settings you need to specify to prevent unauthorized access before using a printer/multifunction machine connected to the network.

Mesures de sécurité pour empêcher les accès non autorisés depuis le réseau externe

Assigning a Private IP Address(P. 340) Using Firewall to Restrict Transmission(P. 341) Specifying the TLS Encrypted Communication (P. 341) Setting PIN to Manage Information Stored in the Multifunction Machine(P. 341)

Attribution d'une adresse IP privée

An IP address is a numerical label assigned to each device participating in a computer network. A "global IP address" is used for the communication connecting to the Internet, and a "private IP address" is used for the communication within a local area network, such as a LAN in the company. If a global IP address is assigned, your printer/multifunction machine is open to the public and can be accessed via the Internet. Thus, the risk of information leakage due to unauthorized access from external network increases. On the other hand, if a private IP address is assigned, your printer/multifunction machine is closed to a local area network and can be accessed by only users on your local area network, such as a LAN in the company.  Global IP Address Can be accessed from the users within a local area network  Private IP Address Can be accessed from the users within a local area network Basically, assign a private IP address to your printer/multifunction machine. Make sure to confirm the IP address, assigned to the printer/multifunction machine you are using, is a private IP address or not. A private IP address is found in one of the following ranges.

Plages d'adresses IP privées

From 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255 From 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255 From 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255 For information on how to confirm the IP address, see Setting IPv4 Address(P. 275).

REMARQUE

- If a global IP address is assigned to a printer/multifunction machine, you can create a network environment to reduce the risk of unauthorized access by installing security software, such as a firewall that prevents access from the external networks. If you want to assign a global IP address to and use a printer/ multifunction machine, contact your network administrator.

Utilisation d'un pare-feu pour restreindre la transmission

A firewall is a system that prevents unauthorized access from the external networks and protects against attacks/ intrusions to a local area network. You can use a firewall on your network environment to block access from the external network that appears to be dangerous, by restricting communication from specified IP address of the external network. The function installed to a Canon printer/multifunction machine enables you to set up the IP address filter. For information on how to set up an IP address filter, see specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Rules(P. 360).

Spécification de la communication chiffrée TLS

For information on the TLS Encrypted Communication, see Enabling TLS Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI(P. 385).

Définition du code PIN pour gérer les informations stockées dans le multifonction

If a malicious third party attempts to gain unauthorized access to a printer/multifunction machine, setting PIN to information stored in the machine will reduce the risk of information leakage. Canon printer/multifunction machine enables you to protect various type of information by setting PIN.

Définition du code PIN pour chaque fonction

Setting PIN for Using Remote UI For more information, see Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 352). - Setting PIN for the System Manager Settings For more information, see Setting the System Manager ID(P. 343). - Address Book PIN For more information on setting a PIN, see Setting a PIN for Address Book (P. 373). Listed above are some examples of security measures for preventing unauthorized access. For more information on the other security measures, see Security(P. 338) and take necessary security measures for preventing unauthorized access to suit your environment.

Définition des privilèges d'accès

36WC-07E Protect the machine from unauthorized access by only allowing users with access privileges to use the machine. Access privileges are set separately for each account, or "ID." A PIN can be set for each ID. If a user tries to operate the machine when IDs are enabled, a logon screen is displayed, and the user must enter a correct ID and PIN to use the machine.  IDs are divided into two types: System Manager ID, which is intended exclusively for Administrators, and Department ID for general users. System Manager ID is an account with full access privileges. With System Manager ID, you can restrict the use of functions, such as printing and copying, for each ID. If these two types of IDs are used at the same time, two different privilege levels are set, which makes it possible to flexibly manage the machine and enhance security.

ID du gestionnaire système

System Manager ID is an account with full access privileges. If you specify a System Manager ID, you need to log on to the machine using the System Manager ID information in order to access or . Set the System Manager ID when you need different access privilege levels for Administrators and general users. Only one System Manager ID can be registered. Setting the System Manager ID(P. 343)

ID de service (gestion des ID de service)

You can specify access privileges for a user (or group of users) by registering a Department ID. You can register multiple Department IDs. If a user tries to operate the machine when Department IDs are enabled, a logon screen is displayed, and the user must enter their own Department ID and PIN to use the machine. Information for each Department ID can be viewed, such as how many pages have been copied, printed, or scanned. Setting the Department ID Management(P. 345)

Code PIN de l'interface utilisateur distante (code PIN d'accès à l'interface utilisateur distante)

This is a PIN for using the Remote UI. Only users who know the PIN can access the Remote UI. Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 352)

Définition de l'ID du gestionnaire système

36WC-07F Register the System Manager ID, an ID that is intended exclusively for Administrators. You can also set a PIN for the System Manager ID. If this ID is enabled, you can access and only when the System Manager ID and PIN have been entered correctly. The ID and PIN are both set to "7654321" as default. Change them for security purposes. The System Manager ID settings information is critical to the security of the machine, so make sure that only Administrators know the System Manager ID and PIN. 1 Tap in the screen. 2 Tap . 3 Select . 4 Specify the System Manager PIN. - Specify the < System Manager ID>, and then specify the < System Manager PIN>. - Enter a number of up to seven digits, and tap . - When < PIN(Confirm)> is displayed, enter the PIN once again to confirm.     

REMARQUE :

- You cannot set a PIN that consists only of zeros, such as "00" or "0000000". To disable the PIN, press to erase the PIN (leave the text box blank), and tap .

Définition du nom du gestionnaire système

1 Tap .  2 Enter up to 32 characters for the System Manager Name, and tap . Entering Text(P. 24) 

REMARQUE

Configuration des paramètres via l'interface utilisateur distante

- Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Click [Settings/Registration]▶ [System Management]▶ [Edit] and specify the necessary settings on the displayed screen. - By using the Remote UI, you can register a variety of information, including contact information, Administrator comments, the installation location of the machine, as well as to the settings that you can register by using the control panel. The registered information can be viewed on the [Device Information] page of the Remote UI. ☐Checking System Manager Information(P. 418)

Connexion à la machine

- If you try to access or when only the System Manager ID is enabled, the following logon screen is displayed:

Enter System Manager ID and PIN Login: Press ID

System Manager ID: PIN:

Définition de la gestion des ID de service

36WC-07H You can control access to the machine by using multiple IDs for multiple users or groups. If a user tries to operate the machine when Department ID Management is enabled, a logon screen is displayed, and the user must enter their own Department ID and PIN to use the machine. When Department ID Management is enabled, usage of functions, such as copying and scanning, is recorded for each Department ID. To configure Department ID Management, register department IDs as necessary and then enable Department ID Management function. Additional settings are required if you want to enable Department ID Management for operations from a computer, such as printing.  Registering/Editing Department ID and PIN(P. 345) Enabling the Department ID Management(P. 347) Setting the Department ID Management for Printing or Faxing from the Computer(P. 349) Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown(P. 350)

Enregistrement/modification de l'ID de service et du code PIN

Register a Department ID and set a PIN for it. You can also disable functions, such as black and white copying and printing, for each Department ID. Up to 100 Department IDs can be registered. 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 409) 2 Click [Settings/Registration].  3 Click [Department ID Management] and register (or edit) Department IDs. 

Enregistrement d'un ID de service

1 Click [Register New Department]. 2 Specify the required settings and click [OK]. 

[ID de service]

Enter a number of up to seven digits for the Department ID.

[Définir le code PIN]

To set a PIN, select the check box and enter a number of up to seven digits both in the [PIN] and [Confirm] text boxes.

[Restreindre les fonctions]

Select the check boxes of the items you want to set, and then enter the maximum number of pages that can be copied/printed/scanned for those departments. NOTE: Total Prints is the combined number of copies, prints, and scans that are allowed.

■ Modification des paramètres de l'ID de service enregistré

1 Click the corresponding text link under [Department ID] to edit. 2 Change the settings as necessary and click [OK].

REMARQUE :

Deleting a Department ID Click [Delete] on the right of the Department ID you want to delete click [OK].

REMARQUE

[Total de pages par ID de service]

- You can check the total numbers of pages copied, printed, scanned, or faxed for each Department ID. - If you want to return the counts to zero, click the corresponding text link under [Department ID] and click [Clear Count] [OK]. If you want to return the counts of all Department IDs to zero, click [Clear All Counts] [OK]. 

Activation de la gestion des ID de service

After you register as many Department IDs as necessary, enable Department ID Management. 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 409) 2 Click [Settings/Registration].  3 Click [Department ID Management] [Edit]. 

4 Cochez la case [Gestion des ID de service] et cliquez sur [OK].


[Gestion des ID de service]

Select the check box to enable Department ID Management. If you do not want to use Department ID Management, clear the check box.

REMARQUE :

For information on the [Allow Print Jobs with Unknown IDs]/[Allow Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs] check boxes, see Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown(P. 350).

REMARQUE

Utilisation du panneau de commande

If you only want to enable or disable the settings, you can use in the screen. Department ID Management On/Off(P. 493)

Connexion à la machine

When you try to operate the machine when Department ID Management is enabled, the following logon screen is displayed: 

Configuration de la gestion des ID de service pour l'impression ou l'envoi de télécopies depuis l'ordinateur

If you want to enable Department ID Management for printing and faxing from a computer, you need to specify settings by using the drivers you already installed on the computer. Specify the Department ID and PIN as necessary.

IMPORTANT

To perform the following procedure, log on to your computer with an administrator account. 1 Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 652) 2 Right-click your printer or fax icon and click [Printer properties] (or [Properties]).  3 Click the [Device Settings] tab and specify the required settings. 1 Select the [Use Department ID Management] check box and click [Settings] on the right of it. - For the fax driver, select [Department ID Management] in [User Management], click [Settings], and then select the [Allow PIN Settings] check box to enable the PIN setting. 2 Specify the settings as necessary and click [OK]. 

[ID de service]

Enter a number of up to seven digits for the Department ID.

[NIP]

Enter a number of up to seven digits for the PIN if it is set for the Department ID.

[Vérifier]

Click to verify that the correct ID and PIN are entered. This function is not available if the machine and the computer are connected via a USB or WSD (Web Services on Devices) port.

[Confirmer l'ID de service/NIP lors de l'impression]/[Confirmer l'ID de service/NIP lors de l'envoi de télécopies]

Select the check box to display the [Confirm Department ID/PIN] pop-up screen each time you print or fax from a computer.

[Authentifier l'ID de service/NIP sur le périphérique]

Select the check box if the machine and the computer are connected via a USB or WSD port.

3 Cliquez sur [OK].

REMARQUE

Connexion à la machine

When you try to print or fax from a computer when Department ID Management is enabled, the following pop-up screen is displayed (unless the [Confirm Department ID/PIN When Printing]/[Confirm Department ID/PIN When Sending Faxes] check box is cleared): 

Blocage des travaux lorsque l'ID de service est inconnu

If you do not change the default settings, any user can print from a computer or scan without entering an ID and PIN even when Department ID Management is enabled for the machine. You can change the default settings so that the machine cannot be used for these functions without a correct ID and PIN. 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 409) 2 Click [Settings/Registration]. 

3 Cliquez sur [Gestion des ID de service] puis sur [Modifier].


4 Décochez les cases nécessaires et cliquez sur [OK].


[Autoriser les travaux d'impression avec des ID inconnus]

In order to print from a computer when Department ID Management is enabled, you need to enter the correct ID and PIN on the printer driver ( Setting the Department ID Management for Printing or Faxing from the Computer(P. 349)). However if the check box is selected for this setting, you can print from a computer without entering the ID and PIN. Clear the check box to require entering an ID and PIN.

[Autoriser les travaux de numérisation avec des ID inconnus]

If the check box is selected, you can select on the screen and scan documents to a computer anytime. Clear the check box to disable the selection of when Department ID Management is enabled. Setting Access Privileges(P. 342) Setting the System Manager ID(P. 343) You can set a PIN for access to the Remote UI. All users use a common PIN. 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 409) 2 Click [Settings/Registration].  3 Click [Security Settings] [Remote UI Settings].  4 Click [Edit]. 

5 Cochez la case [Utiliser le code PIN d'accès à l'interface distante] et définissez le code PIN.


[Utiliser le code PIN d'accès à l'interface distante]

If you select this check box, you must enter a PIN to access the Remote UI.

[Définir/Modifier le code PIN]

To set a PIN, select the check box and enter a number of up to seven digits both in the [PIN] and [Confirm] text boxes.

6 Cliquez sur [OK].

REMARQUE

Si le code PIN est oublié

- Set a new Remote UI Access PIN in the settings menu on the control panel. Remote UI Settings(P. 495)

Si les paramètres de l'interface distante sont initialisés

- The Remote UI Access PIN is also initialized. After an initialization, reset the PIN. 📁Initializing Menu(P. 603)

LIENS

Setting Access Privileges(P. 342) Setting the System Manager ID(P. 343) 36WC-08J If your system has an LDAP server installed, you can ensure that LDAP server authentication is carried out when the send function is used. This enables you to prevent unauthorized use by third parties and information disclosure. Once the authorization settings are enabled, the Authorized Send screen appears when the fax or scan function is used and operation can only continue if it is correctly authorized by the LDAP server. Use the settings described here to configure LDAP server authentication. For more information on registering the server to be used for authentication, see Registering LDAP Servers(P. 323).

REMARQUE

For imageRUNNER 2206N, this function can only be used when the optional Color Send Kit is attached. 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 409) 2 Click [Settings/Registration].  3 Click [Security Settings] [Authentication Settings for Send Function]. 

4 Cliquez sur [Modifier].


5 Cochez la case [Utiliser l'authentification utilisateur] et sélectionnez si un écran de confirmation doit être affiché lors de la déconnexion.


[Utiliser l'authentification utilisateur]

Select the check box to display the Authorized Send logon screen when the fax or scan function is used (LDAP server authentication).

[Afficher l'écran de confirmation lors de la déconnexion]

Select the check box to display a screen that allows you to selectively log out when you are logged on for both Authorized Send and Department ID Management. If you clear this check box, no selection screen is displayed when you log out and you are logged out from both Authorized Send and Department ID Management.

6 Configurez les paramètres d'envoi d'e-mails.


[Envoi d'e-mail]

Select whether to allow sending e-mail.

[Do Not Allow]	Blocks sending e-mail. <E-Mail> in the scan function can no longer be used.
[Allow]	Sending e-mail is not blocked.
[Only Allow Sending to Myself]	Blocks all sending e-mail other than those to users with authorized e-mail addresses. The e-mail addresses of authorized users must be registered on the LDAP server.

[Méthode d'authentification]

When [Allow] or [Only Allow Sending to Myself] is selected in [E-Mail Sending], this allows you to specify whether an authentication screen is shown on the SMTP server when e-mail is sent.

(Display the authentication screen using the same user name as when the sending operation started]	Displays the authentication screen showing the same user name and password entered in the Authorized Send logon screen.
(Display the authentication screen without any authentication information]	Displays the authentication screen with the user name and password fields blank.
[Use device-specific authentication information and do not display the authentication screen]	No authentication screen is displayed when e-mail is sent. Authorization on the SMTP server is carried out using the user name and password set in [E-Mail Settings] ☑Configuring E-Mail Communication Settings(P. 302) .

[Spécifier l'utilisateur authentifié comme expéditeur]

Select the check box when the e-mail address of an authorized user will be set as the sender. The e-mail addresses of authorized users must be registered on the LDAP server. If you clear this check box, the e-mail address set in the [E-Mail Settings] is set as the sender.

7 Configurez les paramètres de transfert de fichiers (pour l'enregistrement dans des dossiers partagés).


[Envoi de fichier]

Select whether to allow saving to shared folders.

[Do Not Allow]	Blocks saving to shared folders. <File> in the scan function can no longer be used.
[Allow]	Saving to shared folders is not blocked.
[Only Allow Sending to Myself or Specified Folder]	Blocks all saving to shared folders other than specified folders. The data is saved to folders registered on the LDAP server or to the folder specified in [Specify Destination Folder].

■ Lorsque [Autoriser] est spécifié dans [Envoi de fichier]

[Méthode d'authentification]

Allows you to specify whether an authentication screen is shown on the server when sending.

[Display the authentication screen using the same authentication information as when the sending operation started]	Displays the authentication screen showing the same user name and password entered in the Authorized Send logon screen.
[Display the authentication screen without any authentication information]	Displays the authentication screen with the user name and password fields blank.
[Use the authentication information from the address book and do not display the authentication screen]	No authentication screen is displayed when sending. Authentication is carried out on the server using the user name and password set in the Address Book.

■ Lorsque [Autoriser uniquement l'envoi à moi-même ou à un dossier spécifié] est spécifié dans [Envoi de fichier]

[Méthode d'authentification]

Allows you to specify whether an authentication screen is shown on the server when sending.

[Use the same authentication information as when the sending operation started]	Carries out authorization on the server using the user name and password entered in the Authorized Send logon screen. Selecting the [Display Authentication Screen] check box displays the authentication screen with this user name and password already entered when you send the data.
[Display the authentication screen without any authentication information]	Displays the authentication screen with the user name and password fields blank.

[Spécifier le dossier de destination]

Selecting this check box allows you to specify the folder where the data is saved. If the check box is not selected, the save destination is set based on authorized user information registered on the LDAP server.

[Host Name]	Enter a host name for the shared folder up to 120 characters in length.
[Folder Path]	Enter a path name for the save destination folder up to 120 characters in length (excluding the host name). When the [Add User Name] check box is selected, the user name and path used for LDAP authentication are added.

8 Configurez les paramètres d'envoi de télécopies. (imageRUNNER 2206iF)


[Envoi de télécopie]

Select whether to allow sending faxes.

[Do Not Allow]	Blocks sending faxes. The fax function can no longer be used.
[Allow]	Sending faxes is not blocked.

9 Cliquez sur [OK].

LIENS

Registering LDAP Servers(P. 323)

Restreindre la communication à l'aide de pare-feu

36WC-07K Without proper security, unauthorized third parties can access computers and other communication devices that are connected to a network. To prevent this unauthorized access, specify the settings for packet filter, a feature that restricts communication to devices with specified IP addresses or MAC addresses. 

Spécification des adresses IP pour les règles de pare-feu

36WC-07L You can either limit communication to only devices with specified IP addresses, or block devices with specified IP addresses but permit other communications. You can specify a single IP address or a range of IP addresses.

REMARQUE

- Up to 4 IP addresses (or ranges of IP addresses) can be specified for both IPv4 and IPv6. - The packet filters described in this section control communications over TCP, UDP, and ICMP.

1 Démarrez l'interface utilisateur distante et connectez-vous en mode gestionnaire système. ● Démarrage de l'interface utilisateur distante (P. 409)

2 Cliquez sur [Paramètres/Enregistrement].


3 Cliquez sur [Paramètres de sécurité] ▸ [Filtre d'adresse IP].


4 Cliquez sur [Modifier] pour le type de filtre que vous souhaitez utiliser.


[Filtre entrant IPv4]

Specify IPv4 addresses to restrict receiving data by the machine.

[Filtre entrant IPv6]

Specify IPv6 addresses to restrict receiving data by the machine.

5 Spécifiez les paramètres de filtrage des paquets.


a [Adresses bloquées]

Register addresses to be blocked, as well as check or delete registered blocked addresses.

b [Adresses autorisées]

Register addresses to be allowed, as well as check or delete registered allowed addresses.

1 Cochez la case [Utiliser le filtre].

- Select the check box to restrict communication. Clear the check box to disable the restriction.

2 Spécifiez l'adresse.

- Enter the IP address (or the range of IP addresses) in the [Address to Register] text box and click [Add].

Registered address	Result
[Blocked Addresses]	Restricts communication (received) with devices having their IP addresses entered for [Address to Register]. Communication is allowed with devices with any other IP addresses.
[Allowed Addresses]	Allows communication (received) only with devices having their IP addresses entered for [Address to Register], and restricts communication with devices with any other IP addresses.
Registered as both	Allows communication (received) only with devices having their IP addresses registered in [Allowed Addresses], and restricts communication with devices with any other IP addresses. However, communication is restricted for IP addresses also registered in [Blocked Addresses].

IMPORTANT :

Vérifiez les erreurs de saisie.

If IP addresses are incorrectly entered, you may be unable to access the machine from the Remote UI, in which case you need to set or to . IPv4 Address Filter (P. 494) IPv6 Address Filter (P. 494)

NOTE :

Entry form for IP addresses

	Description	Example
Entering a single address	IPv4: Delimit numbers with periods.	192.168.0.10
	IPv6: Delimit alphanumeric characters with colons.	fe80::10
Specifying a range of addresses	Insert a hyphen between the addresses.	IPv4: 192.168.0.10-192.168.0.20
		IPv6: fe80::10-fe80::20
Specifying a range of addresses with a prefix (IPv6 only)	Enter the address, followed by a slash and a number indicating the prefix length.	fe80::1234/64

Deleting an IP address from exceptions Select an IP address and click [Delete]. 

3 Cliquez sur [OK].

NOTE

You can enable or disable the IP Address Filter settings from in the screen. IPv4 Address Filter (P. 494) IPv6 Address Filter (P. 494)

LIENS

Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Rules(P. 364)

Spécification des adresses MAC pour les règles de pare-feu

36WC-07R You can limit communication to only devices with specified MAC addresses, or block devices with specified MAC addresses but permit other communications. Up to 10 MAC addresses can be specified.

IMPORTANT

This function is unavailable when the machine is connected to a wireless LAN. 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 409) 2 Click [Settings/Registration].  3 Click [Security Settings] [MAC Address Filter].  4 Click [Edit]. 

[Filtre entrant]

Select to restrict receiving data from the machine to a computer by specifying MAC addresses.

5 Spécifiez les paramètres de filtrage des paquets.


1 Cochez la case [Utiliser le filtre].

- Select the check box to restrict communication. Clear the check box to disable the restriction.

2 Spécifiez l'adresse.

- Enter the MAC address in the [Address to Register] text box and click [Add]. Allows communication (received) only with devices having registered MAC addresses, and restricts communication with devices with any other MAC addresses. - You do not need to delimit the address with hyphens or colons.

IMPORTANT :

Check for entry errors If MAC addresses are incorrectly entered, you may become unable to access the machine from the Remote UI, in which case you need to set to . MAC Address Filter (P. 494)

NOTE :

Deleting a MAC address from exceptions Select a MAC address and click [Delete].  3 Click [OK].

NOTE

You can enable or disable the MAC Address Filter settings from in the screen. © MAC Address Filter (P. 494)

LIENS

Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Rules(P. 360) Ports serve as endpoints for communicating with other devices. Typically, conventional port numbers are used for major protocols, but devices that use these port numbers are vulnerable to attacks because these port numbers are well-known. To enhance security, your Network Administrator may change the port numbers. When a port number has been changed, the new number must be shared with the communicating devices, such as computers and servers. Specify the port number settings depending on the network environment.

NOTE

- To change the port number for proxy server, Setting a Proxy(P. 369). To change the port number for LDAP server, see Registering LDAP Servers(P. 323). 1 Tap in the screen. 2 Tap . - If a screen for entering a System Manager ID and PIN is displayed, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, tap , and press . Setting the System Manager ID(P. 343) 3 Select ▶ . 4 Tap the port to change. 

NOTE :

Learning more about the ports // Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 287) Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 382) - / Configuring E-Mail Communication Settings(P. 302) Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 332) 5 Enter the port number using the numeric keys, and tap .  Configuring Printer Ports(P. 290) A proxy (or HTTP proxy server) refers to a computer or software that carries out HTTP communication for other devices, especially when communicating with resources outside the network, such as when browsing Web sites. The client devices connect to the outside network through the proxy server, and do not communicate directly to the resources outside. Setting a proxy not only facilitates management of traffic between in-house and outside networks but also blocks unauthorized access and consolidates anti-virus protection for enhanced security. When you use Google Cloud Print to print over the Internet, you can enhance security by setting a proxy. When setting a proxy, make sure that you have the necessary proxy information, including the IP address, port number, and a user name and password for authentication. 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 409) 2 Click [Settings/Registration].  3 Click [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].  4 Click [Edit] in [Proxy Settings]. 

5 Cochez la case [Utiliser un proxy] et spécifiez les paramètres requis.


[Utiliser un proxy]

Select the check box to use the specified proxy server when communicating with an HTTP server.

[Adresse du serveur proxy HTTP]

Enter the address of the proxy server. Specify the IP address or host name depending on the environment.

[Numéro de port du serveur proxy HTTP]

Change the port number as necessary. Enter a number between 1 and 65535.

[Utiliser un proxy dans le même domaine]

Select the check box to use a proxy server specified in the same domain.

[Utiliser l'authentification proxy]

To enable authentication by the proxy server, select the check box and enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the user name in the [UserID] text box.

[Définir/Changer le mot de passe]

To set or change the password for the proxy authentication, when it is enabled, select the check box and enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the new password in the [Password] text box.

6 Cliquez sur [OK].

Restriction des fonctions de la machine

36WC-07W Some of the functions of the machine may rarely be used or provide opportunities for misuse. For security purposes, the machine can be set to limit its capabilities by partially or completely disabling these functions.

Restriction de l'accès au carnet d'adresses et aux fonctions d'envoi

 Restricting Access to Address Book and Sending Functions (P. 372)

Restriction de l'impression depuis un ordinateur

You can limit "printing from computer" only to secure documents so that no print jobs can be executed unless the PIN is entered on the machine side. Restricting Printing from a Computer(P. 380) 

Restriction des fonctions USB

 Restricting USB Functions(P. 381)

Désactivation de la communication HTTP et de la gestion à distance

 Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 382) Disabling Remote UI(P. 383)

Restriction de l'accès au carnet d'adresses et aux fonctions d'envoi

36WC-07X Some cases of information leakage can be prevented by limiting the available fax and e-mail destinations to those registered in the Address Book or LDAP servers, or by setting a PIN for the Address Book so that unauthorized users cannot add or edit Address Book entries. You can also avoid sending documents to unintended recipients if the machine is set to ask you to enter the fax number twice for confirmation. 

NOTE

For imageRUNNER 2206N, this function can only be used when the optional Color Send Kit is attached.

Définition d'un code PIN pour le répertoire

36WC-07Y  The Address Book can be set to require users to enter a PIN in order to add new entries to the Address Book or edit existing entries. Setting a PIN to the Address Book can reduce the risk of documents being sent to unintended recipients because changes to the Address Book can only be made by users who know the PIN.

1 Appuyez sur à l'écran.

2 Appuyez sur .

- If a screen for entering a System Manager ID and PIN is displayed, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, tap , and press . Setting the System Manager ID(P. 343)

3 Sélectionnez .

4 Définissez le code PIN pour modifier le répertoire.

- Enter a number of up to seven digits using numeric keys, and tap . - When < PIN(Confirm)> is displayed, enter the PIN once again to confirm. 

REMARQUE :

- You cannot set a PIN that consists only of zeros, such as "00" or "0000000". To disable the PIN, press c to erase the PIN (leave the text box blank), and tap Apply>.

REMARQUE

In addition to setting the Address Book PIN, you can further enhance security by performing the following operations: - Restricting the addition of new destinations Limiting Available Destinations(P. 374) - Disabling the PC fax function Ω^> Prohibiting PC Faxing (imageRUNNER 2206iF)(P. 375)

LIENS

Limitation des destinations disponibles

36WC-080  By limiting fax numbers and e-mail addresses that can be specified when sending documents to those already registered in the Address Book, those previously used, or those searchable from the LDAP servers, you can reduce the possibility of specifying incorrect destinations and prevent users from leaking information. When this function is enabled, the machine prohibits users from entering destinations using the numeric keys, adding new entries to the Address Book, and editing the existing Address Book entries.

1 Appuyez sur à l'écran.

2 Appuyez sur .

- If a screen for entering a System Manager ID and PIN is displayed, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, tap , and press ID. Setting the System Manager ID(P. 343)

3 Sélectionnez Restreindre les nouvelles destinations>.

4 Appuyez sur .


a

Cancels the restriction on new destinations. Fax numbers and e-mail addresses can be specified by using any method.

Restricts input so that the only addresses that can be specified are those registered in the Address Book, those previously used, or those that can be found on the LDAP server.

IMPORTANT

This function does not limit the available destinations for PC faxing. Prohibiting PC Faxing (imageRUNNER 2206iF)(P. 375)

LIENS

Setting a PIN for Address Book (P. 373) Disabling Use of Previously Used Destinations (P. 376) Prohibiting Sequential Broadcasting (imageRUNNER 2206iF)(P. 379)

Interdiction de la télécopie depuis un ordinateur (imageRUNNER 2206iF)

36WC-081 You can prohibit users from PC faxing (faxing from a computer).  1 Tap in the screen. 2 Tap . 3 Select ▶ . - If a screen for entering a System Manager ID and PIN is displayed, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, tap , and press ID. Setting the System Manager ID(P. 343) 4 Tap .  a Disables PC faxing. b Enables PC faxing.

LIENS

Sending Faxes from Your Computer (PC Fax)(P. 151) Setting a PIN for Address Book (P. 373) Limiting Available Destinations(P. 374)

Désactivation de l'utilisation des destinations précédemment utilisées

36WC-082 Prohibits the specification of destinations from the transmission records. Using this restriction prevents destinations being selected from the transmission records for "Send Fax", "Scan and Send as E-Mail" and "Scan and Save to Shared Folder".

REMARQUE

- For imageRUNNER 2206N, these functions can only be used when the optional Color Send Kit is attached. 1 Tap in the screen. 2 Tap . - If a screen for entering a System Manager ID and PIN is displayed, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, tap , and press . Setting the System Manager ID(P. 343) 3 Select . 4 Tap .  a Enables use of previously used destinations. b Disables use of previously used destinations.

LIENS

Limiting Available Destinations(P. 374) Prohibiting Sequential Broadcasting (imageRUNNER 2206iF)(P. 379) Specifying Previously Used Destinations(P. 118)

Vérification des destinations avant l'envoi de documents (imageRUNNER 2206iF)

36WC-083 By entering the fax number twice, you can reduce the risk of faxing to the wrong number due to input mistakes. Use features described in this section if you send confidential documents. Displaying the Screen for Confirming the Fax Number(P. 377) Displaying Destinations in Address Book(P. 377)

Affichage de l'écran de confirmation du numéro de fax

You can set the machine to ask users to enter the fax number twice when it is entered by using the numeric keys. This way, you can reduce the risk of faxing to the wrong number due to input mistakes. 1 Tap in the screen. 2 Tap . 3 Select Confirm Entered Fax Number>. - If a screen for entering a System Manager ID and PIN is displayed, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, tap , and press . Setting the System Manager ID(P. 343) 4 Tap .  a Does not display the screen for confirming the fax number. Displays the screen for confirming the fax number.

Affichage des destinations dans le répertoire

When using One-Touch buttons or coded dial numbers to specify destinations, you need to remember whose destination (or what group) is registered in what coded dial number. If you do not remember all these numbers perfectly, you may send your documents to unintended destinations. You can avoid sending data to unintended recipients by configuring the machine to display the details of the One-Touch button or coded dial number you selected/entered as a sending destination before you send documents to that destination. 1 Tap in the screen. 2 Tap . - If a screen for entering a System Manager ID and PIN is displayed, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, tap , and press ID. Setting the System Manager ID(P. 343) 3 Select Confirm One-Touch/Coded Dial TX>. 4 Tap .  a Does not display the details of the selected/entered One-Touch button or coded dial number. Displays the details of the selected/entered One-Touch button or coded dial number.

LIENS

Registering in the Address Book(P. 49) Specifying from Address Book(P. 110) Registering Address Book from Remote UI(P. 426)

Interdiction de la diffusion séquentielle (imageRUNNER 2206iF)

36WC-084 Sequential broadcasting is a feature that sends faxes to multiple recipients in succession. This feature can be disabled if preferred. 1 Tap in the screen. 2 Tap . 3 Select . - If a screen for entering a System Manager ID and PIN is displayed, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, tap , and press . Setting the System Manager ID(P. 343) 4 Select or .  a Enables sequential broadcasting. Displays the confirmation screen when sending a fax via sequential broadcasting. Disables sequential broadcasting.

LIENS

Limiting Available Destinations(P. 374) Disabling Use of Previously Used Destinations (P. 376) Sending Faxes to Multiple Destinations Simultaneously (Sequential Broadcast)(P. 135)

Restriction de l'impression depuis un ordinateur

36WC-0EK You can drastically reduce information leakage risks by limiting the documents printable from a computer to the Secure-Print documents ( Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print)(P. 163).   You can disable the USB port located on the right side of the machine. If this port is disabled, the machine cannot communicate with a computer via USB. 1 Tap in the screen. 2 Tap . - If a screen for entering a System Manager ID and PIN is displayed, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, tap , and press ID. Setting the System Manager ID(P. 343) 3 Select . 4 Select.  a Disables the USB port located on the back side of the machine. Enables the USB port located on the back side of the machine. 5 Restart the machine. - Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.

Désactivation de la communication HTTP

36WC-086 HTTP is used for communications over the network, such as when you access the machine via the Remote UI. If you are using a USB connection or are otherwise not using HTTP, you can disable HTTP to block malicious third-party intrusions via the unused HTTP port.

IMPORTANT

Disabling HTTP disables some of the network capabilities, such as the Remote UI, WSD printing, and printing with Google Cloud Print. 1 Tap in the screen. 2 Tap . - If a screen for entering a System Manager ID and PIN is displayed, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, tap , and press ID. Setting the System Manager ID(P. 343) 3 Select . 4 Tap .  a Disables HTTP communication. b Enables HTTP communication.

LIENS

Using Remote UI(P. 408) Changing Port Numbers(P. 367) Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 287)

Désactivation de l'interface utilisateur distante

36WC-087 The Remote UI is useful because the machine settings can be specified by using a Web browser on a computer. To use the Remote UI, the machine must be connected to a computer over the network. If you do not need to use the Remote UI, you might want to disable the Remote UI to reduce the risk of having your machine controlled remotely over the network by malicious third parties.  1 Tap in the screen. 2 Tap . - If a screen for entering a System Manager ID and PIN is displayed, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, tap , and press ID. Setting the System Manager ID(P. 343) 3 Tap . 4 Tap .  a Disables the Remote UI. Enables the Remote UI.

LIENS

Using Remote UI(P. 408) Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 382)

Implémentation de fonctions de sécurité robustes

36WC-088 Authorized users may incur unanticipated losses from attacks by malicious third parties, such as sniffing, spoofing, and tampering of data as it flows over a network. To protect your important and valuable information from these attacks, the machine supports the following features to enhance security and secrecy.

Communication chiffrée TLS

TLS is a protocol for encryption for data sent over a network and is often used for communication via a Web browser or an e-mail application. TLS enables secure network communication when you access the machine from a computer via the Remote UI. Enabling TLS Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI(P. 385) 

Authentification IEEE 802.1X

IEEE 802.1X is a standard and mechanism for blocking unauthorized access to the network by collectively managing user authentication information. If a device tries to connect to the 802.1X network, the device must go through user authentication in order to prove that the connection is made by an authorized user. Authentication information is sent to and checked by a RADIUS server, which permits or rejects communication to the network depending on the authentication result. If authentication fails, a LAN switch (or an access point) blocks access from the outside of the network. The machine can connect to an 802.1X network as a client device. Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication(P. 389) 

Activation de la communication chiffrée TLS pour l'interface utilisateur distante

36WC-089 You can encrypt communication between the machine and a Web browser on the computer by using Transport Layer Security (TLS). TLS is a mechanism for encrypting data sent or received over the network. TLS must be enabled when the Remote UI is used for specifying settings for IEEE 802.1X authentication (TTLS/PEAP) or SNMPv3. To use TLS for the Remote UI, you need to set a key pair and enable the TLS function. Generate or install the key pair for TLS before enabling TLS ( Configuring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certificates(P. 394)).  1 Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 409) 2 Click [Settings/Registration].  3 Click [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings]. 

4 Cliquez sur [Clé et certificat] dans [Paramètres TLS].


5 Cliquez sur [Enregistrer le certificat par défaut] à droite de la paire de clés que vous souhaitez utiliser.


REMARQUE :

Viewing details of a certificate - You can check the details of the certificate or verify the certificate by clicking the corresponding text link under [Key Name], or the certificate icon. Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certificates(P. 405)

6 Activez TLS pour l'interface utilisateur distante.

1 Click [Security Settings] [Remote UI Settings]. 

2 Cliquez sur [Modifier].


3 Cochez la case [Utiliser TLS] et cliquez sur [OK].


REMARQUE :

Utilisation du panneau de configuration

- You can also enable or disable TLS encrypted communication from in the screen. Use TLS(P. 494)

Démarrage de l'interface utilisateur distante avec TLS

- If you try to start the Remote UI when TLS is enabled, a security alert may be displayed regarding the security certificate. In this case, check that the correct URL is entered in the address field, and then proceed to display the Remote UI screen. Starting Remote UI(P. 409)

Activation de TLS pour l'envoi d'e-mails

- If the SMTP server and the POP3 server support TLS, you can enable TLS for communication with these servers ( Configuring E-Mail Communication Settings(P. 302)). For more information about the SMTP server and the POP3 server, contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator. Generating Key Pairs(P. 395) Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certificates(P. 402) Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication(P. 389) Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 332)

Configuration de l'authentification IEEE 802.1X

36WC-08A The machine can connect to an 802.1X network as a client device. A typical 802.1X network consists of a RADIUS server (authentication server), LAN switch (authenticator), and client devices with authentication software (suppliers). If a device tries to connect to the 802.1X network, the device must go through user authentication in order to prove that the connection is made by an authorized user. Authentication information is sent to and checked by a RADIUS server, which permits or rejects communication to the network depending on the authentication result. If authentication fails, a LAN switch (or an access point) blocks access from the outside of the network.  Select the authentication method from the options below. If necessary, install or register a key pair or CA certificate before configuring IEEE 802.1X authentication ( Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certificates(P. 402)).

TLS

The machine and the authentication server authenticate each other by mutually verifying their certificates. A key pair issued by a certification authority (CA) is required for the client authentication (when authenticating the machine). For the server authentication, a CA certificate installed via the Remote UI can be used in addition to a CA certificate preinstalled in the machine.

TLS

This authentication method uses a user name and password for the client authentication and a CA certificate for the server authentication. MSCHAPv2 or PAP can be selected as the internal protocol. TTLS can be used with PEAP at the same time. Enable TLS for the Remote UI before configuring this authentication method ( Enabling TLS Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI(P. 385)).

PEAP

The required settings are almost the same as those of TTLS. MS-CHAPv2 is used as the internal protocol. Enable TLS for the Remote UI before configuring this authentication method ( Enabling TLS Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI(P. 385)). 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 409) 2 Click [Settings/Registration]. 

3 Cliquez sur [Paramètres réseau] [Paramètres IEEE 802.1X].


4 Cliquez sur [Modifier].


5 Cochez la case [Utiliser IEEE 802.1X], saisissez le nom d'utilisateur dans le champ [Nom d'utilisateur], puis spécifiez les paramètres requis.

 [Use IEEE 802.1X] Select the check box to enable IEEE 802.1X authentication.

[Nom d'utilisateur]

Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for a name (EAP identity) that is used for identifying the user.

Configuration de TLS

1 Select the [Use TLS] check box and click [Key and Certificate]. 2 Click [Register Default Key] on the right of the key pair you want to use for the client authentication. 

REMARQUE :

Viewing details of a key pair or certificate - You can check the details of the certificate or verify the certificate by clicking the corresponding text link under [Key Name], or the certificate icon. Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certificates(P. 405)

Configuration de TTLS/PEAP

1 Select the [Use TTLS] or [Use PEAP] check box. 

REMARQUE :

Internal protocol for TTLS - You can select MSCHAPv2 or PAP. If you want to use PAP, click the [PAP] radio button.  2 Click [Change User Name/Password]. - To specify a user name other than the login name, clear the [Use Login Name as User Name] check box. Select the check box if you want to use the login name as the user name.  3 Set the user name/password and click [OK]. 

[Identifiant utilisateur]

Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the user name.

[Changer le mot de passe]

To set or change the password, select the check box and enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the new password both in the [Password] and [Confirm] text boxes.

6 Cliquez sur [OK].


7 Redémarrez la machine.

- Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.

REMARQUE

Utilisation du panneau de commande

- You can also enable or disable IEEE 802.1X authentication from in the screen. IEEE 802.1X Settings(P. 442)

LIENS

Configuring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certificates(P. 394)

Configuration des paramètres pour les paires de clés et les certificats numériques

36WC-08C In order to encrypt communication with a remote device, an encryption key must be sent and received over an unsecured network beforehand. This problem is solved by public-key cryptography. Public-key cryptography ensures secure communication by protecting important and valuable information from attacks, such as sniffing, spoofing, and tampering of data as it flows over a network.

Paire de clés

 A key pair consists of a public key and a secret key, both of which are required for encrypting or decrypting data. Because data that has been encrypted with one of the key pair cannot be returned to its original data form without the other, public-key cryptography ensures secure communication of data over the network. A key pair is used for TLS encrypted communication or TLS of the IEEE 802.1X authentication. Up to five key pairs (including the preinstalled pairs) can be generated to the machine ( Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certificates(P. 402). A key pair can be generated with the machine ( O Generating Key Pairs(P. 395)).

Certificat CA

 Digital certificates including CA certificates are similar to other forms of identification, such as driver's licenses. A digital certificate contains a digital signature, which enables the machine to detect any spoofing or tampering of data. It is extremely difficult for third parties to abuse digital certificates. A digital certificate that contains a public key of a certification authority (CA) is referred to as a CA certificate. CA certificates are used for verifying the device the machine is communicating with for features such as printing with Google Cloud Print or IEEE 802.1X authentication. Up to 72 CA certificates can be registered, including the 67 certificates that are preinstalled in the machine ( Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certificates(P. 402)).

Génération de paires de clés

36WC-08E A key pair can be generated with the machine when it is required for encrypted communication via Transport Layer Security (TLS). You can use TLS when accessing the machine via the Remote UI. Up to five key pairs (including the preinstalled pairs) can be generated to the machine. Self-signed certificates are used with key pairs generated in "Network Communication". With a "Key and Certificate Signing Request (CSR)", you can apply for a CA-issued digital certificate for the key pair generated by the machine. Generate Network Communication Key(P. 395) Generate Key and Certificate Signing Request (CSR)(P. 397)

Générer une clé de communication réseau

1 Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 409) 2 Click [Settings/Registration].  3 Click [Security Settings] [Key and Certificate Settings]. 

4 Cliquez sur [Générer la clé].


REMARQUE :

Suppression d'une paire de clés enregistrée

- Click [Delete] on the right of the key pair you want to delete click [OK]. - A key pair cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "[TLS]" or "[IEEE 802.1X]" is displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the key pair before deleting it.

5 Sélectionnez [Communication réseau] et cliquez sur [OK].


6 Spécifiez les paramètres de la clé et du certificat.

  [Key Settings] [Key Name] Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for naming the key pair. Set a name that will be easy for you to find later in a list.

[Algorithme de signature]

Select the signature algorithm from the drop-down list.

[Algorithme de clé]

RSA is used for generating a key pair. Select the key length from the drop-down list. The larger the number for the key length, the slower the communication. However, the security is tighter.

REMARQUE :

- [512-bit] cannot be selected for the key length, if [SHA384] or [SHA512] is selected for [Signature Algorithm].

[Paramètres du certificat]

[Date de début de validité (AAAA/MM/JJ)]

Enter the validity start date of the certificate in the range between 01/01/2000 and 31/12/2099, in the order of: year, month, day.

[Date de fin de validité (AAAA/MM/JJ)]

Enter the validity end date of the certificate in the range between 01/01/2000 and 31/12/2099, in the order of: year, month, day. A date earlier than [Validity Start Date (YYYY/MM/DD)] cannot be set.

[Pays/Région]

Click the [Select Country/Region] radio button and select the country/region from the drop-down list. You can also click the [Enter Internet Country Code] radio button and enter a country code, such as "US" for the United States.

[État]/[Ville]

Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the location as necessary.

[Organisation]/[Unité d'organisation]

Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the organization name as necessary.

[Nom commun]

Enter up to 48 alphanumeric characters for the common name of the certificate as necessary. "Common Name" is often abbreviated as "CN."

7 Cliquez sur [OK].

- Keys for network communication may take approximately 10 to 15 minutes to generate. - After a key pair is generated, it is automatically registered to the machine.

Générer une clé et une demande de signature de certificat (CSR)

1 Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 409) 2 Click [Settings/Registration]. 

3 Cliquez sur [Paramètres de sécurité] ▸ [Paramètres de clé et de certificat].


4 Cliquez sur [Générer la clé].


REMARQUE :

Suppression d'une paire de clés enregistrée

- Click [Delete] on the right of the key pair you want to delete click [OK]. - A key pair cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "[TLS]" or "[IEEE 802.1X]" is displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the key pair before deleting it.

5 Sélectionnez [Clé et demande de signature de certificat (CSR)] et cliquez sur [OK].


6 Spécifiez les paramètres de la clé et du certificat.


Paramètres de la clé]

[Nom de la clé]

Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for naming the key pair. Set a name that will be easy for you to find later in a list.

[Algorithme de signature]

Select the signature algorithm from the drop-down list.

[Algorithme de clé]

RSA is used for generating a key pair. Select the key length from the drop-down list. The larger the number for the key length, the slower the communication. However, the security is tighter.

REMARQUE :

- [512-bit] cannot be selected for the key length, if [SHA384] or [SHA512] is selected for [Signature Algorithm].

[Paramètres de la demande de signature de certificat (CSR)]

[Pays/Région]

Click the [Select Country/Region] radio button and select the country/region from the drop-down list. You can also click the [Enter Internet Country Code] radio button and enter a country code, such as "US" for the United States.

[État]/[Ville]

Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the location as necessary.

[Organisation]/[Unité d'organisation]

Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the organization name as necessary.

[Nom commun]

Enter up to 48 alphanumeric characters for the common name of the certificate as necessary. "Common Name" is often abbreviated as "CN."

7 Cliquez sur [OK].

Key and Certificate Signing Request (CSR) may take approximately 10 to 15 minutes to generate.

8 Cliquez sur [Enregistrer dans un fichier].

A dialog box for storing the file appears. Choose where to store the file and click [Save].  The Key and Certificate Signing Request (CSR) file is stored on the computer.

9 Joignez le fichier enregistré et soumettez la demande à l'autorité de certification.

Enregistrement du certificat numérique délivré par l'AC

You cannot use the key pair generated by the Certificate Signing Request (CSR) until the certificate is registered. Once the certification authority has issued the digital certificate, register it using the procedure below. 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in Administrator mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 409) 2 Click [Settings/Registration]. 3 Click [Security Settings] [Key and Certificate Settings]. 4 Click [Key Name] or [Certificate] for the certificate to be registered. 

5 Cliquez sur [Enregistrer le certificat].


6 Cliquez sur [Parcourir], spécifiez le fichier pour la demande de signature de certificat, puis cliquez sur [Enregistrer].


LIENS

Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certificates(P. 402) Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certificates(P. 405) Enabling TLS Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI(P. 385)

Utilisation des paires de clés et des certificats numériques délivrés par l'AC

36WC-08F Key pairs and digital certificates can be obtained from a certification authority (CA) for use with the machine. You can store and then register these files by using the Remote UI. Make sure that the key pair and the certificate satisfy the requirements of the machine ( Management Functions(P. 636)). Up to five key pairs (including the preinstalled key pairs) and up to 72 CA certificates (including the 67 preinstalled certificates) can be registered.  1 Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 409) 2 Click [Settings/Registration].  3 Click [Security Settings] [Key and Certificate Settings] or [CA Certificate Settings]. - Click [Key and Certificate Settings] to install a key pair, or [CA Certificate Settings] to install a CA certificate. 

4 Cliquez sur [Enregistrer la clé et le certificat] ou [Enregistrer le certificat d'AC].


REMARQUE :

Suppression d'une paire de clés ou d'un certificat d'AC enregistré

- Click [Delete] on the right of the key pair or CA certificate you want to delete click [OK]. You cannot delete the preinstalled CA certificates. - A key pair cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "[TLS]" or "[IEEE 802.1X]" is displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the key pair before deleting it. The preinstalled CA certificate cannot be deleted.

Désactivation ou activation des certificats d'AC préinstallés

- Click [Disable] on the right of the preinstalled CA certificate you want to disable. To enable the certificate again, click [Enable] on the right of the certificate.

5 Cliquez sur [Installer].


REMARQUE :

Deleting a key pair or CA certificate file - Click [Delete] on the right of the file you want to delete click [OK].

6 Cliquez sur [Parcourir], spécifiez le fichier à installer, puis cliquez sur [Démarrer l'installation].

 The key pair or CA certificate is installed in the machine.

7 Enregistrez la paire de clés ou le certificat CA.

Enregistrement d'une paire de clés

1 Click [Register] on the right of the key pair you want to register. 2 Enter the name of the key pair and password, and then click [OK]. 

[Nom de la clé]

Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the name of the key pair to be registered.

[Mot de passe]

Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the password of the private key set for the file to be registered.

Enregistrement d'un certificat CA

Click [Register] on the right of the CA certificate you want to register. 

LIENS

Generating Key Pairs(P. 395) Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certificates(P. 405) Enabling TLS Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI(P. 385) Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication(P. 389)

Vérification des paires de clés et des certificats numériques

36WC-08H Once key pairs and CA certificates are registered, you can view their detailed information or verify them for validity and signature. 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 409) 2 Click [Settings/Registration].  3 Click [Security Settings] [Key and Certificate Settings] or [CA Certificate Settings]. - Click [Key and Certificate Settings] to verify a key pair, or [CA Certificate Settings] to verify a CA certificate.  4 Click the icon for the key pair or certificate that you want to verify.  Certificate details can be viewed on this screen.

5 Vérifiez les détails du certificat, puis cliquez sur [Vérifier le certificat].

 The result from verifying the certificate is displayed as shown below. 

LIENS

Generating Key Pairs(P. 395) Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certificates(P. 402)

Utilisation de Remote UI

Utilisation de Remote UI 408

Starting Remote UI 409 Remote UI Screens 411 Managing Documents and Checking the Machine Status 415 Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI 420 Saving/Loading Address Book from Remote UI 422 Registering Address Book from Remote UI 426

Utilisation de Remote UI

36WC-08K Using a Web browser to operate the machine remotely, you can check the documents waiting to be printed or the status of the machine. You can also make some settings such as registering the Address Book. You can do this without leaving your desk, making system management easier. For more information about the system requirements for the Remote UI, see System Environment(P. 637).  Functions of the Remote UI Managing Documents and Checking the Machine Status(P. 415) Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 420) Saving/Loading Address Book from Remote UI(P. 422) Registering Address Book from Remote UI(P. 426) Basics of the Remote UI Starting Remote UI(P. 409) Remote UI Screens(P. 411) To operate remotely, you need to input the IP address of the machine into a Web browser and start the Remote UI. Check the IP address set to the machine in advance ( Viewing Network Settings(P. 282)). If you have any questions, ask your Network Administrator.

1 Démarrez le navigateur Web.

2 Saisissez "http://(adresse IP de la machine)/" dans le champ d'adresse, puis appuyez sur la touche [ENTRÉE].

 - If you want to use an IPv6 address, enclose the IPv6 address with brackets (example: http://[fe80::2e9e:fcff:fe4e:dbce]//).

REMARQUE :

If a security alert is displayed A security alert may be displayed when the Remote UI communication is encrypted ( Enabling TLS Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI(P. 385)). When certificate settings or TLS settings have no errors, continue browsing the website.

3 Connectez-vous à l'interface utilisateur distante.

■Lorsque la gestion des codes de service est désactivée

Select [System Manager Mode] or [General User Mode]. 

Mode gestionnaire système

You can perform all the Remote UI operations and configure all the settings. Enter the appropriate ID in [System Manager ID] and PIN in [System Manager PIN] (Setting the System Manager ID(P. 343)).

[Mode utilisateur général]

You can check the status of documents or the machine, and you can also change some of the settings. If you wish to delete your print documents, enter the user name of the documents in [UserID]. The user name is automatically set to print documents based on information such as your computer name or computer logon name.

Code PIN d'accès à l'interface utilisateur distante

If [Remote UI Access PIN] is set, enter the PIN. ( Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 352) )

■Lorsque la gestion des codes de service est activée

Enter the appropriate ID in [Department ID] and PIN in [PIN] ( 心 Setting the Department ID Management(P. 345) )

4 Cliquez sur [Connexion].

- Portal Page (main page) will be displayed. Remote UI Screens(P. 411)  This section describes the typical screens of the Remote UI. Portal Page (Main Page)(P. 411) [Status Monitor/Cancel] Page(P. 412) [Settings/Registration] Page(P. 413) [Address Book] Page (P. 414)

Page du portail (page principale)


1 [Déconnexion]

Logs off from the Remote UI. The Login page will be displayed.

[Envoyer un e-mail au gestionnaire système]

Displays a window for creating an e-mail to the system manager specified in [System Manager Information] under [System Management].

Icône d'actualisation

Refreshes the currently displayed page.

4 [Informations de base sur l'appareil]

Displays the current status of the machine and error information. If an error has occurred, the link to the Error Information page will be displayed.

5 [Informations sur les consommables]

Displays paper information and the remaining amount of toner. Click [Check Consumables Details] to display the screen for checking consumables. Checking Consumables(P. 417)

[Lien d'assistance]

Displays the support link specified in [Device Information] under [System Management].

[Surveillance de l'état/Annulation]

Displays the [Status Monitor/Cancel] page. For any of the waiting documents, you can check the status/ history or cancel the processing.

8 [Settings/Registration]

Displays [Settings/Registration] page. When you have logged on in System Manager Mode, you can change the settings items and save/load the registered data. Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 420)

9 [Address Book]*

Displays the coded dial numbers list registered in the Address Book. You can also register or edit the Address Book when you have logged on in System Manager Mode. * Optional for imageRUNNER 2206N Registering Address Book from Remote UI(P. 426)

[Status Monitor/Cancel] Page


1 [To Portal]

Returns to Portal Page (main page).

2 Menu

Click an item, and the content is displayed in the right page. Managing Documents and Checking the Machine Status(P. 415)

3 Breadcrumb Trail

Indicates the series of pages you opened to display the currently displayed page. You can check what page is currently displayed.

4 Refresh Icon

Refreshes the currently displayed page.

5 Top Icon

Moves the scroll box up to the top of the page when the page is scrolled down.

[Settings/Registration] Page


1 [To Portal]

Returns to Portal Page (main page).

2 Menu

Click an item, the content is displayed in the right page. Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 420)

3 Breadcrumb Trail

Indicates the series of pages you opened to display the currently displayed page. You can check what page is currently displayed.

4 Top Icon

Moves the scroll box up to the top of the page when the page is scrolled down.

5 [Edit]

Allows you to register or change machine settings. © Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 420)

NOTE

Paramètres de gestion du système

- You can only set [System Management Settings] when you have logged on in System Manager Mode. - When you have logged on in General User Mode, only [System Management] will be displayed.

Page [Carnet d'adresses]


1 [Vers le portail]

Displays Portal Page (main page).

[Touche unique]

Displays the list of the One-Touch. Registering in the Address Book(P. 49)

3 [Numérotation abrégée]

Displays the list of the coded dial numbers. Registering in the Address Book(P. 49)

4 Fil d'Ariane

Indicates the series of pages you opened to display the currently displayed page. You can check what page is currently displayed.

5 Numéro de liste

Specifies the range of coded dial numbers displayed on the page.

6 Icône supérieure

Moves the scroll box up to the top of the page when the page is scrolled down.

REMARQUE

- For imageRUNNER 2206N, this function can only be used when the optional Color Send Kit is attached. - You can register or edit the Address Book when you have logged on in System Manager Mode.

Gestion des documents et vérification de l'état de la machine

36WC-08S Checking Current Status of Print Documents(P. 415) Checking History of Documents(P. 416) Checking Error Information(P. 416) Checking Consumables(P. 417) Checking Device Specifications(P. 417) Checking System Manager Information(P. 418) Checking Print Total Counter(P. 418)

REMARQUE

A file name of a document may not be displayed in full. The printed application name may be added to the file name.

Vérification de l'état actuel des documents d'impression

The list of the documents currently printing or waiting to be printed is displayed.  Log on to the Remote UI ( O Starting Remote UI(P. 409)) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Job Status]  You can delete a document job by clicking [Cancel].

REMARQUE

- If you logged on in System Manager Mode, all the print documents currently printing and waiting to be printed will be listed. - If you entered your user name when you logged on in General User Mode, your user name will only be displayed on the documents that you printed. - Click [Job Number] on the paused documents to display detailed information. You can check the user name and the page count of the printed document.

Vérification de l'historique des documents

The history of print, copy, sending faxes/e-mails (TX), or receiving faxes (RX) is displayed.  Log on to the Remote UI ( 出 Starting Remote UI(P. 409)) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Job Log] 

REMARQUE

Fax function is available only for imageRUNNER 2206iF. - For imageRUNNER 2206N, sending e-mails can only be used when the optional Color Send Kit is attached.

Vérification des informations d'erreur

When an error occurs, this page will be displayed by clicking the message displayed under [Error Information] on Portal Page (main page). Portal Page (Main Page)(P. 411)  Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P.409)▶[Status Monitor/Cancel]▶[Error Information] 

Vérification des consommables

Paper size and type for the paper source, serial number for the toner cartridge, and other information is displayed. You can also click [Check Consumables Details] in Portal Page (main page) to display the screen for checking consumables.  Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 409)) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Consumables] 

Vérification des spécifications de l'appareil

The maximum print speed and machine features are displayed.  Log on to the Remote UI ( 出 Starting Remote UI(P. 409) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Device Features] 

Vérification des informations du gestionnaire système

Information about the machine and the system manager is displayed. This information is set in [System Management] on the [Settings/Registration] page.  Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 409) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Device Information] 

Vérification du compteur total d'impressions

The total number of pages that have been printed by the copy, print, and fax functions is displayed.  Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 409) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Check Counter] 

REMARQUE

Fax function is available only for imageRUNNER 2206iF. Remote UI Screens(P. 411)

Configuration des options de menu à partir de l'interface utilisateur distante

36WC-08U You can change the various machine settings by using the Remote UI. Most of the settings can be set also on the machine, but some settings can only be set using the Remote UI.

REMARQUE

Some settings require you to first log on in System Manager Mode before you can change them.

1 Démarrez l'interface utilisateur distante. Démarrage de l'interface utilisateur distante (P. 409)

2 Cliquez sur [Paramètres/Enregistrement].


3 Cliquez sur l'élément de menu que vous souhaitez configurer.

 For more information about the settings menu, see each item below

Menu items	Referents
Preferences
Paper Settings	Specifys Paper Size and Type(P. 45)
Sound Volume Control/Display Settings	Preferences(P. 443)
Timer Settings	Timer Settings(P. 449)
Function Settings
Common Settings	Common Settings (P. 454)
Copy Settings	Copy Settings(P. 458)
Fax Settings	Fax Settings (imageRUNNER 2206iF)(P. 461)
Scan Settings	Scan Settings(P. 473)
Printer Settings	Printer Settings(P. 477)
Output Report Settings	Printing Reports and Lists(P. 585)
System Management Settings
System Management	System Management Settings(P. 492)
Department ID Management	Setting the Department ID Management(P. 345)
Network Settings	Network(P. 253)
Security Settings	Security(P. 338)
Import/Export	Saving/Loading Address Book from Remote UI(P. 422)
Initialize Setting Information	Initialize Menu(P. 499)

LIENS

Remote UI Screens(P. 411)

Enregistrement/chargement du carnet d'adresses à partir de l'interface utilisateur distante

36WC-08W Address Book data in the machine can be saved in your computer (export). Data that is saved on your computer can also be registered in the machine (import). You can easily copy the destinations in the Address Book to multiple machines. * To use these features, it is required that you have logged on in System Manager Mode. * Depending on the model, you cannot import the Address Book that exported from the machine. Exporting Address Book Data(P. 422) Loading Address Book Data(P. 423)

IMPORTANT

Do not turn OFF the machine until the import or export process is complete It may take a few minutes to complete the process. If the machine is turned OFF during the process, it may result in damage to data or the machine. Do not operate the machine during the export/import process Before exporting/importing, check that no operation such as printing documents is currently processing.

REMARQUE

For imageRUNNER 2206N, this function can only be used when the optional Color Send Kit is attached.

Exportation des données du carnet d'adresses

1 Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 409) 2 Click [Settings/Registration].  3 Click [Import/Export] [Export].  - If the screen prompting you to enter the Address Book PIN is displayed, enter the [PIN] and click [OK]. Setting a PIN for Address Book (P. 373)

4 Cliquez sur [Démarrer l'exportation].


5 Suivez les instructions à l'écran pour spécifier l'emplacement où le carnet d'adresses exporté sera enregistré.

The Address Book will be saved.

IMPORTANT

N'effectuez aucune opération tant que le processus n'est pas terminé.

The screen remains the same during the export process. Do not operate the Remote UI until the message [The (file name) download has completed.] is displayed at the bottom of the screen.

Chargement des données du carnet d'adresses

IMPORTANT

The Address Book data currently registered is overwritten when you load the Address Book data. 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 409)

2 Cliquez sur [Paramètres/Enregistrement].


3 Cliquez sur [Importer/Exporter] [Importer].

 - If the screen prompting you to enter the Address Book PIN is displayed, enter the [PIN] and click [OK]. Setting a PIN for Address Book (P. 373)

4 Spécifiez le fichier du carnet d'adresses à importer, puis cliquez sur [Démarrer l'importation].

To specify the file to be imported, click [Browse] and select the file, or enter the path to the file in [File Path] (the file name with the location where the file is saved). 

5 Cliquez sur [OK].

The specified Address Book data will be imported into the machine.

LIENS

Remote UI Screens(P. 411) Registering Address Book from Remote UI(P. 426) Registering in the Address Book(P. 49) Address Book List(P. 593)

Enregistrement du carnet d'adresses à partir de l'interface utilisateur distante

36WC-08X You can register or edit the Address Book of the machine by using the computer. Specify the shared folder destination here.

REMARQUE

- You can change the settings only when you have logged on in System Manager Mode. - For imageRUNNER 2206N, this function can only be used when the optional Color Send Kit is attached.

1 Démarrez l'interface utilisateur distante. Démarrage de l'interface utilisateur distante (P. 409)

2 Cliquez sur [Carnet d'adresses].


REMARQUE :

If the enter PIN page is displayed The Address Book is protected by a PIN. Enter the [PIN] and click [OK].

3 Cliquez sur [Numérotation par code].

- You can also register destinations in One-Touch. In this case, click [One-Touch] instead of [Coded Dial]. Registering in the Address Book(P. 49) 

4 Cliquez sur le lien texte sous [Numéro], [Type] ou [Nom] pour un élément nommé "Non enregistré".


REMARQUE :

- You can edit a registered item by clicking the corresponding text link under [Number], [Type] or [Name]. - You can delete a registered item by clicking the corresponding [Delete] button.

5 Sélectionnez [Type de destination à enregistrer] et cliquez sur [OK].

To register the shared folder destination, select [File]. 

6 Spécifiez la destination.

Pour enregistrer la destination de télécopie (imageRUNNER 2206iF)


[Nom]

Enter the name of the destination.

[Numéro de télécopie]

Enter the fax number of the destination.

[Transmission ECM]

Select the check box to make the following possible: if an error occurs in an image that is being sent, the error is checked and corrected to prevent an improper image from being sent.

[Vitesse]

If it takes time for transmissions to start, such as when there is a poor telephone connection, you can adjust the transmission start speed downward incrementally starting from [33600 bps].

[Appel longue distance]

Specify [International (1)] to [International (3)] according to the transmission conditions when registering overseas fax numbers.

REMARQUE :

- You can also specify [ECM TX] and [Speed] from (Fax Settings (imageRUNNER 2206iF) (P. 461)) on the control panel. However, settings made from

are enabled for the detailed settings of destinations registered in the Address Book.

Pour enregistrer la destination de messagerie électronique


[Nom]

Enter the name of the destination.

[Adresse e-mail]

Enter the e-mail address of the destination.

Pour enregistrer la destination du dossier partagé


[Nom]

Enter the name for the destination.

[Nom d'hôte]

Enter the computer name or IP address using up to 120 characters. You can include a path to the shared folder with the computer name or IP address (e.g. "\swan\share" or "\192.168.2.100\share").

REMARQUE :

Utilisation d'un serveur DNS

- You can also enter the host name (or FQDN) instead of the computer name or IP address (e.g. for a shared folder: "\swan.organization.company.com\share"). [Folder Path] Enter the location of the folder to which the data will be sent (up to 120 characters). Use "\\" as a separator. Specify the level that follows the path specified in [Host Name]. [UserID] Enter the user name set for the shared folder (up to 32 characters). [Set Password] To set a password for the shared folder, select this check box and enter a [Password] of up to 32 characters.

IMPORTANT

Ensure that the same display language is selected on both the computer and the Remote UI. - [Host Name] and [Folder Path] may not be displayed correctly or may not be referenceable.

7 Cliquez sur [OK].

LIENS

Remote UI Screens(P. 411) Saving/Loading Address Book from Remote UI(P. 422) Address Book List(P. 593)

Liste des menus de réglage

Liste des menus de réglage 431

Network Settings 432 Preferences 443 Timer Settings 449 Common Settings 454 Copy Settings 458 Fax Settings (imageRUNNER 2206iF) 461 Scan Settings 473 Printer Settings 477 Adjustment/Maintenance 487 System Management Settings 492

Liste des menus de réglage

36WC-08Y There are various settings in this machine. You can adjust each of the settings in detail. Access these settings by tapping in the screen.

ASTUCES

You can print the setting menu in list form to check the current settings: User Data List/System Manager Data List(P. 595)  All the settings about the network are listed with short descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger (†).

REMARQUE

Si un écran de saisie de l'ID administrateur système et du code PIN s'affiche

Enter the System Manager ID and PIN, tap , and press ID. Setting the System Manager ID(P. 343)

Astérisques (^*)

Settings marked with " 1 may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or other setting items. Select Wired/Wireless LAN(P. 432) Wireless LAN Settings(P. 432) Direct Connection Settings(P. 434) Easy Connection via PC(P. 435) TCP/IP Settings(P. 435) SNMP Settings(P. 440) Dedicated Port Settings(P. 441) Dedicated Port Authentication Method(P. 441) Waiting Time for Connection at Startup(P. 442) Ethernet Driver Settings(P. 442) IEEE 802.1X Settings(P.442) Initialize Network Settings(P. 442)

Sélectionner LAN filaire/sans fil

When switching the machine from Wireless LAN to Wired LAN, you need to specify the setting. Conversely, when switching the machine from Wired LAN to Wireless LAN, you do not need to specify this setting (You can switch using the following ). Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN (P. 257) Wired LAN† Wireless LAN

Paramètres LAN sans fil

Specify settings for connecting the machine to a wireless LAN. You can also view the current settings or specify the setting for saving power consumption.

Paramètres SSID

Select to configure a wireless connection by specifying information including an SSID or a network key by inputting manually from the control panel.

Sélectionner un point d'accès

Wireless LAN routers that can access the machine are automatically located, so you can select from the list. You must manually enter a network key, such as a WEP key or a PSK. Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 266)

Saisie manuelle

Select to configure a wireless connection by manually entering an SSID. By using this method, you can specify authentication and encryption settings in detail. Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 269)

Paramètres de sécurité

None WEP Open System Select WEP Key: 1/2/3/4 Edit WEP Key Shared Key Select WEP Key: 1/2/3/4 Edit WEP Key WPA/WPA2-PSK† Auto† AES-CCMP

Mode bouton poussoir WPS

Select to automatically configure a wireless connection by using the button on a WPS wireless router. Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 261)

Mode code PIN WPS

Select to configure a wireless connection by entering a PIN code for a WPS wireless router. Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P. 263)

Mode d'économie d'énergie

Select whether or not the machine enters Power Save Mode based on signals emitted from the wireless router. Off† On  Read the displayed message ▶▶Select or

Informations sur le LAN sans fil

Select to view the current wireless LAN settings. Viewing Network Settings(P. 282) MAC Address Wireless LAN Status Latest Error Information Channel SSID Settings Security Settings

Paramètres de connexion directe

Configure settings for Direct Connection. After configuring settings, you can connect to the machine directly and wirelessly from a mobile device even without an access point or wireless LAN router.

Utiliser la connexion directe

Select whether to use Direct Connection. Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 233) Off† On

Délai avant expiration de la connexion directe

Specify the time to automatically disconnect after Direct Connection is established. 0 (Do not terminate session automatically) 1 to 10⁺ to 60 (min.)  Enter the time Apply>

Paramètres du mode point d'accès

Configure the SSID/network key arbitrarily. If you want to connect multiple mobile devices to the machine at the same time, you need to configure both SSID and network key arbitrarily.

Utiliser un SSID personnalisé

Off On SSID (1-20 Characters)

Utiliser une clé réseau personnalisée

Off† On Network Key (10 Char.)  or Enter the SSID/network key Apply

Paramètres d'adresse IP pour la connexion directe

Specify an IP address for using Direct Connection.  Enter the IP address

REMARQUE

- Do not use the same number as the IP addresses for direct connection and for the machine's wired LAN/ wireless LAN connection. If you set the same number, then a direct connection cannot be initiated.

Connexion facile via PC

Start Easy Connection via PC (cableless setup mode). This allows you to use Canon Laser NW Device Setup Utility on your PC to configure network settings.  Start connecting

REMARQUE

- "Canon Laser NW Device Setup Utility" is available on the Canon website (http://www.canon.com/).

Paramètres TCP/IP

Specify settings for using the machine in a TCP/IP network, such as IP address settings.

Paramètres IPv4

Specify settings for using the machine in an IPv4 network.

Paramètres d'adresse IP

Configure the IP address, which is used for identifying devices, such as computers and printers, on a TCP/IP network. Setting IPv4 Address(P. 275)

Acquisition automatique

Select Protocol Off DHCP+ BOOTP RARP Auto IP Off On

Acquisition manuelle

IP Address: 0.0.0.0 Subnet Mask: 0.0.0.0 Gateway Address: 0.0.0.0

Vérifier les paramètres

Auto Acquire*1 IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address

Commande PING

Select to check that the machine is connected to a computer over a network. Testing the Network Connection(P. 277)

Paramètres DNS

Specify settings for Domain Name System (DNS), which provides a host name for IP address resolutions. Configuring DNS(P. 316)

Paramètres du serveur DNS

Primary DNS Server: 0.0.0.0 Secondary DNS Server: 0.0.0.0

Paramètres du nom d'hôte DNS / nom de domaine

Host Name Domain Name

Paramètres de mise à jour dynamique DNS

Off On DNS Dynamic Update Interval 0 to 24 to 48 (hr.)

Paramètres mDNS

Specify settings for using DNS functions without DNS servers. Configuring DNS(P. 316) Off On+ mDNS Name

Paramètres des options DHCP

Select whether to acquire the host name and whether to use the dynamic update function via the DHCP options when DHCP is enabled. Configuring DNS(P. 316)

Acquérir le nom d'hôte

Off On†

Mise à jour dynamique DNS

Off On

Acquérir l'adresse du serveur SMTP *1

Off On Acquire POP Server Address *1 Off On

Paramètres IPv6

Specify settings for using the machine in an IPv6 network.

Utiliser IPv6

Enable or disable IPv6 in the machine. You can also view the current settings. Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 278) Off On Check Settings Link-Local Address Prefix Length

Paramètres d'adresse sans état

Enable or disable stateless addresses. Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 278) Off On Check Settings Stateless Address Prefix Length

Utiliser DHCPv6

Enable or disable the stateful address that is acquired via DHCPv6. Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 278) Off On Check Settings Stateful Address Prefix Length

Paramètres DNS

Specify settings for Domain Name System (DNS), which provides a host name for IP address resolutions. Configuring DNS(P. 316) DNS Host Name/Domain Name Settings Use IPv4 Host/Domain Off Host Name Domain Name On DNS Dynamic Update Settings Off On Register Manual Address Off On Register Stateful Address Off On Register Stateless Address Off On DNS Dynamic Update Interval 0 to 24^+ to 48 (hr.)

Paramètres mDNS

Specify settings for using DNS functions without DNS servers. Configuring DNS(P. 316)

Off   
On+ Use Same mDNS Name as IPv4 Off mdNS Name On 

Paramètres d'impression LPD

Enable or disable LPD, a printing protocol that can be used on any hardware platform or operating system. Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 287)

Off On 

Paramètres d'impression RAW

Enable or disable RAW, a Windows specific printing protocol. Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 287)

Off On 

Paramètres WSD

Enable or disable automatic browsing and acquiring information for the printer by using the WSD protocol. Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 287)

WSD Print Settings Use WSD Print Off On Use WSD Browsing Off On 

WSD Scan Settings Use WSD Scan Off On Use Computer Scan Off On Use Multicast Discovery Off On†

Utiliser HTTP

Enable or disable HTTP, which is required for communications with a computer, such as when using the Remote UI, WSD printing, or printing with Google Cloud Print. Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 382) Off On

Paramètres du numéro de port

Change port numbers for protocols according to the network environment. Changing Port Numbers(P. 367) LPD 1 to 515+ to 65535 RAW 1 to 9100^+ to 65535 WSD Multicast Discovery 1 to 3702+ to 65535 HTTP 1 to 80 to 65535 POP3 *1 1 to 110^+ to 65535 SMTP *1 1 to 25 to 65535 SNMP 1 to 161+ to 65535

Taille MTU

Select the maximum size of packets the machine sends or receives. Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit(P. 314) 1300 1400 1500+

Paramètres SNMP

Specify the settings for monitoring and controlling the machine from a computer running SNMP-compatible software. Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 332)

Paramètres SNMPv1

Enable or disable SNMPv1. When enabling SNMPv1, specify a community name and access privileges to Management Information Base(MIB) objects.

Désactivé

Activé+

Community Name 1 Settings Off On+ Community Name MIB Access Permission Community Name 2 Settings Off On Community Name MIB Access Permission Dedicated Community Settings Off On  ▶ ▶ ▶ ▶ Select or Specify settings if < On> is selected

Paramètres SNMPv3

Enable or disable SNMPv3. Use the Remote UI to specify detailed settings that are applied when SNMPv3 is enabled. Off† On  ▶ ▶ ▶ ▶ Select or 

Obtenir les informations de gestion de l'imprimante depuis l'hôte

Enable or disable the monitoring of printer management information from a networked computer running SNMP-compatible software. Off† On  ▶ ▶ ▶ Select or

Paramètres du port dédié

Enable or disable the dedicated port. The dedicated port is used when printing, faxing, or scanning uses MF Scan Utility and when browsing or specifying the machine settings over the network. Off On+  Select or 

Méthode d'authentification du port dédié

Specify whether to limit the authentication method specifically to the secure one when using the dedicated port. If is selected, the authentication method is limited specifically to the secure one. Mode 1 Mode 2  Select or

IMPORTANT

If is selected, you cannot establish a connection from the device management software or driver in some cases.

Temps d'attente pour la connexion au démarrage

Specify a wait time for connecting to a network. Select the setting depending on the network environment. Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 315) 0^+ to 300 (sec.)

Paramètres du pilote Ethernet

Select the communication mode of Ethernet (half-duplex/full-duplex) and the Ethernet type (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX). You can also view the MAC address of the machine.

Détection automatique

Select whether to automatically detect or manually select the communication mode and the Ethernet type. Configuring Ethernet Settings(P. 312)

Désactivé

Communication Mode Half Duplex Full Duplex Ethernet Type 10BASE-T+ 100BASE-TX On+

Adresse MAC

Check the MAC address of the machine, which is a number unique to each communication device. Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN(P. 283)

Paramètres IEEE 802.1X

Enable or disable IEEE 802.1X authentication. Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication(P. 389) Off† On

Initialiser les paramètres réseau

Select to return the Network Settings to the factory defaults. Initialize Menu(P. 499)  All the settings about the sound volume and display are listed with short descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger (†).

REMARQUE

Si un écran de saisie de l'ID et du PIN du gestionnaire système s'affiche

Enter the System Manager ID and PIN, tap , and press Setting the System Manager ID(P. 343)

Astérisques (^*)

- Settings marked with " 1 may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or other setting items. - Settings marked with ^*2 may be unavailable or vary or have different defaults depending on your country or region. Volume Settings(P. 443) Display Settings(P. 445)

Paramètres de volume

Adjust volume at which the machine beeps when a key is pressed on the control panel or when a paper jam occurs. Adjusting the Volume(P. 63)

Tonalité de fax *1

Select whether to make a dial tone while a fax is being sent. You can also adjust the volume. 0 to 1+ to 5

Tonalité de sonnerie *1

Select whether the machine beeps when a fax is received. You can also adjust the volume. 0 to 1+ to 5

Tonalité de fin d'envoi *1

Select whether the machine beeps when a fax is sent. You can also adjust the volume. 0 to 1+ to 5

Son uniquement en cas d'erreur

Off On

Tonalité de fin de réception *1

Select whether the machine beeps when a fax is received. You can also adjust the volume. 0 to 1⁺ to 5 Sound Only When Error Occurs Off On

Tonalité de numérisation terminée *1

Select whether the machine beeps when scanning fax documents is complete. You can also adjust the volume. 0 to 1⁺ to 5 Sound Only When Error Occurs Off On

Tonalité de saisie

Select whether the machine beeps when a key is pressed on the control panel. Off On

Tonalité de saisie invalide

Select whether the machine beeps when an invalid settings value is entered, such as when a user is trying to enter a number unavailable for a setting. Off† On

Tonalité d'avertissement

Select whether the machine beeps when problem such as a paper jam or an operation mistake occurs. Off On

Tonalité de travail terminé

Select whether the machine beeps when copying or scanning is complete. Off On

Alerte d'économie d'énergie

Select whether the machine beeps when the machine enters or wakes from sleep mode. Off† On

Tonalité de détection d'original dans le chargeur *1

Select whether the machine beeps when an original is loaded in the feeder. Off On

Paramètres d'affichage

Écran par défaut après démarrage/restauration

By default, the screen is displayed immediately after the machine is turned ON or when the Auto Reset function is performed. Specify the setting to change the default screen and display the main screen of a different function. Home† Copy Fax*1 Scan Secure Print  Select a function to display the desired screen

Paramètres d'affichage des boutons de l'écran d'accueil

Change the order in which the screen buttons are displayed. Customizing the Screen(P. 16)  Select or ▶ Change display settings □

Contraste

Adjust the brightness of the display to suit the installation location of the machine. Five Levels  Use < - > / < + > to adjust the brightness Apply

Inverser les couleurs de l'écran

Select to invert the display colors. Select if the display is hard to view even after the brightness was adjusted in . Off† On  Select or

Bascule millimètre/pouce pour la saisie

Select the unit of measurement. Millimeter† Inch  Select or

Avertir de vérifier les paramètres papier

You can set the machine so that, after you load the paper in the paper drawer, a pop-up screen is displayed prompting you to confirm the paper loaded in the paper drawer is the same as the paper registered in the paper settings. Off On  Select or

Avertir de nettoyer la zone de numérisation des originaux *1

When set to <On> , a message is displayed for dirt or soiling on the original scanning area. Off On  Select or

Durée d'affichage des messages

Specify the interval in seconds at which two different messages are alternately displayed. 1 to 2 to 5 (sec.)  Set a number for the interval Apply

Vitesse de défilement

Adjust the speed for scrolling the screen by selecting from three levels. Slow Standard Fast  Select the speed 

Type de mouvement du curseur

Configure how the cursor moves after a character is entered on the screen. Select to automatically move the cursor to the right of the entered character. Select to manually move the cursor to the right of the entered character. Auto† Manual  Select or

Langue *2

Select the display language used for the display, reports, and lists. Arabic, Bulgarian, Catalan, Chinese (Simplified), Chinese (Traditional), Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English ^+ , Estonian, Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Latvian, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish  Select a language 

Langue de l'interface distante *2

Select the display language used for the Remote UI screens. Chinese (Simplified), Chinese (Traditional), Czech, Danish, Dutch, English ^+ , Finnish, French, German, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese, Russian, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish  Select a language   All the settings about the timer are listed with short descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).

REMARQUE

Astérisques (^*)

Settings marked with " 1" may be unavailable or vary or have different defaults depending on your country or region. Date/Time Settings(P. 449) Auto Reset Time(P. 451) Function After Auto Reset(P. 451) Auto Sleep Time(P. 452) Auto Offline Time(P. 452) Auto Shutdown Time (P. 452)

Paramètres de date et d'heure

Specify date and time settings, including the date format and the 12- or 24-hour clock display setting. The date and time that are printed on each fax document, report, and list are determined by these settings.

Format de date *1

Select the date format (order of year, month, and day).

YYYY MM/DD  
MM/DD/YYYY  
DD/MM YYYY† 

 Timer Settings> Select the date format

Format de l'heure

Select the 12- or 24-hour clock display setting.

12 Hour (AM/PM)†  
24 Hour 

 Timer Settings> Select the display setting 

Paramètres actuels de date et d'heure

Set the current date and time. Use / to move the cursor, and / to specify the date and time or switch between <AM>/<PM> .   Set the date and time Apply

REMARQUE

The current date and time cannot be changed for 1 hour after daylight saving time is in effect.

Fuseau horaire *1

Select the time zone. If the time zone setting is changed, the values set in are also changed accordingly. (UTC-12:00) International Date Line West to (UTC) Coordinated Universal Time † to (UTC+14:00) Kiritimati Island

REMARQUE

UTC

Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) is the primary time standard by which the world regulates clocks and time. The correct UTC time zone setting is required for Internet communications.  Timer Settings> Select a time zone 

Paramètres de l'heure d'été *1

Enable or disable daylight saving time. If daylight saving time is enabled, specify the dates from which and to which daylight saving time is in effect. Off On Start: Month, Week, Day End: Month, Week, Day  Select a month and day Apply

Heure de réinitialisation automatique

If a key is not pressed for a specified period of time, the screen and the settings are initialized to display the default screen (Auto Reset). Specify the interval at which the Auto Reset is performed. Select <0> to disable the Auto Reset function. The Auto Reset is not performed in the following cases: The setting menu is displayed. The machine is processing data, such as when printing documents. - An error message is displayed and the [Error] indicator is blinking (However, Auto Reset is performed when the error does not prevent the user from continuing to use a function.) 0 (Auto Reset is disabled.) 1 to 2⁺ to 9 (min.)  Timer Settings>Auto Reset Time Set the Auto Reset time Apply

REMARQUE

The screen displayed after the Auto Reset is performed can be selected in .

Fonction après réinitialisation automatique

Select whether to return the display to the default screen after the Auto Reset is performed. If is selected, the main screen of the function selected in is displayed ( Default Screen after Startup/Restoration(P. 445)). If is selected, the display returns to the main screen of the function that was selected. Default Function Selected Function  Timer Settings>Function After Auto Reset>Select or

Durée de veille automatique

If the machine has not been operated or has had no data to process for a specified period of time, the machine enters sleep mode to save energy consumption (Auto Sleep). Specify the period of time after which auto sleep is performed. Auto Sleep is not performed when the setting menu is displayed. We recommend using the factory default settings to save the most power. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 66) 3 to 10⁺ to 60 (min.)

Durée de mise hors ligne automatique

If a key has not been pressed for a specified period of time after the screen below is displayed (the machine is set online for scanning), the machine automatically becomes offline. Specify the time period at which the machine becomes offline. You can also set the machine to remain online. Remote Scanner Waiting... (Online) Start scanning using the device at the store location. 0 (The machine remains online.) 1 to 5⁺ to 60 (min.)  Timer Settings>Auto Offline Time>Set the time period Apply

Durée d'arrêt automatique

Set a timer to automatically shut down the machine after the specified period of idle time has elapsed since the machine entered sleep mode. Setting Auto Shutdown Time(P. 65) 0 (Auto Shutdown is disabled.) 1 to 4^+ to 8 (hr.)  Timer Settings>Auto Shutdown Time Set the Auto Shutdown time   All the settings about the operation of the paper drawer and the paper feed method are listed with short descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).

REMARQUE

Astérisques (^*)

Settings marked with " 1 may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or other setting items. Paper Source Auto Selection (P. 454) Switch Paper Feed Method(P. 456)

Sélection automatique de la source de papier

Enable or disable the automatic drawer selection feature for the paper sources. If automatic drawer selection is set to when printing documents the machine automatically selects a paper source that is loaded with the appropriate paper size. Also, when the paper runs out, this setting enables continuous printing by switching from one paper source to another that is loaded with the same paper size. You can select a function, such as copy or print, to enable this feature.

Copie

Multi-Purpose Tray Off On Drawer 1 Off On Drawer 2^*1 Off On

Imprimante

Drawer 1 Off On Drawer 2^*1 Off On

Fax *1

Multi-Purpose Tray Off On Drawer 1 Off On+ Drawer 2^*1 Off On+

Autre

Multi-Purpose Tray Off + On Drawer 1 Off On + Drawer 2^*1 Off On +  Select the function Select the paper source Select or On>  

Fonctions

Select the function for which you want to configure automatic drawer selection. NOTE: Select for functions such as printing reports and lists.

Sources papier

Select the paper source for which you want to enable. NOTE: is not displayed if was selected on the previous screen ( a ). Automatic drawer selection is always enabled for printing on paper fed from the multi-purpose tray.

Changer la méthode d'alimentation papier *1

Specify this setting when you print a document on paper with logos. To print on paper with logos, you need to change how the paper loaded in the paper source is facing depending on whether you are performing 1- or 2-sided printing. However, if you change the setting to , you can just load the paper face down for both 1- and 2-sided printing. For more information, see Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 42). Multi-Purpose Tray Speed Priority ^ Print Side Priority Drawer 1 Speed Priority Print Side Priority Drawer 2^*1 Speed Priority Print Side Priority  Select the paper source Select or   

Sources papier

Select the paper source that you want to change the setting for.

When using paper that has been preprinted with a logo, you need to change how it is facing when you perform 1-sided and 2-sided printing.

REMARQUE :

We recommend selecting if you do not need to consider which side to print on.

To print on a specific side of paper, you do not need to flip over paper in the paper source whether 1- or 2-sided printing is selected.

REMARQUE :

- If is set for a paper source that is loaded with paper you cannot use for 2-sided printing (Available Paper(P. 627)), is applied to the paper source instead. In this case, you need to load the paper in the same way as when is selected ( Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 42)). - 1-sided printing speed may be slower when is selected.  All the settings about the copy are listed with short descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger (†).

REMARQUE

Astérisques (^*)

Settings marked with " 1" may not be displayed or have different defaults depending on the model you are using, options, or other setting items. Change Default Settings (P. 458) Auto Recognize Original Orientation (P. 459) Initialize Default Settings (P. 460)

Modifier les paramètres par défaut

You can change the factory default settings about copy. The selected settings are used as the default settings of the copy function. Changing Default Settings(P. 95) Number of Copies 1+ to 999 Density -4 to 0^+ to +4 Auto Density Original Type Text Text/Photo Photo 2-Sided *1 Off† 1-Sided->2-Sided*1 2-Sided->2-Sided*1 2-Sided->1-Sided*1 Original/Finishing Type Copy Ratio Custom Ratio 100% (1:1) 400% (Max) 200% A5->A3 141% A5->A4, A4->A3 70% A4->A5, A3->A4 50% A3->A5 25% (Min) Paper*1 Auto ⁺ *1 Multi-Purpose Tray Drawer 1 Drawer 2^*1 Non 1 Off 2 on 1 4 on 1 ID Card Copy Select Layout Different Size Originals *1 Off On Finishing Group Collate† Rotate + Group Rotate + Collate Book->2 Pages Off On Erase Frame Off Original Frame Book Frame

Reconnaître automatiquement l'orientation de l'original

Automatically rotate images by calculating original size/copy ratio/etc, and print them on paper loaded in the paper source. Off On+  Select or 

Initialiser les paramètres par défaut

Select to restore the copy settings that you specified in to the factory defaults. 

Paramètres de fax (imageRUNNER 2206iF)

36WC-095  All the settings about the fax are listed with short descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).

REMARQUE

Si un écran de saisie de l'ID du gestionnaire système et du PIN s'affiche

Enter the System Manager ID and PIN, tap , and press Setting the System Manager ID(P. 343)

Astérisques (^*)

Settings marked with " 1" may be unavailable or vary or have different defaults depending on your country or region. Basic Settings(P. 461) TX Function Settings(P. 464) RX Function Settings(P. 468) RX Print Settings(P. 470) Forwarding Settings(P. 471) Fax Setup Guide(P. 472)

Paramètres de base

Specify the basic settings for using the machine as a fax device.

Numéro de téléphone de l'unité

Register the fax number for the machine.  Register the fax number

Sélectionner le type de ligne *1

Select the telephone line type used for fax transmission. Pulse Tone† 

Select line type

Sélectionner le type de connexion à la ligne publique

When the fax receive mode is ), an external telephone may not ring or a call may not be dialable. In this instance, specify or . Direct Adapter 1 Adapter 2  Select connection type

Alarme de décrochage

Select whether the machine makes an alert sound when the handset of a telephone or the optional handset connected to the machine is not properly set on the cradle. You can also adjust the volume of the alert sound. 0 to 5  Select the volume of the alert sound Apply

Paramètres de gestion des communications

Specify the communication start speed settings and the R-key settings.

Vitesse de démarrage TX

Adjust the communication start speed in descending order from "33600 bps." This adjustment should be made when it takes a long time to start sending a fax due to a poor telephone line connection. 33600 bps 14400 bps 9600 bps 7200 bps 4800 bps 2400 bps  Select a communication start speed

Vitesse de démarrage RX

Adjust the communication start speed in descending order from "33600 bps." This adjustment should be made when it takes a long time to start receiving a fax due to a poor telephone line connection.

33600 bps†  
14400 bps  
9600 bps  
7200 bps  
4800 bps  
2400 bps 

 Select a communication start speed

Paramètre de la touche R

If your machine is connected through a PBX (Private Branch Exchange), it is necessary to set the access method. You can set the PBX type to or . If you register the outside line access number to the R-key, you can easily access the outside line. PSTN PBX*1 Prefix Hooking  Select or Enter the outside line access number if you select Apply     Select the type of PBX you are using. If you select , register the prefix code on the next screen. 

Enter the prefix code using the numeric keys, tap , and then tap . If you do not insert a pause, the prefix code is not registered.

Paramètres de la fonction TX

Specify settings for sending faxes.

Modifier les paramètres par défaut

Specify settings used for sending faxes. The selected settings are used as the default settings when scanning documents. Changing Default Settings(P. 128)

Résolution

200 × 100 dpi (Normal) 200 × 200 dpi (Fine) 200 × 200dpi (Photo) 200 × 400 dpi (Superfine)

Densité

Nine Levels

Original recto-verso

Off Book Type Calendar Type

Enregistrer le nom de l'unité

Register the name of a company or person. The registered name is sent as sender information to the destination. TX Terminal ID(P. 466)  Register the name of a company or person Apply>

ECM TX

Enable or disable error correction mode (ECM). ECM checks for fax data errors and corrects them. To reduce errors on received faxes, see ECM RX(P. 468). Off On

NOTE

- ECM must be enabled on both the machine and the other fax device because error checks are performed on both the sending and receiving devices. - Even when ECM is enabled, errors may occur due to telephone line conditions. - It may take a longer time than usual to process data when ECM is enabled because the error checks and corrections are performed while the data is transmitted. 

Définir le temps de pause *1

For example, when you make calls by dialing "0 - (pause) - (telephone number)", 0 is dialed first and then a few seconds later, the telephone number. When sending faxes overseas, you need to specify destinations by dialing "(international access code) - (country code) - (area code) - (fax number)" but consecutive numbers that are input without pauses may not be recognized correctly. In this case, try adding a pause after the international access code or the fax number. If the code or the number is still not recognized correctly, change the duration of the pause. For instructions on how to enter a pause, see step 3 on O Sending Faxes(P. 101). 1 to 4^+ to 15 (sec.)  Specify the duration of pause Apply

Recomposition automatique *1

Specify settings for Auto Redial, a function that automatically redials the fax number after several minutes if the first attempt fails because the line is busy. You can specify how many times the machine redials and the interval between redials.

Désactivé

Activé+

Number of Times to Redial 1 to 2⁺ to 10 (times) Redial Interval*1 2⁺ to 99 (min.) Redial When Error Occurs Off On  Specify the settings 

a

Specifies how many times the machine redials. Use / or the numeric keys to enter a number, and tap .

Specifies the interval between redials. Use / or the numeric keys to enter a number for the interval, and tap .

Specifies whether to radial when a transmission error occurs. Select <Off> or <On> .

ID terminal TX

Specify settings for adding the sender information, including the fax number and the name of the machine, to the fax header. The recipient can check who sent the fax by looking at the added information. Off On+ Print Position Inside Image Area Outside Image Area Mark Number as: TEL/FAX FAX TEL  Specify the settings 

a

Specifies the position to print the terminal ID information in the sent fax. Select to print the information inside the image area, or to print the information outside the image area.

b

Adds the "FAX" or "TEL" mark in front of the fax number registered for the machine. Select to indicate that the notified number is a telephone number.

Vérifier la tonalité avant l'envoi *1

Select whether to check the dial tone before a fax number is dialed. Off† On  Select or

Autoriser l'envoi depuis le pilote de fax

Enable or disable PC faxing (sending faxes from a computer). Prohibiting PC Faxing (imageRUNNER 2206iF) (P. 375) Off On

Confirmer le numéro de fax saisi

Select whether to require users to enter the fax number twice when it is entered by using the numeric keys. Displaying the Screen for Confirming the Fax Number(P. 377) Off On

Restreindre la diffusion séquentielle

This enables you to help prevent sending a fax to an incorrect number by restricting the sending of faxes to multiple destinations. Off† Confirm Sequential Broadcast Reject Sequential Broadcast  Select , , or

Initialiser les paramètres par défaut

Select to restore the fax settings that you specified in to the factory defaults.

Paramètres de fonction RX

Specify settings for receiving faxes.

ECM RX

Enable or disable error correction mode (ECM). ECM checks for fax data errors and corrects them. To reduce errors on sent faxes, see ECM TX(P. 464). Off On

NOTE

- ECM must be enabled on both the machine and the other fax device because error check is performed on both the sending and receiving devices. - Even when ECM is enabled, errors may occur due to telephone line conditions. - It may take a longer time than usual to process data when ECM is enabled because the error check and corrections are performed while the data is transmitted. 

Réception entrante

Specify settings for sounding a ring to notify you of incoming faxes. This feature is only available when or is selected for the receive mode. Specify how many times the incoming call rings when the machine receives a fax call. You can also disable the settings to prevent the incoming call from ringing. Off On+ 1 to 2 to 99 (times)*1

NOTE

If you use this feature in the mode, you need to connect your telephone to the machine beforehand.  Specify how many times the incoming call rings

Réception à distance *1

Specify settings for receiving a fax by operating a telephone that is connected to the machine (Remote Reception). When a fax is sent to the machine, you can receive it just by picking up the handset of the telephone and entering a specific ID number by using the telephone. This feature can save you the trouble of going all the way to the machine. For instructions on how to use Remote Reception, see Using a Telephone to Receive Faxes (Remote Reception)(P. 131). Off On† 00 to 25⁺ to 99  Specify the ID number for receiving a fax Apply>

Passer en réception automatique

Specify settings for automatically receiving a fax after the machine has rung for a specified time period. This feature is only available when is selected for the receive mode. By using this feature, faxes can be received even when no one is available to pick up the handset. Off On 1 to 15⁺ to 99 (sec.)  Specify how long the incoming call rings Apply>

Paramètres de verrouillage mémoire

Select whether to store received faxes without immediately printing them. Stored fax documents can be printed at any time by changing the setting to . Storing Received Faxes into Memory (Memory Reception) (P. 137) Off On Report Print Off On† Memory Lock Time Off On Memory Lock Start Time Memory Lock End Time  Specify settings

Paramètres d'impression de réception

Specify settings for printing received faxes.

Impression recto verso

Specify settings for printing received faxes on both sides of paper. Off† On 

Réduire la taille de réception

Specify settings for reducing the image size of a received document. You can select an automatic reduction ratio that reduces the received document to size of the loaded paper. You can also select a ratio from a list. Off On Reduction Ratio Auto 97% 95% 90% 75% Reduction Direction Vertical/Horizontal Vertical Only  

a

reduces the image by a ratio that is based on the size of the loaded paper. <97%, <95%, <90%, or <75%> reduce the image by the corresponding ratio.

b

Select to reduce the image both vertically and horizontally. Select to reduce only vertically.

Pied de page de réception

Select whether to print information, including date and time of reception and page numbers, on the bottom of received faxes.

Off† On 


Paramètres de transfert

Specify settings for forwarding faxes.

Activer les paramètres de transfert

Select whether to forward all the received fax documents to a specified destination. You can specify an e-mail address or a shared folder in a computer as the forwarding destination. Forwarding All the Received Documents Automatically (P. 143)

Off† On 

Impression d'images

Select whether to print forwarded fax documents. You can set the machine to print forwarded documents only when an error occurs. Printing Documents to be Forwarded(P. 143) Off On Only When Error Occurs

Stockage d'images en mémoire

Select whether to store fax documents in memory when they are not successfully forwarded. You can resend or print the documents later as necessary. Printing/Resending/Deleting Documents that Failed to be Forwarded(P. 144) Off Only When Error Occurs

Guide de configuration de la télécopie

Select to display on-screen instructions for specifying settings, including the fax number and the telephone line type. For more information, contact your authorized Canon dealer.  All the settings about the scan are listed with short descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger (†).

REMARQUE

Pour l'imageRUNNER 2206N

This function can only be used when the optional Color Send Kit is attached.

Astérisques (^*)

Settings marked with " 1 may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or other setting items. E-Mail Settings(P. 473) File Settings(P. 474) Register Unit Name (E-Mail)(P. 476) Output File Image Settings(P. 476)

Paramètres de messagerie électronique

Specify settings used for scanning documents to send as e-mails.

Modifier les paramètres par défaut

Specify settings used for scanning documents to send as e-mails. The selected settings are used as the default settings when scanning documents. Changing Default Settings(P. 225)

Format de numérisation

A4 A4R A3 A5 A5R

Mode couleur

Color Black & White

Format de fichier

PDF PDF (Compact) JPEG TIFF

Densité

Nine Levels

Orientation de l'original

Portrait Landscape

Type d'original

Text Text/Photo Photo

Original recto-verso *1

Off Book Type Calendar Type

Taille des données

Small: Memory Priority Standard† Large: Image Quality Priority

Sujet/Message

Subject Message

Répondre à

None† Specify from Address Book

Priorité

Low Standard High

Initialiser les paramètres par défaut

Select this option to restore the default e-mail transmission settings. 

Paramètres du fichier

You can change and register the settings used when documents are saved to a shared folder.

Modifier les paramètres par défaut

You can change the default settings used when documents are saved to a shared folder. The selected settings are used as the default settings when scanning. Changing Default Settings(P. 225) Scan Size A4 A4R A3 A5 A5R

Mode couleur

Color Black & White

Format de fichier

PDF PDF (Compact) JPEG TIFF

Densité

Nine Levels

Orientation de l'original

Portrait Landscape

Type d'original

Text Text/Photo Photo

Original recto-verso *1

Off Book Type Calendar Type

Taille des données

Small: Memory Priority Standard† Large: Image Quality Priority

Initialiser les paramètres par défaut

You can change and register the settings used when documents are saved to a shared folder. 

Nom de l'unité d'enregistrement (e-mail)

Register the sender name for e-mails. The registered name is displayed in e-mails, along with the e-mail address. If the sender name is not registered, only the e-mail address is displayed.  Enter the sender name Apply>

Paramètres d'image du fichier de sortie

Specify settings for the gamma value for converting scanned documents into files.

Valeur gamma TX YCbCr

Select the gamma value used when converting scanned color documents into the specified file format. You can specify the same gamma value as that of the monitor which is to be used for viewing the converted files. The files are displayed with brightness that is true to the original documents. Setting Gamma Values(P. 208)

Gamma 1.0  
Gamma 1.4  
Gamma 1.8  
Gamma 2.2 

 All the settings about the printer are listed with short descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger (†).

REMARQUE

Astérisques (^*)

Settings marked with " ^*1 " may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or other setting items. Paper Size Override (P. 477) Mobile Print Halftones (P. 477) Speed/Quality Priority for Mobile Print(P. 478) Copies(P. 478) 2-Sided Printing(P. 478) Default Paper(P. 479) Print Quality(P. 479) Layout(P. 480) Timeout(P.480) PCL(P. 481)

Ignorer le format de papier

Select whether to switch between printing on A4 and Letter size paper if one of these paper sizes is loaded but the other is not. For example, if you are printing a Letter size document but only A4 paper is loaded in the machine, the machine will print your document on A4 paper. Off† On  Select or

Tramage pour impression mobile

Select the image processing when printing from a mobile device. Select for photos and illustrations, and for mostly text documents for more attractive printouts. Gradation† Error Diffusion  Select or

Priorité vitesse/qualité pour impression mobile

Select whether to give priority to print speed or to print quality when printing from a mobile device. Speed Priority Image Quality Priority†  Select or

Copies

Set the number of copies to print. 1+to 999  Set the number of copies to print Apply

Impression recto verso *1

Select whether to make 2-sided printouts. Off On  <2-Sided Printing> Select or

Papier par défaut

Use this item to specify the paper size. Available Paper(P. 627)  Select the paper size

Qualité d'impression

You can change settings related to print quality.

Densité

Adjust the toner density.

17 niveaux

Réglage fin/Densité (Réglage fin)

High 17 Levels Medium 17 Levels Low 17 Levels

NOTE

- The settings specified for are disabled when is enabled.  Adjust the density Apply 

Économie de toner

You can save toner consumption when printing from a mobile device. Select when you want to check the layout or other appearance characteristics before proceeding to final printing of a large job. Off† On  Select or 

Mise en page

Specify the page layout settings such as binding position.

Position de reliure

If you are binding the printouts with a binding tool such as a stapler, use this item to specify whether to bind on the long or short edge. Long Edge† Short Edge  Select or 

Specify this to bind on the long edge of paper. 

Specify this to bind on the short edge of paper. 

Délai d'attente

Set the time period after which the current print job is automatically canceled in the case of a print data reception interruption. 5 to 15^+ to 300 (sec.)  Set the time period Apply

PCL

Specify the PCL printing settings such as page layout and print quality.

Économie de papier

Select whether to save paper by not outputting blank pages in documents. By selecting , the machine will not output blank pages. To output all your document data when printing, including any blank pages that you have inserted in your document, select . Off† On  Select or

Orientation

Select (vertical orientation) or (horizontal orientation) for the page orientation. Portrait Landscape  Select or 

Numéro de police

Specify the font to use by selecting a corresponding font ID number. You can print the PCL font list with font samples from the control panel. © PCL Font List(P. 597) 0^+ to 54  Select the font number Apply> 

Taille de point

Set the font size in points, adjustable in 0.25 increments. You can specify this setting only when a proportionally-spaced scalable font is selected in . 4.00 to 12.00 + to 999.75 (point)  Specify the point size Apply

Pas

Set the font pitch, or cpi (characters per inch), adjustable in 0.01 increments. You can specify this setting only when a fixed-pitch scalable font or a bitmap font is selected in . 0.44 to 10.00 ^+ to 99.99 (cpi)  Specify the pitch value Apply

Lignes de formulaire

Set the number of lines printed on one page from 5 to 128. This setting is automatically changed according to the settings specified in and . 5 to 64^+ to 128 (lines) 

Specify the number of lines Apply 

Code de caractère

Select the character code that is most suited for the computer you send print data from. The specified setting is ignored when the character code is controlled by the font specified in .

1. DESKTOP PC8  
2. ISO4 PC850  
3. ISO6 PC852  
4. ISO11 PC8DN  
5. ISO15 PC8TK  
6. ISO17 PC1004  
7. ISO21 PIFONT  
8. ISO60 PSMATH  
9. ISO69 PSTEXT  
10. ISOL1 ROMAN8  
11. ISOL2 

ISOL5 VNINTL  
ISOL6 VNMATH  
LEGAL VNUS  
MATH8 WIN30  
MCTEXT WINBAL  
MSPUBL WINL1  
PC775 WINL2  
WINL5 

 Select the character code

Papier personnalisé

Select whether to set a custom paper size. Select <On> to set the dimensions of the paper in <X dimension> and <Y dimension> .

Off† On 

 Select or

Unité de mesure

Select the unit of measurement to use to set a custom paper size.

Millimeters† Inches 

 Select or 

Dimension X

Specify the horizontal dimension (short edge) of the custom paper. 148 to 431 (mm)  Specify the dimension Apply

Dimension Y

Specify the vertical dimension (long edge) of the custom paper. 95 to 297⁺ (mm)  ▷ ▷ ▷ ▷ Specify the dimension ▷ 

Ajouter CR à LF

Select whether to append a carriage return (CR) when the machine receives a line feed code (LF). If is selected, the print position moves to the beginning of the next line when the machine receives an LF code. If is selected, the print position moves to the next line, just under the received LF code.  Yes No  Select or

Élargir la largeur d'impression A4

Select whether to expand the width of the printable area of A4 size paper in portrait orientation to that of LTR size. Off† On  Select or 

Tramage

You can select the printing method to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality. For each document, you can make settings by type of image.

Texte

Color Tone Gradation Resolution†

Graphiques

Color Tone Gradation Resolution

Image

Color Tone Gradation Resolution  Select the type of image Select the halftone reproduction method   a  b

Type d'image

Select the object for which to change the setting. represents letters and characters, represents lines and figures, and represents photos and images.

Valeur de réglage

Produces a sharp print with strong contrast of lightness and darkness. It is suitable for printing image data such as photo image data.

Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing figures or graphs containing gradation areas.

Produces a fine print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and fine lines.  All the settings about adjustment and maintenance are listed with short descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger () .

REMARQUE

Astérisques (^*)

Settings marked with " ^*1 " may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or other setting items. Printer Density (P. 487) Toner Save (P. 487) Auto Correct for Dirt on Scanning Area(P. 488) Speed/Image Quality Priority for Rotate ^+ Collate (P. 488) Special Processing(P. 488) Clean Transfer Roller(P. 491) Clean Drum Unit(P. 491) Clean Fixing Assembly (P. 491) Clean Feeder(P. 491)

Densité d'impression

Adjust the density to the most appropriate levels for copying, printing received faxes, and printing reports and lists. Nine Levels  Adjust the density Apply 

Économie de toner

Select whether to reduce toner consumption when copying.

Copie

Off Save Mode (Low Saving) Save Mode (High Saving)  Select ,

Correction automatique pour les salissures sur la zone de numérisation *1

When dirt on the scanning area causes output paper to have streaks, you can automatically correct this. Off On  

Priorité vitesse/qualité d'image pour rotation + tri

When is set, you can specify either or . Speed Priority† Image Quality Priority  Select or

Traitement spécial

If the print results are not satisfactory due to the paper type or usage environment, you may use the settings below to improve the quality of the printouts.

Mode d'impression spécial O

Paper jams may frequently occur when using the multi-purpose tray to copy/print on the reverse side of paper that has already been copied/printed on. should normally be specified for this setting. Only change this setting if the above symptom occurs. Off Mode 1 Mode 2 IMPORTANT Do not use paper that has been exposed to high temperature or humidity for an extended period of time. Printing on such paper may result in frequent paper jams.  Special Printing Mode M Change the setting if there is a degradation in print quality or irregularity in print density. This mode enables you to select one of five levels for the machine's transfer output. Select a higher mode number if you want to print on paper to which toner does not adhere well, such as index cards. Select a lower mode number when printing on paper that has been stored at high temperature and high humidity for a long time. Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3† Mode 4 Mode 5  

Mode d'impression spécial N

Change the setting if paper curls or jams when printing on paper that has absorbed moisture. If is set, the effect of this setting is maximized, but it may take the machine longer to print. Off† Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3

IMPORTANT

Do not use paper that has been exposed to high temperature or humidity for an extended period of time. Printing on such paper may result in frequent paper jams.

REMARQUE

If both and are enabled when printing on a lightweight paper, overrides .  Select the mode

Mode d'impression spécial S

If you switch to a larger size of paper than previously used, it may take a long time for the machine to resume printing. In this case, set the setting to or to reduce the waiting time for the next print. If is set, waiting time is minimized. Off† Mode 1 Mode 2

REMARQUE

If this mode is enabled, the previously printed image may re-appear faintly on the next output.  Select the mode

Mode d'impression spécial P

Set the setting to if paper curls when printing on a lightweight paper. Off On

REMARQUE

If both and are enabled, overrides .  On>

Mode d'impression spécial F

Uneven images may appear on the printed paper. In this case, change this setting. If is set, the effect of this setting is maximized. Off Mode 1 Mode 2  Select the mode

Nettoyer le rouleau de transfert

Clean the transfer roller if print quality deteriorates or dots appear on printouts. Transfer Roller(P. 570)

Nettoyer le tambour

Clean the drum unit if print quality deteriorates. µr u m(P.571)

Nettoyer l'ensemble de fixation

Clean the fixing assembly after a toner cartridge is replaced or if black streaks appear on printouts. Fixing Assembly(P. 572)

Nettoyeur de chargeur *1

Clean the feeder rollers if documents become dirty after being fed through the feeder. Feeder(P. 566)

Paramètres de gestion du système

36WC-098  All the settings about System Management Settings are listed with short descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger (†).

REMARQUE

Si un écran de saisie de l'ID et du PIN du gestionnaire système s'affiche

Enter the System Manager ID and PIN, tap , and press Setting the System Manager ID(P. 343)

Astérisques (^*)

- Settings marked with " 1 may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or other setting items. - Settings marked with " 2" may be unavailable or vary or have different defaults depending on your country or region. Network Settings(P. 492) System Manager Information Settings(P. 492) Device Information Settings(P. 493) Department ID Management On/Off (P. 493) Security Settings (P. 493) Select Country/Region(P. 495) Remote UI Settings(P. 495) Auto Online for Remote Scan(P. 496) Restrict TX Function(P. 496) Display Job Log(P. 497) Use as USB Device(P. 497) Google Cloud Print Settings(P. 497) Secure Print Settings(P. 497) PDL Selection (Plug and Play)(P. 498) Register License(P. 499) Update Firmware(P. 499) Initialize Address Book(P. 499) Initialize Menu(P. 499) Initialize All Data/Settings(P. 500)

Paramètres réseau

See Network Settings(P.432).

Paramètres d'informations du gestionnaire système

Specify the ID or PIN exclusively for Administrators who have access privileges to and . ID is and PIN is . You can also register the name of an Administrator. Setting the System Manager ID(P. 343)

ID et PIN du gestionnaire système

Enter a number of up to seven digits for the System Manager ID and PIN.

Nom du gestionnaire système

Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for the name of an Administrator.

Paramètres d'informations de l'appareil

Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for the name and the installation location to identify the machine. Device Name Location  Select or Enter or ( Entering Text(P. 24)) Apply>   

Activation/désactivation de la gestion par ID de département

Select whether to use the Department ID Management, a feature that uses IDs as user accounts to specify access privileges and maintain information on how the machine is used. Setting the Department ID Management(P. 345) Off† On  Select or

Paramètres de sécurité

Enable or disable settings for IP address or MAC address packet filtering.

Utiliser TLS

Select whether to use the TLS encrypted communication. Enabling TLS Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI(P. 385) Off† On

Filtre d'adresse IPv4

Enable or disable settings for filtering packets received from devices with specified IPv4 addresses. Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Rules(P. 360)

Filtre entrant

Off On  Inbound Filter> Select or

Filtre d'adresse IPv6

Enable or disable settings for filtering packets received from devices with specified IPv6 addresses. Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Rules(P. 360)

Filtre entrant

Off On  Inbound Filter> Select or

Filtre d'adresse MAC

Enable or disable settings for filtering packets received from devices with specified MAC addresses. Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Rules(P. 364)

Filtre entrant

Off On  Inbound Filter> Select or 

Sélectionner le pays/la région *2

Specify the country or region where the machine is used. The default setting may vary depending on the setting selected at initial power-on.

Austria (AT)	Netherlands (NL)
Belarus (BY)	Norway (NO)
Belgium (BE)	Poland (PL)
Czech Republic (CZ)	Portugal (PT)
Denmark (DK)	Russia (RU)
Egypt (EG)	Saudi Arabia (SA)
Finland (FI)	Slovenia (SI)
France (FR)	South Africa (ZA)
Germany (DE)	Spain (ES)
Greece (GR)	Sweden (SE)
Hungary (HU)	Switzerland (CH)
Ireland (IE)	Ukraine (UA)
Italy (IT)	Great Britain (GB)†
Jordan (JO)	Other
Luxembourg (LU)


Select a country or region

Paramètres de l'interface utilisateur à distance

Configure settings for using the Remote UI. Using the Remote UI allows you to configure machine settings from a Web browser.

Utiliser l'interface utilisateur à distance

Select whether to use the Remote UI. Using the Remote UI allows you to configure machine settings from a Web browser. Disabling Remote UI(P. 383) Off On+

Paramètres de sécurité d'accès à l'interface utilisateur à distance

Set whether a PIN is required for accessing the Remote UI. Set a PIN of up to 7 digits. All users use a common PIN. Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 352) Off† On Remote UI Access PIN  Enter PIN PIN (Confirm) Apply

En ligne automatique pour la numérisation à distance

Select whether to use this feature to go online for remote scanning, even without using the control panel. Off On  ▶▶▶Select or

Restreindre la fonction TX *1

Specify settings for restricting access to sending functions for selected destinations.

Code PIN du carnet d'adresses

Specify a PIN and require entering it to add new entries to or edit existing entries in the Address Book. Setting a PIN for Address Book (P. 373)

Restreindre les nouvelles destinations

Select whether to limit the fax numbers and e-mail addresses that can be specified as destinations to those already registered in the Address Book. Limiting Available Destinations(P. 374) Off† On

Restreindre le renvoi depuis le journal

Select whether to prevent a destination from being selected from the sent job logs. × Disabling Use of Previously Used Destinations (P. 376) Off† On

Confirmer la numérisation en un toucher/numérotation abrégée

Select whether to display the details of an entered coded dial number when it is selected as a destination. Displaying Destinations in Address Book(P. 377) Off On

Afficher le journal des travaux

Select whether to display the copying, printing, faxing, and scanning logs on the display of the machine and in the Communication Management Report. Off On+  Select or

Utiliser comme périphérique USB

Enable or disable the USB port that is used for connecting the machine to a computer. Off On+  Select or Restart the machine

Paramètres Google Cloud Print

Enable or disable Google Cloud Print. Using Google Cloud Print(P. 249) Enable Google Cloud Print Off On Google Cloud Print Registration Status

Paramètres d'impression sécurisée

Specify whether to enable or disable Secure Print. Printing via Secure Print(P. 164) Use Secure Print Off On Restrict Printer Jobs Off On

Sélection PDL (Plug and Play)

Select a page description language so that the machine is detected as a printer that is compatible with that language when it is connected to a computer by using Plug and Play.

Réseau

Select a page description language so that the machine is detected as a printer that is compatible with that language when it is detected over the network. FAX*1 UFRII LT+ UFRII LT (V4) PCL6 PCL6 (V4)

USB

Select a page description language so that the machine is detected as a printer that is compatible with that language when it is connected to a computer via USB. UFRII LT+ UFRII LT (V4) PCL6 PCL6 (V4)

REMARQUE :

Any setting change is enabled the next time the main power is turned ON.  Select or Select a page description language   

a

Detects and connects the machine as a fax device.

Detects and connects the machine as a UFRII LT printer.

Detects and connects the machine as a UFRII LT printer that is compatible with XML Paper Specification (XPS).

c

Detects and connects the machine as a PCL6 printer.

e

Detects and connects the machine as a PCL6 printer.

Enregistrer la licence *1

Enter the license key for a system option that can be used on the machine.  Enter Register License Code Restart the machine

Mettre à jour le firmware

Select how to install the firmware update according to the environment of the machine. Select to manually install the firmware update available on the Canon Web site yourself. For instructions on how to install the update, see the instruction manual available on the Web site. When the machine uses a wireless LAN, update with below or use a USB cable to connect. Select to automatically install the firmware update without using a computer. Follow the on-screen instructions to perform the update. The machine must be connected to the Internet. Select to check details for the current firmware. Via PC Via Internet Version Information

Initialiser le carnet d'adresses *1

Select to restore the Address Book settings to the factory defaults. 口 Initializing Address Book (P. 602)

Initialiser le menu

Select to restore the settings listed below to the factory defaults. You can restore all the settings listed below at once, or you can restore individual settings separately. Initializing Menu(P. 603) Initializing System Management Settings(P. 604) Preferences Timer Settings Common Settings Copy Settings Fax Settings*1 Scan Settings*1 Printer Settings Adjustment/Maintenance System Management Settings Initialize All

Initialiser toutes les données et tous les paramètres

Delete all data on the machine and return it to its factory default settings.  Restart the machine

Dépannage

Dépannage 502

Clearing Jams 504 Countermeasures for Each Message 519 Countermeasures for Each Error Code 530 Common Problems 537 Installation/Settings Problems 539 Copy/Printing Problems 543 Faxing/Telephone Problems 546 Miscellaneous Problems 548

Lorsque vous ne pouvez pas imprimer correctement 549

Printing Results Are Not Satisfactory 551 Paper Creases or Curls 555 Paper Is Fed Incorrectly 557

Lorsqu'un problème ne peut pas être résolu 559

Dépannage

36WC-09A When a problem occurs, check this chapter to find out solutions before contacting Canon.

Bourrages papier

If a document or paper jams, see Clearing Jams(P. 504) to remove the jammed paper. 

Un message ou un code d'erreur apparaît

If the screen displays a message or error code (three digits), see the following sections.  Countermeasures for Each Message(P. 519) Countermeasures for Each Error Code(P. 530)

Problèmes courants

If you suspect that the machine is malfunctioning, see the following sections before contacting Canon.  Common Problems(P. 537) Installation/Settings Problems(P. 539) Copy/Printing Problems(P. 543) Faxing/Telephone Problems(P. 546) Miscellaneous Problems(P. 548)

■ Résultats d'impression non satisfaisants

If printing results are not satisfactory, see When You Cannot Print Properly(P. 549). 

■ Lorsqu'un problème ne peut pas être résolu

If a problem persists, see When a Problem Cannot Be Solved(P. 559) to find out where to contact.  If a paper jams, is displayed on the screen. Press to display simple solutions. If it is difficult to understand the procedures on the display, see the following sections to clear jams.  Document Jams in the Feeder (DADF-AY)(P. 504) Paper Jams in the Paper Drawer 1(P. 505) Paper Jams in the Cassette Feeding Module-AD(P. 508) Paper Jams around the Output Area(P. 511) Paper Jams in the Duplex Unit-C(P. 513) Paper Jams around the Fixing Assembly(P. 515) Paper Jams in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 516)

IMPORTANT

Lors du retrait du papier coincé, ne mettez pas la machine hors tension.

Turning OFF the machine deletes the data that is being printed. Be especially careful when receiving fax documents.

Si le papier se déchire

Remove all the paper fragments to prevent them from becoming jammed.

Si le papier se coince à plusieurs reprises

- Tap the paper stack on a flat surface to even the edges of the paper before loading it into the machine. - Check that the paper is appropriate for the machine.

Papier disponible (P. 627)

- Check that no jammed paper fragments remain in the machine.

Ne retirez pas de force le document ou le papier coincé de la machine.

Forcibly removing the paper may damage parts. If you are not able to remove the paper, contact your local authorized Canon dealer. When a Problem Cannot Be Solved(P. 559)

Bourrages papier dans le chargeur (DADF-AY)

If there are documents placed in the feeder, remove them first. Then, follow the procedure below.

REMARQUE

For imageRUNNER 2206N, this procedure is necessary only when the optional DADF-AY is attached.

1 Ouvrez le capot du chargeur.

 2 Turn the dial in the direction of the arrow, and remove the jammed paper from the output tray.  3 Gently close the feeder cover. 4 Lift the feeder, and remove the jammed document.  5 Gently close the feeder. Paper Jams in the Paper Printer 1 1 Remove the jammed paper from the output tray. 

2 Appuyez sur le bouton situé sur le capot gauche de l'unité principale, puis ouvrez le capot gauche.

 

3 Ouvrez le capot gauche du tiroir 1.


4 Retirez le papier coincé.


5 Saisissez la poignée et tirez le tiroir papier 1 jusqu'à la butée.


6 Retirez le papier coincé.


7 Repoussez doucement le tiroir papier 1 dans la machine jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche.

8 Fermez le capot gauche du tiroir 1.

9 Placez votre main à l'endroit indiqué par le symbole de main sur le capot gauche de l'unité principale, puis fermez doucement le capot gauche jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche en position fermée.

Bourrages papier dans le module d'alimentation par cassette-AD

REMARQUE

This procedure is necessary only when the optional Cassette Feeding Module-AD is attached. 1 Remove the jammed paper from the output tray.  Press the button on the left cover of the main unit, and open the left cover.   3 Open the drawer 1 left cover. 

4 Retirez le papier coincé.


5 Fermez le capot gauche du tiroir 1.

6 Ouvrez le capot gauche du tiroir 2.


7 Retirez le papier coincé.

 8 Grip the handle, and pull out the paper drawer 2 until it stops.  9 Remove the jammed paper.  10 Gently push the paper drawer 2 back into the machine until it clicks. 11 Close the drawer 2 left cover. 12 Place your hand where the hand symbol is located on the left cover of the main unit, and then gently close the left cover until it clicks into place in the closed position.

Bourrages papier dans la zone de sortie

1 Remove the jammed paper from the output tray.  2 Press the button on the left cover of the main unit, and open the left cover.   3 Remove the jammed paper.  

ATTENTION

The fixing assembly and its surroundings inside the printer are hot during use. Make sure the fixing assembly is completely cool before removing the jammed paper. Touching the fixing assembly when it is still hot may result in burns.

4 Ouvrez le capot gauche du tiroir 1.


5 Retirez le papier coincé.


6 Fermez le capot gauche du tiroir 1.

7 Placez votre main à l'endroit indiqué par le symbole de main sur le capot gauche de l'unité principale, puis fermez doucement le capot gauche jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche en position fermée.

Bourrages papier dans l'unité recto-verso-C

REMARQUE

For imageRUNNER 2206N, this procedure is necessary only when the optional Duplex Unit-C is attached. 1 Remove the jammed paper from the output tray.  2 Press the button on the left cover of the main unit, and open the left cover.   3 Remove any jammed paper that is protruding from the upper and lower parts of the duplex unit.  

ATTENTION

Some parts of the Duplex Unit-C are subject to high temperatures. When removing jammed paper, take care not to touch anything in this unit.

4 Ouvrez le capot gauche du tiroir 1.


5 Retirez le papier coincé.


6 Fermez le capot gauche du tiroir 1.

Placez votre main à l'endroit où se trouve le symbole de la main sur le capot gauche de l'unité principale, puis fermez doucement le capot gauche jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche en position fermée.

Bourrage papier au niveau de l'ensemble de fixation

1 Remove the jammed paper from the output tray.  Press the button on the left cover of the main unit, and open the left cover.   3 Open the drawer 1 left cover. 

4 Retirez le papier coincé.

 

ATTENTION

The fixing assembly and its surroundings inside the printer are hot during use. Make sure the fixing assembly is completely cool before removing the jammed paper. Touching the fixing assembly when it is still hot may result in burns. 5 Close the drawer 1 left cover. 6 Place your hand where the hand symbol is located on the left cover of the main unit, and then gently close the left cover until it clicks into place in the closed position. Paper Jams in the Multi-Purpose Tray 1 If paper is loaded in the multi-purpose tray, remove the paper.  2 Press the button on the left cover of the main unit, and open the left cover.   3 Remove any jammed paper.  4 Place your hand where the hand symbol is located on the left cover of the main unit, and then gently close the left cover until it clicks into place in the closed position.

Mesures pour chaque message

36WC-0F9 If you cannot send a fax or the memory is full, or you encounter operation problems, a message appears on the display. Find out more information about messages in the following list.

Impossible de modifier le type de destination d'une destination enregistrée dans un groupe.

A selected destination could not be edited because it was registered to Group Dial. - To change the type of destination that is registered to Group Dial, first delete the registered destination from Group Dial. Next, change the destination type, and then register the destination to Group Dial again.

Impossible de se connecter en utilisant la connexion directe.

An error has occurred while starting Access Point Mode. - Set an IP address other than "192.168.22.xx". If you still cannot connect, check the subnet mask setting. For details, contact your Network Administrator. Setting IPv4 Address(P. 275)

Impossible de se connecter en utilisant la connexion directe. Vérifiez la connexion réseau.

Access Point Mode was started without the device being connected to the access point. - Start Access Point Mode after connecting the device with the access point.

Impossible de trouver le point d'accès.

When automatic setting with WPS was attempted, a wireless router could not be detected within a specific period of time. - Connect again paying attention to the time limit. Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 261) Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P. 263) An SSID of a wireless router was entered, but the entry was incorrect. Check the SSID and enter the correct one again. Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 273) Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 269) A wireless router could not be detected due to setting problems of the network to be connected. - Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network. Installation/Settings Problems(P. 539) - If the problem persists, check the security settings of the wireless router.

Impossible d'imprimer les données reçues par fax.

Un document reçu ne peut pas être imprimé pour la raison suivante :

- Replacement period of the toner cartridge is near. A cover is opened. The toner cartridge is not set. - Paper is not set. An original or paper jams. An error has occurred. - Check whether the problems above are occurring. If messages including causes and solutions appear on the display, check the contents.

Impossible de recevoir le fax. Vérifiez que l'expéditeur a bien envoyé le fax.

Le télécopieur du destinataire n'a pas répondu dans les 35 secondes.

- Ask the sender to send the fax again. If you hear a beep, tap to receive the fax. Receiving Faxes(P. 129)

Envoi impossible car plusieurs destinations sont spécifiées.

L'envoi d'un fax à plusieurs destinations est désactivé.

To specify multiple destinations, you need to set to or . For more information, contact your Administrator. Prohibiting Sequential Broadcasting (imageRUNNER 2206iF)(P. 379)

Impossible de spécifier un groupe.

La numérotation de groupe a été spécifiée comme destination après avoir appuyé sur .

- Once you tap , you cannot specify destinations in Group Dial. Tap on the . screen, and specify destinations to send fax documents without selecting .

Impossible d'utiliser Google Cloud Print. L'authentification du serveur a échoué.

Cloud Print n'a pas pu effectuer l'authentification du serveur ou obtenir les informations d'enregistrement.

- Check whether the date and time settings are correctly specified. Date/Time Settings(P. 449)

Impossible d'utiliser Google Cloud Print. Erreur de communication avec le serveur.

Cloud Print est indisponible en raison d'une erreur.

- Check whether the machine is correctly connected to a wired LAN or a wireless LAN. Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 258) Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 259) - A port that is used for Cloud Print may be blocked by a firewall or other protection. Check whether the 5222 port is available with your computer. - If a proxy server is used on the network, check whether the proxy settings on the machine and the server are correct. For details, contact your Network Administrator. Setting a Proxy(P. 369)

Impossible d'utiliser ces paramètres. L'envoi vers la destination spécifiée est restreint.

Sending to the specified destination is restricted. - Change the send restrictions. LDAP Server Authentication(P. 354)

Vérifiez les paramètres d'authentification.

The authentication method set on the machine does not match the authentication method set on the RADIUS server. - Check that the same authentication method is set on this machine and the RADIUS server, and set the correct authentication method. Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication(P. 389)

La copie est restreinte.

Copying is disabled in the Department ID Management. - Log in with a Department ID for which copying is not disabled. For the Department ID and PIN, contact your Administrator. Setting the Department ID Management(P. 345)

Connexion impossible.

For Access Point Mode connection Connection in Access Point Mode failed due to an error. - Wait a few moments and try again. If you still cannot connect, turn OFF the machine, and then turn it back on again. Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 233)

Connexion impossible.

Pour une connexion facile via PC

An error has occurred while starting Easy Connection via PC (cableless setup mode). Press to return to the previous screen, and then try again. - If the same message still appears after retrying , turn OFF the machine, and then turn it back on again.

Connexion impossible. Vérifiez les paramètres PSK.

The network key (PSK) of a wireless router to be connected is not set to the machine correctly. - Check the network key (PSK) of the wireless router, and set it to the machine again. Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 273) Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 266) Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 269) - If the problem persists even after checking the network key, check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network. Installation/Settings Problems(P. 539)

Connexion impossible via le réseau local sans fil. Éteignez puis rallumez l'alimentation principale, puis configurez à nouveau les paramètres.

A connection failed due to an error while setting wireless LAN connection. Restart the machine and set again. - If the problem persists even after restarting the machine, check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network. Installation/Settings Problems(P. 539) - If the problem persists even after checking the wireless LAN connection, check the security settings of the wireless router.

Connexion impossible via WPS. Attendez un moment, puis configurez à nouveau les paramètres.

When automatic setting with WPS was attempted, the connection failed due to an error. - Wait for a while, and set again. If the problem persists, check whether the wireless router supports WPS. If WPS is supported: Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network. Installation/Settings Problems(P. 539) If WPS is not supported: Set using another connecting method. Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 259) Could not detect any connections from wireless devices. It was not possible to detect any mobile device within the predetermined length of time. - Connect again paying attention to the time limit. Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 233) Could not perform cleaning. Paper jammed during cleaning. - Remove the jammed paper, set paper correctly, and perform cleaning again. Clearing Jams(P. 504) The amount of toner required for cleaning the fixing assembly is insufficient. - Cleaning requires toner. Replace the toner cartridge, and perform the cleaning again. Replacing the Toner Cartridges(P. 574) Could not perform Open System authentication. Check the WEP settings. The authentication method of the machine is set to , but that of a wireless router is set to "Shared Key." - Connect again by manually changing the WEP authentication method to . Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 269) The MAC address of the machine is rejected because the MAC address filter is set at a wireless router. - Set the wireless router to permit the MAC address of the machine and your computer. For more information about how to set, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact your manufacturer. To check the MAC address of the machine, select ▷ ▷ ▷ . Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN(P. 283) Could not perform Shared Key authentication. Check the WEP settings. The network key (the WEP key) of a wireless router to be connected is not set to the machine correctly. - Check the network key (the WEP key) of the wireless router, and set it to the machine again. Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 273) Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 269) - Connect again by selecting a wireless router or by manually changing the WEP authentication method to . Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 266) Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 269) The authentication method of the machine is set to , but that of the wireless router is set to "Open System."

Dépannage

- Change the WEP authentication method to "Shared Key" at the wireless router, and connect again. For more information about how to change, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact your manufacturer.

Connexion directe interrompue.

Connection with the mobile device was interrupted. Establish Direct Connection again. Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 233)

Connexion directe interrompue. Vérifiez la connexion réseau.

Connection with the mobile device was interrupted. Establish Direct Connection again. Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 233)

La connexion facile via PC a pris fin car la session a expiré.

A connection to the computer has not been established for 30 minutes since Easy Connection via PC (cableless setup mode) started. - Press l to return to the previous screen, and then try again.

L'envoi de télécopies est restreint.

Faxing is disabled in the Department ID Management. - Log in with a Department ID for which faxing is not disabled. For the Department ID and PIN, contact your Administrator. Setting the Department ID Management(P. 345)

Insérez le tambour.

The drum unit is not inserted. - Insert the drum unit. How to Replace the Drum Unit(P. 581)

Le nombre maximal de périphériques sans fil connectés via une connexion directe a été atteint. Pour connecter d'autres périphériques, terminez certaines connexions actuelles.

The number of directly connected mobile devices is at a maximum. To connect other devices by Direct Connection, disconnect current device(s) and try connecting again. Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 233)

Pas de papier : XXXX*

* or is displayed for XXXX. Paper is not loaded in the paper drawer or the multi-purpose tray. Load the paper. Loading Paper(P. 30) Paper on which reports or lists can be printed is not loaded. Reports or lists can be printed on A4 or Letter size paper. Load A4 or Letter size paper and set its size. Loading Paper(P. 30) Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 45) Paper on which received documents can be printed is not loaded. - Received documents can be printed on A4 or Letter size paper. Load A4 or Letter size paper and set its size. Also, set the paper type to , , or depending on the loaded paper. Loading Paper(P. 30) Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 45)

REMARQUE :

If you print received documents on paper other than A4 or Letter size, some portions of the image may be missing or the image may be divided and printed onto several sheets.

Pas de réponse de la destination.

A network cable may be disconnected, or there may be a problem in a switch. - Check the status of the network cables and switches.

Pas de réponse de l'hôte.

The machine is not connected to a network correctly. - Check the machine and network settings, and connect again. Connecting to a Network(P. 255)

Bourrage papier.

Bourrages papier.

- Remove the jammed paper, and print again (Printing may resume automatically). Clearing Jams(P. 504)

Format papier et paramètres incompatibles

The paper size setting on the control panel does not match the loaded paper size. Match the paper size setting specified in and the size of the paper that is actually loaded. To use the loaded paper Change the setting of to match the loaded paper size. Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 45)

REMARQUE :

If printing from a computer, check whether the paper size setting in the printer driver matches the loaded paper size. To load paper without changing the settings Load the paper with the size that is set to . Loading Paper(P. 30)

Préparez la cartouche de toner.

The toner cartridge needs to be replaced soon. It is recommended to replace the toner cartridge when printing a large volume of documents. Replacing the Toner Cartridges(P. 574)

La numérisation à distance est restreinte.

Scanning that is operated by using a computer is disabled in the Department ID Management. - Log in to the Remote UI in System Manager Mode, display the edit screen of Department ID Management, and select the [Allow Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs] check box. Setting the Department ID Management(P. 345)

Remplacez la cartouche de toner.

The toner cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime. - Replace the toner cartridge with a new one. Replacing the Toner Cartridges(P. 574)

La numérisation est restreinte.

Scanning is disabled in the Department ID Management. - Log in with a Department ID for which scanning is not disabled. For the Department ID and PIN, contact your Administrator. Setting the Department ID Management(P. 345)

Définissez les informations d'authentification correctes.

The client authentication information (key and certificate, user name and password, or CA certificate) is not set correctly. - Check the specified authentication method and authentication information (key and certificate, user name and password, and CA certificate). Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication(P. 389)

**La spécification et l'enregistrement de nouvelles destinations sont restreints.**

Only destinations that are registered in the Address Book can be specified to send a fax or e-mail. To enter a new destination with the control panel, or add or edit it in the Address Book, you need to set to . For more information, contact your Administrator. Limiting Available Destinations(P. 374)

L'ordinateur est restreint.

Scanning that is operated on the control panel is disabled in the Department ID Management. - Log in to the Remote UI in System Manager Mode, display the edit screen of the corresponding Department ID, and select the [Allow Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs] check box. Setting the Department ID Management(P. 345)

La connexion avec le PC a été perdue. Vérifiez la connexion.

The connection to the computer was lost during a scan. - Check the connection between the machine and the computer. Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner(P. 174)

La mémoire est pleine.

A fax could not be sent or received, or an original could not be scanned due to insufficient memory space. - If a sending or printing job is queued, wait until the job is completed.

Dépannage

- If a received document is stored to memory, print or delete it. Storing Received Faxes into Memory (Memory Reception)(P. 137) - If sending an original with many pages, divide it into multiple sections. - If sending a fax, reduce the resolution to scan the original. Adjusting Resolution(P. 125) - If scanning, change the file format to reduce its file size. Scanning from the Machine(P. 175)

La mémoire est pleine. Traitez les travaux d'impression sécurisés.

Memory became full of secured documents that were not printed. - Print the secured documents that are stored in memory. Printing via Secure Print(P. 164)

La mémoire est pleine. La numérisation sera annulée. Voulez-vous imprimer ?

The document being printed contains a page with a very large amount of data. - Select whether to print as far as the portion scanned into memory or to cancel the job. - Copy the document in two or more parts.

Le nombre de caractères saisis est incorrect ou des caractères invalides sont utilisés.

The network key (the WPA/WPA2-PSK or WEP key) of a wireless router is not entered correctly. - Check the network key (the WPA/WPA2-PSK or WEP key) of the wireless router, and set it to the machine again. For more information about how to check the network key, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact your manufacturer. Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 273) Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 266) Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 269)

La clé WEP n'est pas définie correctement. Vérifiez les paramètres WEP.

The network key (the WEP key) of a wireless router to be connected is not set to the machine correctly. - Check the network key (the WEP key) of the wireless router, and set it to the machine again. Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 273) Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 266) Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 269) The authentication method of the machine is set to , but that of the wireless router is set to "Open System." - Connect again by selecting a wireless router or by manually changing the WEP authentication method to . Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 266) Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 269) - Change the WEP authentication method to "Shared Key" at the wireless router, and connect again. For more information about how to change, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact your manufacturer.

Mettez l'appareil hors tension puis sous tension. Si l'appareil ne récupère pas, contactez votre revendeur ou votre technicien de maintenance.

Une erreur est survenue sur la machine.

- Turn OFF the power switch, wait 10 seconds, and turn it back ON. If the problem persists, turn OFF the power switch, disconnect the power cord, and contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line. Be sure to provide the displayed .

Mettez l'interrupteur principal hors tension puis sous tension. Si le problème persiste, remplacez le tambour.

Le tambour a atteint la fin de sa durée de vie.

- Replace the drum unit. How to Replace the Drum Unit(P. 581)

Utilisez l'interface utilisateur distante pour définir les informations nécessaires à l'authentification.

Les paramètres IEEE 802.1X sont incorrects.

- Check whether [Login Name] is set correctly. - Check whether the [Use TLS], [Use TTLS], or [Use PEAP] check box is selected. If using TLS, check whether a "key and certificate" is registered. - If using TTLS or PEAP, check whether a user name and password are set correctly. Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication(P. 389)

Mesures à prendre pour chaque code d'erreur

36WC-0FA If printing is not successful or you cannot send or receive a fax or scanned document, or another error occurs, that error appears on a report or a message on the screen as a three-digit number (error code). Check the following to find out causes and solutions for each error code. For how to print an error report and information in the report, see Printing Reports and Lists(P. 585).  

001

An original jams in the feeder. - Remove the jammed original. Document Jams in the Feeder (DADF-AY)(P. 504)

003

A fax could not be sent or received due to its large data size. - When sending a fax: Reduce the resolution, and scan the original a portion at a time. Adjusting Resolution(P. 125) - When receiving a fax: Ask the sender to divide the original into multiple sections or reduce the resolution before sending.

005

A fax could not be sent because the recipient's machine did not respond within 35 seconds. - When the recipient's machine is turned OFF or the line is busy, a fax may not be sent. Ask the recipient to check the machine status. When sending the fax overseas, insert pauses in the fax number. Sending Faxes(P. 101)

012

A fax could not be sent because the recipient's machine ran out of paper. - Ask the recipient to reload the paper.

018

A fax could not be sent since the recipient's machine did not respond because the line was busy or for other reasons. - When the recipient's machine is turned OFF or the line is busy, a fax may not be sent. Ask the recipient to check the machine status. When sending the fax overseas, insert pauses in the fax number. Sending Faxes(P. 101)

022

Sending of a fax from a computer is disabled. - To send a fax from a computer, you need to set to . For more information, contact your Administrator. Prohibiting PC Faxing (imageRUNNER 2206iF)(P. 375) A fax could not be forwarded because the specified destination was deleted from the Address Book. - Register the forwarding destination again. If the documents that failed to be forwarded remain in memory, you can forward it again. Registering in the Address Book(P. 49) Printing/Resending/Deleting Documents that Failed to be Forwarded(P. 144)

037

Memory is full. If a sending or printing job is queued, wait until the job is completed. - If a received document is stored to memory, print or delete it. Storing Received Faxes into Memory (Memory Reception)(P. 137) - If sending a document with many pages, divide it into multiple sections. - If sending a fax, reduce the resolution to scan the document. Sending Faxes(P. 101) - If several destinations are specified in the fax driver, specify only one destination.

#099

An operation that caused a job to be canceled has been performed. - When you cancel a job, this error code is displayed, but this is not abnormal. Print, send, or receive documents again as necessary.

#701

Authentication failed because an incorrect Department ID or PIN was entered when the Department ID Management was activated. - Enter the correct Department ID and PIN. Continuing operating without entering a Department ID was attempted even though unknown-ID jobs (functions that permit operations without a Department ID and PIN) were disabled in the Department ID Management. - Enable unknown-ID jobs in System Manager Mode in Remote UI. Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown(P. 350)

#752

E-mail sending was impossible because an incorrect SMTP server name was set. - Check the SMTP server name, and correct the setting. Configuring Basic E-Mail Settings(P. 298) Configuring E-Mail Communication Settings(P. 302) E-mail sending was impossible because an incorrect domain name was set. - Check the domain name, and correct the setting. Configuring DNS(P. 316) E-mail sending was impossible because the machine was not connected to a network correctly. - Check whether the machine is properly installed and correctly connected to the network. Installation/Settings Problems(P. 539)

#753

Scanned data could not be sent as e-mail or stored in the shared folder because the LAN cable is disconnected. - Check whether the LAN cable is connected correctly. Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 258)

#755

Scanned data could not be sent as e-mail or stored in the shared folder because TCP/IP was not working correctly. - Check , and set correctly. Network Settings(P. 432) An IP address is not set. Set the IP address correctly. Setting IP Addresses(P. 274) The machine cannot communicate with devices on a network immediately after the machine starts up because the waiting time for the start of the communication is set. - The machine cannot start communicating immediately after it is turned ON. Wait until the set time for passes after turning ON the machine, and send again. Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 315)

#801

When communicating with an SMTP server to send an e-mail, a timeout error occurred from the server. - Check whether SMTP is running on the network correctly. - Check whether the machine is properly installed and correctly connected to the network. Installation/Settings Problems(P. 539) When communicating with the SMTP server, an error returned from the server. - Check whether the SMTP server is set correctly. A destination is not set correctly. - Check whether the destination is set correctly. When storing a scanned original into the shared folder, an error occurred from the folder. - Check whether the shared folder and the computer that has the shared folder are running correctly. The incorrect folder name or password was specified when storing to the shared folder. Check the destination settings.

802

The SMTP/POP3 server name is not set correctly. - Set the SMTP/POP3 server name correctly. Configuring Basic E-Mail Settings(P. 298) Configuring E-Mail Communication Settings(P. 302)

804

No access privileges to access the shared folder are granted. - Assign the privilege for writing data to the storage folder to the sender (user name registered in the destination). For details, contact your Network Administrator. The incorrect folder name was specified when storing to the shared folder. Check the destination settings.

#806

When storing data to a shared folder, an incorrect user name or password was specified. - The same user name and password as those registered in a shared folder must be registered in the Address Book. Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location(P. 307) Registering Address Book from Remote UI(P. 426) When sending an e-mail, an incorrect destination was specified. - Enter the correct e-mail address, and send the message again. If the destination that was registered in the Address Book was used, check whether the e-mail address is correct. Registering in the Address Book(P. 49)

#810

An error has been returned from the POP3 server when sending an e-mail. - Check whether the POP3 server is set correctly. - Check whether your mail server and network are running correctly. For more information, contact your Network Administrator.

#813

The login name or the password that is used on the POP3 server is not set correctly. - Correctly enter login name or the password that is used on the POP3 server.

#816

The number of print pages has reached the upper limit specified for the department. - To reset the print page count, click [Clear Count] on the [Department ID Management] page of Remote UI. Registering/Editing Department ID and PIN(P. 345)

#839

A user name and password that are used for SMTP authentication are not set correctly. - Set the user name and password correctly. Configuring Basic E-Mail Settings(P. 298) Configuring E-Mail Communication Settings(P. 302)

841

When sending an e-mail, an encryption algorithm that is common to the mail server is not present. - Clear the [Use TLS for SMTP] /[Use TLS for POP] check box. Configuring E-Mail Communication Settings(P. 302) - Add the common encryption algorithm to the mail server settings. A TLS server certificate verification error has occurred during communication with the SMTP server. - Check that the CA certificate that signed the TLS server certificate on the SMTP server side is registered to the machine by using the Remote UI. - Check that the TLS server certificate on the SMTP server side is valid. - Check that the TLS server certificate is not a self-signed certificate.

844

TLS encrypted communication to a POP3 server failed when sending an e-mail with POP before SMTP. - Check the TLS encrypted communication settings in the POP3 server. - Clear the [Use TLS for POP] check box for the POP3 server. If the problem persists, clear the [Use POP Authentication Before Sending] check box, and set the communication setting to a setting other than POP before SMTP. Configuring E-Mail Communication Settings(P. 302) When verifying a TLS server certificate to communicate to the POP3 server, a verification error occurred. - Check that the CA certificate that signed the TLS server certificate on the POP3 server side is registered to the machine by using the Remote UI. - Check that the TLS server certificate on the POP3 server side is valid. - Check that the TLS server certificate is not a self-signed certificate.

846

An e-mail could not be sent due to a POP authentication failure. Check the setting, and try again. Configuring E-Mail Communication Settings(P. 302)

#852

The machine turns OFF for some reason. - Check whether the power plug is inserted into an outlet firmly. A document could not be printed because its data size exceeded the machine's upper processing capability. - The machine may not be able to print documents with many pages. Reduce the number of pages per printing, or print when no print job is queued or no document is being printed. If you are still unable to print, check the document data for any defects. Printing was canceled from the computer. - If you cancel an operation when the print data is being sent to the machine from a computer, this error code is displayed, but this is not abnormal. Print again as necessary. A secured document that was left unprinted was deleted. - If the secured document is not printed within a specific period of time (30 minutes by default), it is deleted from memory. Send the secured document again, and print it within the period. Printing via Secure Print(P. 164) Printing using Secure Print was attempted when Secure Print was restricted. - When is set to , you cannot use Secure Print. Set the setting to and print again. Printing via Secure Print(P. 164) - Print without using Secure Print. Basic Printing Operations(P. 156) You tried to print a file that is either corrupted or not supported. Check the file and try again. Basic Printing Operations(P. 156) A PC fax was sent after setting a resolution not guaranteed on the machine. - Reduce the resolution setting in the fax driver. Authentication failed because the secured authentication method is selected for the dedicated port on this machine. - Check the settings of the sender device and send the data again. For details, contact your network administrator. Dedicated Port Authentication Method(P. 441) A document waiting to be sent was canceled. - Send the document again as necessary. If you encounter problems when using the machine, check the items in this section before contacting us. If the problems persist, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

Vérifiez les points suivants :

→ La machine est-elle allumée ? Le cordon d'alimentation est-il branché ?

- If the machine is turned ON but does not respond, turn it OFF, check whether the power cord is connected correctly, and turn it back ON.

→ Le cordon téléphonique, le câble LAN et le câble USB sont-ils correctement connectés ?

- Check whether these cables are connected correctly. Use care not to mistake the phone cord's port for the other cables' ports. Parts and Their Functions(P. 4)

→ Le mode veille est-il activé ?

- If you leave the machine unattended for a specific period of time, it enters sleep mode for power conservation, not allowing you to operate it. To cancel sleep mode, press

→ Un message s'affiche-t-il à l'écran ?

If a problem occurs, a message is displayed. When a Problem Cannot Be Solved(P. 559)

→ L'interrupteur d'alimentation vient-il d'être mis en marche ?

Wait a few moments until the machine starts and warms up.

→ Les paramètres sont-ils correctement configurés ?

- If the machine does not start operating even after has been pressed, the settings may not have been configured properly. Check the configured settings.

→ Le voyant [Erreur] est-il allumé ou clignote-t-il ?

- Make sure that paper is loaded properly in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray. Loading Paper(P. 30) Check if paper is jammed. Clearing Jams(P. 504)

Dépannage

- Turn OFF the power switch, wait 10 seconds, and turn it ON again. If the problem is solved, the [Error] indicator will turn off and the display will return to standby mode. If the [Error] indicator keeps blinking, unplug the power cord and contact your local authorized Canon dealer. When a Problem Cannot Be Solved(P. 559)

→ Le papier n'est pas chargé, ou plusieurs feuilles sont chargées en même temps.

Make sure that the paper is properly loaded. Loading Paper(P. 30) Make sure that the number of paper you have loaded or paper to be used meets the paper requirements. Loading Paper(P. 30) Make sure to load the same size and type of paper into the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray.

→ Des bourrages papier se produisent-ils de manière répétée ?

Make sure that the paper is properly loaded. Loading Paper(P. 30) Make sure that the number of paper you have loaded or paper to be used meets the paper requirements. Loading Paper(P. 30)

Si le problème persiste après vérification

Click the link that corresponds to the problem. Installation/Settings Problems(P. 539) Copy/Printing Problems(P. 543) Faxing/Telephone Problems(P. 546) Miscellaneous Problems(P. 548) See Common Problems(P. 537) also.

NOTE

Icônes dans la description

 Problem with the wireless LAN connection  Problem with the wired LAN connection  Problem with the USB connection

La machine ne peut pas être connectée à un ordinateur via un réseau local sans fil, un réseau local filaire et un câble USB en même temps.

- All three connection types cannot be used at the same time. The following can be used at the same time: a USB cable and a wired LAN, or a USB cable and a wireless LAN.

L'interface utilisateur distante ne s'affiche pas.

  - Are and set to Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 382) Disabling Remote UI(P. 383) - If the machine is connected to a wired LAN, check that the cable is connected firmly and the IP address is set correctly, and then start the Remote UI again. Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 258) Viewing Network Settings(P. 282) - If the machine is connected to a wireless LAN, check that the Wi-Fi indicator is lit and the IP address is set correctly, and then start the Remote UI again. Control Panel(P. 9) Viewing Network Settings(P. 282) - Are you using a proxy server? If so, add the machine's IP address to the [Exceptions] list (addresses that do not use the proxy server) in the Web browser's proxy settings dialog. - Is communication not limited by the firewall on your computer? If IP addresses are or an MAC address is incorrectly entered, the Remote UI cannot be displayed. In that case, you need to use the control panel to set , , or to . Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls(P. 359) IPv4 Address Filter(P. 494) IPv6 Address Filter(P. 494) MAC Address Filter(P. 494)

Impossible d'établir une connexion au réseau.

  - The IP address may not be set correctly. Set the IP address again. Setting IP Addresses(P. 274) - When you connect the machine to a computer via wireless LAN, check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network. When the machine cannot connect to the wireless LAN(P. 541) You are unsure of the set IP address.   Viewing Network Settings(P. 282)

La méthode de connexion ne peut pas être commutée entre un réseau local filaire et un réseau local sans fil.

- Did you select a wired LAN or a wireless LAN on the control panel on the machine as well? This selection is required to have the machine switch to your selection. Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN (P. 257)

Un fax ne peut pas être envoyé ou reçu sur une ligne à fibre optique.

  - The machine is compliant with use on analog lines. When using an optical fiber line or IP phone line, the machine may not work correctly depending on the connection environment or connected devices. In such a case, contact the provider of the optical fiber line or IP phone.

Vous n'êtes pas sûr du SSID ou de la clé réseau du routeur sans fil à connecter. Le SSID ne s'affiche pas à l'écran.

- Check whether the SSID can be found on the wireless router or package box. - Check the SSID or the network key of the wireless router. Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 273)

Le SSID du routeur sans fil à connecter ne s'affiche pas dans la liste des points d'accès.

- Check whether the SSID is correct. Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 273) - If the SSID of the wireless router is hidden (using a stealth mode*), set the SSID to be visible on the wireless router. * A mode that disables the SSID auto-detection of other devices. - Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network. When the machine cannot connect to the wireless LAN(P. 541)

La machine compose un numéro vers une destination de connexion non intentionnelle (si un routeur à connexion commutée est connecté à un réseau).

- If a dialup router does not need to pass broadcast packets, set the dialup router so that the broadcast packets will not pass. If the dialup router needs to pass broadcast packets, check whether the settings are correct. - If a DNS server is located in an external network, set the IP address to be connected, not the host name, even if connecting to the devices that are on the network that is connected to the machine. - If a DNS server is located on a network that is connected to the machine and the information about the devices that are connected to an external network is registered to the DNS server, check whether the settings are correct.

Lorsque la machine ne peut pas se connecter au réseau local sans fil


Vérifiez l'état de votre ordinateur.

- Have the settings of the computer and the wireless router been completed? - Are the cables of the wireless router (including the power cord and LAN cable) correctly plugged in? Is the wireless router turned on? If the problem persists even after checking the above: - Turn off the devices, and then turn them on again. - Wait for a while, and try again to connect to the network.  

Vérifiez que la machine est sous tension.

- If the machine is turned ON, turn it OFF, and then turn it back ON.  

Vérifiez le lieu d'installation de la machine et du routeur sans fil.

- Is the machine too far from the wireless router? - Are there any obstacles such as walls between the machine and the wireless router? - Are there any appliances such as microwave ovens or digital cordless phones that emit radio waves near the machine?  a : 50 m or less  

Effectuez à nouveau l'un des réglages suivants.

Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 261) Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P. 263) Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 266) Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 269) NOTE

Lorsque vous devez configurer manuellement la connexion

If the wireless router is set as described below, manually enter all the required information for the wireless LAN connection ( O Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 269)). - ANY connection refusal is activated. - The WEP key that was automatically generated (hexadecimal) is selected. The stealth mode is activated. * A function in which the wireless router refuses the connection if the SSID on the device to be connected is set to "ANY" or is blank.

Lorsque vous devez modifier les paramètres du routeur sans fil

If the wireless router is set as described below, change the settings of the router. - The MAC address packet filtering is set. - When only IEEE 802.11n is used for the wireless communication, WEP is selected or the WPA/WPA2 encryption method is set to TKIP.

Problème avec la connexion USB

Impossible de communiquer.

- Change the USB cable. If you are using a long USB cable, replace it with a short one. - If you are using a USB hub, connect the machine directly to your computer using a USB cable.

Problème avec le serveur d'impression

Vous ne trouvez pas le serveur d'impression auquel vous connecter.

- Are the print server and computer connected correctly? Is the print server running? - Do you have user rights to connect to the print server? If you are not sure, contact the server administrator. - Is [Network discovery] enabled? Enabling [Network discovery](P. 652)

Vous ne pouvez pas vous connecter à une imprimante partagée.

- On the network, does the machine appear among the printers of the print server? If it is not displayed, contact the network or server administrator. Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server(P. 653) See Common Problems(P. 537) also.

Les résultats d'impression/copie ne sont pas satisfaisants. Le papier plisse ou se froisse.

When You Cannot Print Properly(P. 549)

Vous ne pouvez pas imprimer.

- Can you print a Windows test page? If you can print a Windows test page, there is no problem with the machine or the printer driver. Check the print settings of your application. Printing a Test Page in Windows(P. 654) If you cannot print a test page, check the following according to your environment. Wireless LAN connection - Check the connection status (signal strength) of the wireless LAN. Viewing Network Settings(P. 282)

REMARQUE :

If the connection is poor, try the following. - Change the channel of your wireless LAN router. If you have more than one router, set the channels to be at least five channels apart. If you can change the radio output power of your wireless LAN router, raise the output power. - If your computer is connected to a wireless LAN, are the computer and this machine using the same wireless LAN router SSID? If they are different, reset the wireless LAN connection settings of this machine. Viewing Network Settings(P. 282) Checking the SSID to Which Your Computer is Connected(P. 659) Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 259)

REMARQUE :

When you reset wireless LAN connection settings - As the wireless LAN router, select the one with the SSID to which the computer is connected. Have you selected the correct port? If there is no port to use, create a port. Checking the Printer Port(P. 657) Configuring Printer Ports(P. 290) - Is communication not limited by the firewall on your computer? If IP addresses are incorrectly entered, you will be not able to access the machine. In that case, you need to use the control panel to set or to . Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls(P. 359) IPv4 Address Filter (P. 494) IPv6 Address Filter (P. 494) - Disable security software and other resident software. - Reinstall the printer driver. For more information, see the manuals for the relevant drivers on the online manual website. - Can you print from other computers on the network? If you also cannot print from other computers, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line. Wired LAN connection Have you selected the correct port? If there is no port to use, create a port. Checking the Printer Port(P. 657) Configuring Printer Ports(P. 290) - Is communication not limited by the firewall on your computer? If IP addresses are or an MAC address is incorrectly entered, you will be not able to access the machine. In that case, you need to use the control panel to set, , or to . Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls(P. 359) IPv4 Address Filter (P. 494) IPv6 Address Filter (P. 494) MAC Address Filter (P. 494) - Disable security software and other resident software. - Reinstall the printer driver. For more information, see the manuals for the relevant drivers on the online manual website. - Can you print from other computers on the network? If you also cannot print from other computers, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line. USB connection - Have you selected the correct port? If there is no port to use or you are not sure, reinstall the printer driver. When you reinstall the printer driver, the correct port is created automatically. For more information, see the manuals for the relevant drivers on the online manual website. Checking the Printer Port(P. 657) - Is bidirectional communication enabled? Enable bidirectional communication, and restart the computer. Checking Bidirectional Communication(P. 658) - Disable security software and other resident software. - Connect to another USB port on the computer. - Can you print from a USB connection to another computer? If you also cannot print from other computers, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line. Via print server - Can you print from the print server? If you can print from the print server, check the connection between the print server and your computer. Problem with the Print Server(P. 542) - Disable security software and other resident software. - Reinstall the printer driver. For more information, see the manuals for the relevant drivers on the online manual website. - Can you print from other computers via the print server? If you also cannot print from other computers, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.

L'impression semble lente. *

- Print or delete data in memory. Printing Documents in Memory(P. 138) Checking/Deleting Documents in Memory(P. 138) * When the free space in memory is running low, the processing speed of the machine becomes slow, just as a computer does. There is nothing abnormal.

Vous ne pouvez pas imprimer avec Google Cloud Print.

Using Google Cloud Print(P. 249)

Le démarrage de l'impression prend du temps.

- Did you print to narrow width paper? After you print to narrow width paper, the machine may cool itself to maintain the print quality. As a result, it may take some time before the next job is printed. Wait until the machine is ready to print. Printing will resume when the temperature inside the machine has fallen.

Une feuille blanche est sortie (rien n'est imprimé).

- Did you pull the sealing tape out when loading the toner cartridge? If you did not pull it out, remove the toner cartridge, pull the sealing tape out, and reload the toner cartridge. How to Replace the Toner Cartridges(P. 578)

Problèmes d'envoi

Un fax ne peut pas être envoyé.

- Is an external phone line busy? Wait until the line becomes free. - Has an error occurred? Print and check a Communication Management Report. Communication Management Report(P. 590) Is a telephone line set correctly? - When sending the fax overseas, insert pauses in the fax number. Sending Faxes(P. 101)

Un fax ne peut pas être envoyé avec une destination spécifiée dans l'historique.

Did you turn OFF the machine? If so, the stored history was deleted. Did you set to ? If so, the history before you set was deleted. Did you set to If so, the destinations in the history cannot be specified.

Un fax ne peut pas être envoyé sur une ligne en fibre optique.

- The machine is compliant with use on analog lines. When using an optical fiber line or IP phone line, the machine may not work correctly depending on the connection environment or connected devices. In such a case, contact the provider of the optical fiber line or IP phone.

Les résultats d'un fax envoyé ne sont pas satisfaisants.

- Clean the platen glass or feeder. If cleaning does not improve the results, the recipient's fax machine may be a cause. Platen Glass(P. 564) Feeder(P. 566)

Problèmes de réception

The results of received fax are not satisfactory. Paper creases or curls. When You Cannot Print Properly(P. 549)

Le téléphone et le fax ne peuvent pas être commutés automatiquement.

- Check that the receive mode is set to , or . Free space in memory may be running low. Print or delete data in memory.

Dépannage

Checking/Deleting Documents in Memory(P. 138) Printing Documents in Memory(P. 138)

Un fax ne peut pas être reçu automatiquement.

- Check that the receive mode is set to , , or . Free space in memory may be running low. Print or delete data in memory. Checking/Deleting Documents in Memory(P. 138) Printing Documents in Memory(P. 138)

Un fax ne peut pas être reçu sur une ligne en fibre optique.

- The machine is compliant with use on analog lines. When using an optical fiber line or IP phone line, the machine may not work correctly depending on the connection environment or connected devices. In such a case, contact the provider of the optical fiber line or IP phone. See Common Problems(P. 537) also.

De la vapeur s'échappe de la zone de sortie de la machine.

- Use only dry paper in the machine. Moisture evaporates from damp paper due to the heat generated inside the fixing assembly (it is most likely to occur at low room temperatures). This is not a malfunction, but you can prevent this by using a stack of new unopened paper. However, if you smell something burning, immediately turn OFF the machine, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet, and contact your local authorized Canon dealer. Continued use may lead to a fire or electrical shock.

Des gouttelettes d'eau se forment dans la zone de sortie.

- Use only dry paper in the machine. Moisture evaporates from damp paper due to the heat generated inside the fixing assembly (it is most likely to occur at low room temperatures). This is not a malfunction, but you can prevent this by using a stack of new unopened paper. However, if you smell something burning, immediately turn OFF the machine, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet, and contact your local authorized Canon dealer. Continued use may lead to a fire or electrical shock.

Les paramètres que vous avez spécifiés ne sont pas activés ou enregistrés.

- If you turn OFF the machine immediately after changing settings via the control panel, the settings may not be stored in the machine. After changing the settings, wait for approximately five seconds before turning OFF the machine.

Lorsque vous ne pouvez pas imprimer correctement

36WC-09W If printing results are not satisfactory, or paper creases or curls, try the following solutions. If the problems persist, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.  Streaks Appear on Printouts(P. 551)  White Streaks Appear(P. 551)  Toner Smudges and Splatters Appear(P. 551)  Printouts Are Faded(P. 552)  Printed Pages Have White Specks(P. 552)  Print Density Is Uneven(P. 553)  Printouts Are Grayish(P. 553)  The Toner Adheres to the Hand(P. 554)  Paper Creases(P. 555)  Paper Curls(P. 555)  Printouts Are Skewed(P. 557)  Paper Is Not Fed/Two or More Sheets Are Fed Together(P. 557)

Les résultats d'impression ne sont pas satisfaisants

36WC-09X Dirt inside the machine may affect printing results. Perform care and cleaning to the machine first. Cleaning the Machine(P. 562)

Des traînées apparaissent sur les impressions

 → Are you using appropriate paper? - Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper. Available Paper(P. 627) Loading Paper(P. 30)

Des traînées blanches apparaissent

 → Is toner running low? - Check how much toner is left, and replace the toner cartridges as necessary. Replacing the Toner Cartridges(P. 574)

Des traces de toner et des éclaboussures apparaissent


→ Utilisez-vous un papier approprié ?

- Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper. Available Paper(P. 627) Loading Paper(P. 30)

→ Le toner est-il presque épuisé ?

- Check how much toner is left, and replace the toner cartridges as necessary. Replacing the Toner Cartridges(P. 574)

Les impressions sont délavées


→ Le toner est-il presque épuisé ?

- Check how much toner is left, and replace the toner cartridges as necessary. Replacing the Toner Cartridges(P. 574)

→ Utilisez-vous un papier approprié ?

- Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper. Also, specify the paper size and type settings properly. Available Paper(P. 627) Loading Paper(P. 30) Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 45)

Les pages imprimées présentent des points blancs


→ Utilisez-vous un papier approprié ?

- Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper. Available Paper(P. 627) Loading Paper(P. 30) → Is the drum in the toner cartridge deteriorated? - Replace the toner cartridge with a new one. Replacing the Toner Cartridges(P. 574)

La densité d'impression est inégale

 → Is toner running low? - Check how much toner is left, and replace the toner cartridges as necessary. Replacing the Toner Cartridges(P. 574)

Les impressions sont grisâtres

 → Is in set too dark? Adjust the setting so that density is lighter. Setting Menu List(P. 431) → Is the printer installed where it is subject to direct sunlight or strong light? Install the printer in an appropriate location. → Was the toner cartridge been left in direct sunlight for a long period of time? - Store the toner cartridge in an appropriate location for two to three hours, then try printing again. This may solve the problem. If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge. Replacing the Toner Cartridges(P. 574)

Le toner adhère à la main

 The paper type setting specified is not appropriate. - Select the appropriate paper type setting. Loading Paper(P. 30) → The paper type loaded is not appropriate. - Make sure that the number and type of the paper loaded in the paper drawer meets the paper requirements. Available Paper(P. 627)

Le papier se plisse


→ Le papier est-il chargé correctement ?

- If paper is not loaded below the load limit mark or is loaded obliquely, it may crease. Loading Paper(P. 30)

→ Utilisez-vous du papier ayant absorbé de l'humidité ?

Replace with appropriate paper. Loading Paper(P. 30)

→ Utilisez-vous un papier approprié ?

- Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper. Available Paper(P. 627)

Le papier s'enroule


→ Utilisez-vous un papier approprié ?

- Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper. Also, specify the paper size and type settings properly. Available Paper(P. 627) Loading Paper(P. 30) Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 45) - Change the setting of to a setting for thinner paper. For example, if the current setting is , change it to Printouts Are Skewed  → Do the paper guides align with the edges of the paper? If the paper guides are too loose or too tight, the printouts are skewed. Loading Paper(P. 30) → Is the paper source the multi-purpose tray? - Load the paper into the paper drawer. Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 32) → Are you printing on curled envelopes? Uncurl the envelopes, and print again. Loading Envelopes in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 39)

Le papier n'est pas chargé / Plusieurs feuilles sont chargées ensemble

 → Is paper loaded correctly? - Fan the paper stack thoroughly so that paper is not stuck together. - Check whether paper is loaded correctly. Loading Paper(P. 30) - Check whether the number of sheets of paper loaded is appropriate and whether the appropriate paper is used. Available Paper(P. 627)

Chargement du papier (P. 30)

- Check whether mixed sizes and types of paper are loaded together.

Lorsqu'un problème ne peut pas être résolu

36WC-0A1 If you have read this chapter and a problem is yet to be resolved, contact your authorized Canon dealer.

IMPORTANT

Do not disassemble or repair the machine yourself - If you disassemble or repair the machine yourself, it may not be covered by the warranty.

Informations à préparer avant de contacter Canon

When contacting us, have the following information ready: Product name (imageRUNNER 2206iF / 2206N) Dealer where you purchased the machine - Problem details (performed operations and the results, phenomena, etc.) The error code displayed on the touch panel display

Maintenance

Maintenance 561

Nettoyage de la machine 562

Exterior 563 Platen Glass 564 Feeder 566 Transfer Roller 570 Drum 571 Fixing Assembly 572

Remplacement des cartouches de toner 574

Configuring Purchase Information for Consumables 576 How to Replace the Toner Cartridges 578

Comment remplacer l'unité de tambour 581

Impression de rapports et de listes 585

Fax TX Result Report (imageRUNNER 2206iF) 586 E-Mail/File TX Result Report 588 Communication Management Report 590 RX Result Report (imageRUNNER 2206iF) 592 Address Book List 593 User Data List/System Manager Data List 595 Department ID Management Report 596 PCL Font List 597 Copy/Print Charge Log Report 598

Affichage du compteur 599

Initialisation des paramètres 601

Initializing Address Book 602 Initializing Menu 603 Initializing System Management Settings 604 Initializing All Data/Settings 605

Pièces de rechange 606

This chapter describes upkeep of the machine, including how to clean the machine and initialize settings.

■ Nettoyage de base Nettoyage de l'appareil (P. 562)

 The machine becomes dirty Exterior(P. 563) - Smudge marks appear on originals or printouts Platen Glass(P. 564) Feeder(P. 566) Streaks appear on printouts Fixing Assembly(P. 572)

Remplacement des cartouches de toner

 - If you want to check the remaining toner level Replacing the Toner Cartridges(P. 574) - How to replace toner cartridges How to Replace the Toner Cartridges(P. 578)

■ Impression de rapports et de listes

 - Print out reports describing transmission results, or a list of Address Book information Printing Reports and Lists(P. 585)

Vérification du nombre total de pages imprimées par l'appareil

If you want to check the total page number of printouts Viewing the Counter Value(P. 599)

■ Initialisation des paramètres

If you want to restore the settings Initializing Settings(P. 601)

Nettoyage de l'appareil

36WC-0A3 Regularly clean the machine to prevent deterioration in printing quality and to ensure that you use it safely and easily.

Où nettoyer

 Exterior of the machine and ventilation slots Exterior(P. 563) Rollers inside the feeder Feeder(P. 566) Interior of the machine and fixing assembly Fixing Assembly(P. 572) Platen glass and the underside of the feeder/platen cover Platen Glass(P. 564)  Regularly wipe the exterior of the machine, especially around the ventilation slots, to keep the machine in good condition.

1 Mettez l'appareil hors tension, puis débranchez le cordon d'alimentation de la prise secteur.

- When you turn OFF the machine, data that is waiting to be printed is deleted. Fax documents that were received by using the Memory Reception function, faxes that are waiting to be sent, and reports that are automatically printed after sending and receiving faxes are not deleted.

2 Nettoyez l'extérieur de l'appareil et les fentes de ventilation.

- Use a soft, well-wrung-out cloth dampened with water or a mild detergent diluted with water. To locate the ventilation slots, see External View(P. 5).  3 Wait for the exterior of machine to dry completely. 4 Reconnect the power cord and turn ON the machine. Regularly wipe off the dust from the platen glass and the underside of the feeder/platen cover to prevent smudges to be printed on documents or printouts.

REMARQUE

Nettoyage de la zone de numérisation

To display a message when soiling is detected on the scanning area, set to . 

1 Mettez l'appareil hors tension, puis débranchez le cordon d'alimentation de la prise secteur.

- When you turn OFF the machine, data that is waiting to be printed is deleted. Fax documents that were received by using the Memory Reception function, faxes that are waiting to be sent, and reports that are automatically printed after sending and receiving faxes are not deleted.

2 Ouvrez le capot du chargeur/plateau.


3 Nettoyez la vitre du plateau et le dessous du capot du chargeur/plateau.

Clean the areas with a cloth dampened with water. Then, wipe the area with a soft, dry cloth. - In addition to the platen glass and underside of the feeder/platen cover, make sure to clean and wipe the white strip of plate (a) and the document feed scanning area (b) too.  4 Wait for the cleaned area to dry completely. Gently close the feeder/platen cover. 6 Reconnect the power cord and turn ON the machine. Dust and graphite powder may adhere to the roller inside the feeder and cause smudges to appear on printouts. To clean the feeder, perform the following procedure.

REMARQUE

For imageRUNNER 2206N, this procedure is necessary only when the optional DADF-AY is attached.

Nettoyage manuel du chargeur

Clean the areas with a well-wrung-out cloth dampened with water. Then, wipe the area with a soft, dry cloth.

1 Éteignez l'appareil et débranchez le cordon d'alimentation de la prise secteur.

- When you turn OFF the machine, data that is waiting to be printed is deleted. Fax documents that were received by using the Memory Reception function, faxes that are waiting to be sent, and reports that are automatically printed after sending and receiving faxes are not deleted.

2 Ouvrez le capot du chargeur.


3 Essuyez les rouleaux à l'intérieur du chargeur.

Clean the rollers with a well-wrung-out cloth dampened with water. Then, wipe the area with a soft, dry cloth. 

4 Ouvrez le capot intérieur en le tenant par sa languette avant.


5 Essuyez les rouleaux à l'intérieur du capot intérieur.

Clean the areas with a well-wrung-out cloth dampened with water. Then, wipe the area with a soft, dry cloth. 

6 Nettoyez la partie en plastique transparent du capot intérieur.

Clean the areas with a well-wrung-out cloth dampened with water. Then, wipe the area with a soft, dry cloth. 

7 Fermez doucement le capot intérieur.

Fermez doucement le capot du chargeur.

9 Soulevez le chargeur.


10 Essuyez la zone de numérisation d'alimentation des documents (a) et le rouleau d'alimentation des documents (b).

Clean the areas with a well-wrung-out cloth dampened with water. Then, wipe the area with a soft, dry cloth.   11 Gently close the feeder. 12 Reconnect the power cord and turn ON the machine.

Nettoyage automatique du chargeur

Before you start cleaning, load ten sheets of plain A4 or Letter size paper in the feeder ( Placing Documents(P. 26)). Then follow the procedure below. 1 Press and tap . 2 Tap .

NOTE

You cannot use this function when jobs are stored in memory. 3 Tap . - Cleaning starts. When the message is displayed approximately 30 seconds later, press to return to the screen.

Rouleau de transfert

36WC-0A7 When the transfer roller inside the machine becomes dirty, print quality may deteriorate or dots may appear on printouts. If this happens, follow the procedure below to clean the transfer roller. Note that you cannot clean the transfer roller when the machine has documents waiting to be printed. 1 Press and tap. 2 Tap . 3 Tap . 4 Tap . - Cleaning starts. When the message is displayed approximately 30 seconds later, press to return to the screen. 36WC-0A8 When the drum unit inside the machine becomes dirty, print quality may deteriorate. If this happens, follow the procedure below to clean the drum unit. Note that you cannot clean the drum unit when the machine has documents waiting to be printed. 1 Press and tap. 2 Tap . 3 Tap . 4 Tap . - Cleaning starts. When the message is displayed approximately 30 seconds later, press to return to the screen.

Ensemble de fixation

36WC-0A9 Dirt may adhere to the fixing assembly inside the machine and cause black streaks to appear on printouts. To clean the fixing assembly, perform the following procedure. Note that you cannot clean the fixing assembly when the machine has documents waiting to be printed. To clean the fixing assembly, you need A4 or Letter size paper. Set the paper in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray before performing the following procedure.

NOTE

- Cleaning requires toner. Make sure that there is sufficient toner remaining beforehand. - It takes approximately 90 seconds to clean the fixing assembly. Checking Toner Level(P. 575) Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 36) 1 Press and tap.  2 Tap . 3 Tap . 4 Load paper (A4 or LTR) in the multi-purpose tray, and tap OK> Start>.  A sheet for cleaning the fixing assembly is printed. Follow the instructions on the screen to place the sheet for cleaning with the side to be printed face up in the multi-purpose tray, and then press .  - After cleaning is completed and the message appears, press to return to the screen.

Remplacement des cartouches de toner

36WC-0AA The machine will display a message when a toner cartridge is nearly empty. Note that the print quality becomes poor if you continue printing without taking any action. You can check the remaining toner level on the display. When a Message Appear(P. 574) If Printouts Are Poor in Quality(P. 574) Checking Toner Level(P. 575)

Lorsqu'un message apparaît

The message that is displayed depends on the amount of remaining toner. Depending on which message is displayed, you will need to make sure that you have a replacement toner cartridge ready or replace the toner cartridge. How to Replace the Toner Cartridges(P. 578) Replacement Parts(P. 606)

This message notifies you that a toner cartridge needs to be replaced soon. Shake the toner cartridge to evenly distribute the toner inside the cartridge. Replace the toner cartridge if you see this message before you start to print a large job. 

IMPORTANT

- If this message is displayed, the incoming fax will be stored in the memory without being printed. Also, reports are not printed, even if they are set to be printed automatically. - You can continue printing when this message is displayed, but the print quality may deteriorate.

REMARQUE :

When a message is displayed - If the message is displayed when the machine is receiving a fax or automatic report output is set, received faxes and reports will be stored in the machine so that they do not appear faded after they are printed.

■ Si les impressions sont de mauvaise qualité

If your printouts begin to show any of the following features, your toner cartridge is nearly empty. Replace the nearly empty toner cartridge even if no message is displayed.

① Comment remplacer les cartouches de toner (P. 578)

White streaks appear  Partially faded  Uneven density  Toner smudges and splatters appear Blank space of originals becomes grayish in printouts  

■ Vérification du niveau de toner

You can check the level of remaining toner according to the following, whenever you want to. It is recommended that you check the level before you start to print a large job.   Device Information> Check the toner level 

a Niveau de toner

Displays the amount of remaining toner.

REMARQUE

- The toner level value that is displayed is an approximation, and may differ from the actual value.

LIENS

Replacement Parts(P. 606)

Configuration des informations d'achat pour les consommables

36WC-0AC You can scan and register the documentation of your local authorized Canon dealer (business card, information, etc.). You can print their contact information when you run out of consumables. Registering/Editing Purchase Information(P. 576) Printing Purchase Information(P. 576) Deleting Purchase Information(P. 577)

Enregistrement/Modification des informations d'achat

You can scan and register/edit the documentation of your local authorized Canon dealer (business card, information, etc.). 1 Press and tap

. 2 Tap ▶ . 3 Place the document. ( Placing Documents(P. 26) ) press - If the documentation is already registered, a confirmation screen for overwriting the existing data is displayed.

Impression des informations d'achat

Specify to print purchase information for consumables. The following items are printed: Product Name Genuine Canon Toner Name Documentation data for your local authorized Canon dealer   1 Press and tap

. 2 Tap press

Suppression des informations d'achat

Delete purchase information that you no longer need. 1 Press and tap

. 2 Tap ▶ . 3 Press

Comment remplacer les cartouches de toner

36WC-0AE When replacing the toner cartridge, the procedure is also displayed on the screen. Check the information displayed on the screen in addition to the following procedure.

1 Ouvrez le capot avant.


2 Tout en appuyant sur la languette de déverrouillage de la poignée (a), tournez la cartouche de toner dans le sens de la flèche (dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre).


3 En appuyant sur la languette de déverrouillage, retirez la cartouche de toner.


4 Sortez une nouvelle cartouche de toner de son emballage.

 5 Shake the new toner cartridge 5 or 6 times as shown below to evenly distribute the toner inside the cartridge.  6 Install the toner cartridge. - Make sure that the side of the cartridge with the label is facing up, and push the toner cartridge into the machine as far as it will go. - Support the new toner cartridge with one hand from underneath, while pushing it into the machine with the other hand.  Hold the toner cartridge in place with one hand, and then remove the protective seal by pulling it straight out with the other hand. 

IMPORTANT

Pull out the seal slowly, otherwise the toner may scatter and soil your clothes or skin. - Make sure that you pull out the seal completely, otherwise print errors may occur. - Make sure that you pull the seal straight out. Pulling the seal upwards or downwards may break the seal. If the seal breaks inside the toner cartridge and cannot be removed completely, the toner cartridge cannot be used. - Throw away the seal after removing it from the toner cartridge.

8 Tournez la cartouche de toner dans le sens de la flèche (dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre).


IMPORTANT

Turn the toner cartridge fully until it locks into place.

9 Fermez le capot avant.

REMARQUE :

If you cannot close the front cover Make sure that the toner cartridge is inserted properly. Forcing it closed may cause damage.

Comment remplacer le tambour

36WC-0AF When the drum unit needs to be replaced, a message appears on the display. Follow the procedure below to replace the drum unit.

1 Appuyez sur le bouton du capot gauche, puis ouvrez le capot gauche.


IMPORTANT

To avoid damage to the drum unit, always open the left cover wider than 50 mm .

2 Ouvrez le capot avant.


3 Tournez le levier de déverrouillage.


4 Tournez une vis et retirez-la.


En tenant la poignée du tambour, sortez l'unité en la tirant légèrement vers le haut.


6 Retirez un nouveau tambour de son emballage.


IMPORTANT

Do not remove the protective cover before attaching the drum unit to the machine.

7 Tenez le capot de protection du tambour et alignez-le avec les fentes à l'intérieur de l'unité principale.

 8 While holding the protective cover, insert the drum unit. 

IMPORTANT

Be careful not to touch the blue-green part of the drum. 9 Remove the protective cover of the drum unit.  10 Turn a screw and attach it. 

11 Tournez le levier de déverrouillage en position verticale.


12 Vérifiez le compteur, puis saisissez la date et la valeur du compteur sur l'étiquette du compteur du tambour.


13 Apposez l'étiquette du compteur (a) sur le tambour.


14 Fermez le capot avant et le capot gauche.

Impression de rapports et de listes

36WC-0AH You can check fax results and the machine settings by printing reports and lists.

Rapport de résultat d'envoi de télécopie

You can check the communication result of sending faxes. Fax TX Result Report (imageRUNNER 2206iF) (P. 586)

Rapport de résultats d'envoi e-mail/fichier

You can check the communication results of sending e-mails and saving documents to the shared folder. Mail/File TX Result Report(P. 588)

Rapport de gestion des communications

You can check the logs of sent and received documents. Communication Management Report(P. 590)

Rapport de résultats de réception

You can check the logs of received fax documents. RX Result Report (imageRUNNER 2206iF)(P. 592)

Liste du carnet d'adresses

You can check the list of destinations registered in the Address Book. Address Book List(P. 593)

Liste des données utilisateur / Liste des données du gestionnaire système

You can check the list of the settings ( Setting Menu List(P. 431) as well as the content that has been registered in the machine. User Data List/System Manager Data List(P. 595)

Rapport de gestion des ID de service

Print the page total and page restriction for copies/scans/prints/total prints. If Department ID Management is set, the department ID is also printed. Department ID Management Report(P. 596)

Liste des polices PCL

You can check the list of available fonts for the machine. PCL Font List(P. 597)

Rapport de journal des frais de copie/impression

You can check the counter information. Copy/Print Charge Log Report(P. 598)

Rapport de résultats d'envoi de fax (imageRUNNER 2206iF)

36WC-0AJ You can check the communication result of sending faxes by printing a Fax TX Result Report. The report can be printed either every time a transmission is completed or only when a sending error occurs. 

Select the print setting 

a

Select if you do not want to print Fax TX Result Reports.

b

Select to print a Fax TX Result Report every time you send a document.

Select to print a Fax TX Result Report only when a sending error occurs.

Exemple :


a Résultat

"OK" indicates that the transmission was completed successfully while "NG" and three digits (an error code) indicates that the transmission failed ( Countermeasures for Each Error Code(P. 530)).

REMARQUE

Pour imprimer une partie d'un document fax sur le rapport

When you select or , a part of a fax document can be included in the report. Tap to . However, Send jobs originating from the fax driver are omitted from this report.   

Rapport de résultat d'envoi par e-mail/fichier TX

36WC-0C5 You can check the communication results of sending e-mails and saving documents to the shared folder by printing an E-Mail/File TX Result Report. The report can be printed either every time a transmission is completed or only when a sending error occurs.

REMARQUE

For imageRUNNER 2206N, this function can only be used when the optional Color Send Kit is attached. 

Select the print setting 

a

Select if you do not want to print E-Mail/File TX Result Reports.

b

Select to print an E-Mail/File TX Result Report every time you send a document.

Select to print an E-Mail/File TX Result Report only when a sending error occurs.

Exemple :


a Envoyé/Erreur

For e-mail, E-Mail/File TX Result Reports indicate the transmission result between the machine and the mail server, not between the machine and the destination address. Even if the transmission fails, a three-digit error code will not be printed. To check the error code, print a Communication Management Report ( 忍 Communication Management Report(P. 590)).

Rapport de gestion des communications

36WC-0AK You can check the fax and e-mail logs of sent and received documents by printing a Communication Management Report. The report can be printed automatically after every 40 transmissions, or you can print it manually.

REMARQUE

For imageRUNNER 2206N, this function can only be used when the optional Color Send Kit is attached. - You cannot select if is set for in .  ▶

▶ ▶ ▶ Select the print setting 

Impression automatique (40 transmissions)>

Tap to print the report automatically after every 40 transmissions, or if you do not want to print the report automatically.

b <Séparer TX/RX> (imageRUNNER 2206iF)

Tap to print sent and received reports separately, or to print both reports on one sheet.

Imprimer le rapport manuellement

 ▶

▶ ▶ ▶ Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine▶▶

Exemple :


a Résultat

"OK" indicates that the transmission was completed successfully while "NG" and three digits (an error code) indicates that the transmission failed ( Countermeasures for Each Error Code(P. 530)). For e-mail, Communication Management Reports indicate the transmission result between the machine and the mail server, not between the machine and the destination address.

Rapport de résultat de réception (imageRUNNER 2206iF)

36WC-0AL You can check the logs of received fax documents by printing an RX Result Report. The report can be printed either every time a transmission is completed or only when a receiving error occurs. 

Select the print setting 

a

Select if you do not want to print RX Result Reports. Select to print an RX Result Report every time you receive a document.

Select to print an RX Result Report only when a receiving error occurs.

Exemple :


a Résultat

"OK" indicates that the transmission was completed successfully while "NG" and three digits (an error code) indicates that the transmission failed ( Countermeasures for Each Error Code(P. 530)). 36WC-0AR You can check the list of destinations registered in the Address Book as , , and by printing an Address Book List.

REMARQUE

For imageRUNNER 2206N, this function can only be used when the optional Color Send Kit is attached.  ▶

▶ ▶

▶ Select the registration type that you want to print▶ Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine▶ OK▶Yes> Example:  Example:  Example: 

LIENS

Registering in the Address Book(P. 49) Registering Address Book from Remote UI(P. 426)

Liste des données utilisateur / Liste des données du gestionnaire système

36WC-0AS You can check the list of setting items ( Setting Menu List(P. 431) ) and current settings registered in the machine. This list includes the paper size and type registered in the machine, the print settings of , , , and . 

or Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine OK> Yes

Exemple :

 

REMARQUE

The User Data List does not include the setting information for and . To check all setting items, print the System Manager Data List.

LIENS

Fax TX Result Report (imageRUNNER 2206iF)(P. 586) E-Mail/File TX Result Report(P. 588) Communication Management Report(P. 590) RX Result Report (imageRUNNER 2206iF)(P. 592) Loading Paper(P. 30)

Rapport de gestion des identifiants de service

36WC-0AU When Department ID Management is enabled, you can print a report to check the total number of pages that were copied, printed, and scanned for each Department ID. The report enables you to monitor usage and improve management. 

Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine OK> Yes>

Exemple :

**********Department ID Management Report********************
Color Scan			Copy		Black & White Scan
Dept. ID	Page Total	Page Limit	Page Total	Page Limit	Page Total	Page Limit
0000111	0		0		0
1234567	0		0		1
	2		0		0

LIENS

Setting the Department ID Management(P. 345) You can check the list of available fonts for the machine.  ▶

▶ ▶ ▶ Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine▶ ▶

Exemple :


Rapport de journal des frais de copie/impression

36WC-0AW You can check the counter numbers which are used for the total counter (charge counter). 

Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine OK>

Exemple :

 36WC-0AX You can check total for the number of pages used for printouts. This total includes faxes, reports, and lists, in addition to copies and printouts of data from computers.   Select the item you want to check.

Check Counter

Check Device Configuration

112: Total (Black & white/L...

113: Total (Black & white/s...

501: Scan (Total 1)

301: Print (Total 1)

NOTE

Each item of the counter is counted under the following conditions. - Depending on the settings performed by the local authorized Canon dealer, the following counter may not be displayed or counter not listed below may be displayed.

Number	Counter Name	Counted Items	Counted Number per One Printed/Scanned Sheet *1
		Job Type	Size		Number of Printed/ Scanned Sides
			Large *2	Small *3	One-Sided	Two-Sided
101	Total 1	All Print Jobs	1	1	1	2
102	Total 2	All Print Jobs	2	1	1	2
103	Total (Large)	All Print Jobs	1	0	1	2
112	Total (Black & White/Large)	All Print Jobs	1	0	1	2
113	Total (Black & White/Small)	All Print Jobs	0	1	1	2
201	Copy (Total 1)	Copy Jobs	1	1	1	2
202	Copy (Total 2)	Copy Jobs	2	1	1	2
203	Copy (Large)	Copy Jobs	1	0	1	2
301	Print (Total 1)	All Print Jobs (Except Copy and Receive Print Jobs)	1	1	1	2
501	Scan (Total 1)	All Scan	1	1	1	2
		Jobs

*1 The counted number per one printed/scanned sheet for each item on the counter is as follows: "number in the Size (Large or Small) column" × "number in the Number of Printed/Scanned Sides (One-Sided or Two-Sided) column" Example: For large, double-sided print, the number added to < 102 : Total 2 > is 2 × 2 = 4 . *2 Large: Standard size larger than A3/11" x 17". *3 Small: Standard size smaller than B4/LGL.

Initialisation des paramètres

36WC-0AY You can restore the following settings: Initializing Address Book (P. 602) Initializing Menu(P. 603) Initializing System Management Settings(P. 604) Initializing All Data/Settings(P. 605)

Initialisation du répertoire

36WC-0C0 You can restore the settings of the Address Book. Note that all the information registered in the Address Book will be deleted after initializing.

NOTE

- For imageRUNNER 2206N, this function can only be used when the optional Color Send Kit is attached. - If a screen for entering a System Manager ID and PIN is displayed, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, tap , and press ID. Setting the System Manager ID(P. 343) 

LIENS

Registering in the Address Book(P. 49) Registering Address Book from Remote UI(P. 426) You can restore the settings of the machine ( 口 Setting Menu List(P. 431)).

NOTE

- To initialize the settings of and , see Initializing System Management Settings(P. 604). - If a screen for entering a System Manager ID and PIN is displayed, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, tap , and press ID. Setting the System Manager ID(P. 343)  Select the item you want to initialize 

Éléments à initialiser

Select the setting you want to initialize.

b

Initializes all the settings.

Initialisation des paramètres de gestion du système

36WC-0C2 You can restore the settings of the machine ( Setting Menu List(P. 431)). Some settings require restarting the machine to be initialized.

NOTE

If a screen for entering a System Manager ID and PIN is displayed, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, tap , and press ID. Setting the System Manager ID(P. 343)  Select the item that you want to initialize Restart the machine if necessary. 

Éléments à initialiser

Select the setting you want to initialize.

b

Initializes all the settings.

NOTE

To initialize the settings in , you can also tap .

Initialisation de toutes les données/paramètres

36WC-0C3 To make changes to registered data and settings all at once such as when changing the installation location of the machine, you can delete registered data and initialize all settings ( Setting Menu List(P. 431) ) together at the same time. You are required to restart the machine after initializing all data/settings.

NOTE

- If a screen for entering a System Manager ID and PIN is displayed, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, tap , and press ID. Setting the System Manager ID(P. 343)  and restart the machine.

Pièces de rechange

36WC-0EL This section describes the replacement parts (consumables/consumable parts) used by the machine. Purchase the replacement parts from the authorized Canon dealer that you purchased the machine from. Follow the precautions when handling and storing the replacement parts.

Consommables d'origine

- Canon continuously develops technology innovations in Canon manufactured Toner, Cartridge, and Parts, specifically designed for use in Canon Multi-Functional machines. Experience the benefits of optimal print performance, print volume and high quality outputs, achieved through Canon's new advanced technologies. Therefore, the use of Canon genuine consumables is recommended for your Canon Multi-Functional machine  CANON Genuine TONER, CARTRIDGE & PARTS

REMARQUE

- For information on handling and storing the replacement parts, follow the precautions indicated in the Getting Started included with the machine. - You can check the level of remaining toner. Checking Toner Level(P. 575)

Cartouche de toner de remplacement


C-EXV

Confirm that the code on the front cover of the machine and the one on the package of the genuine toner are the same.

Model name	Genuine Canon toner
imageRUNNER 2206iF / 2206N	● Canon C-EXV 42 Black Toner

IMPORTANT

Méfiez-vous des toners contrefaits

- Please be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toners in the marketplace. Use of counterfeit toner may result in poor print quality or machine performance. Canon is not responsible for any malfunction, accident or damage caused by the use of counterfeit toner. For more information, see global.canon/ctc.

- Unité tambour

Product Name	Model Number
imageRUNNER 2206iF / 2206N	• Canon C-EXV 42 Drum Unit

Annexe

Annexe 608

Logiciel tiers 609

Points forts des fonctionnalités 610

Going Green and Saving Money 611 Improving Efficiency 614 Going Digital 616 So Much More 619

Spécifications 622

Main Unit 623 Feeder (DADF-AY) 626 Available Paper 627 Cassette Feeding Module-AD 630 Duplex Unit-C 631 Fax Function (imageRUNNER 2206iF) 632 Scan Function 633 Printer Functions 634 Management Functions 636 System Environment 637 Network Environment 639

Options 640

Optional Equipment 641 System Options 644

Manuels et leur contenu 646

Utilisation du guide de l'utilisateur 647

Screen Layout of User's Guide 648 Viewing User's Guide 651

Opérations Windows de base 652

Avis 660

Annexe

36WC-0C6 This chapter contains technical specifications of this machine, instructions on how to use the User's Guide, disclaimers, copyright information, and other important information for customers.

Logiciels tiers

36WC-0EF For information related to third-party software, click the following icon(s). 

Points forts

36WC-0C7 This section describes tips for leveraging the features of the machine by category. You can make use of the features according to your intended purposes and operating environment. Going Green and Saving Money(P. 611) Improving Efficiency(P. 614) Going Digital(P. 616) So Much More(P. 619)

Écologie et économies

36WC-0C8

Facile pour l'environnement, facile pour votre portefeuille

There are lots of ways to cut back on paper, toner, power, and expenses.  01  2-Sided Printing You can use 2-sided printing for copies, print jobs sent from your computer, and even incoming faxes. Because you'll only be using half the paper you would otherwise, you can cut your paper costs in half.  To make 2-sided copies: 口 2 -Sided Copying(P.81) To print 2-sided documents from your computer: Printing from a Computer(P. 156) To print 2-Sided incoming faxes: Print on Both Sides(P. 470)

REMARQUE

For imageRUNNER 2206N, this function can only be used when the optional Duplex Unit-C is attached. 02  Print Multiple Pages on a Single Sheet To really start saving paper, shrink multiple pages onto a single sheet - 2 or 4 pages for copies, and up to 16 pages for print jobs sent from your computer.  To copy multiple pages of a document onto one sheet: Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (2 on 1/4 on 1)(P. 84) To print multiple pages of a document onto one sheet: Printing from a Computer(P. 156) 03  Sleep Mode For saving energy and money, a sleep mode that powers down a machine when nobody is using it has become an essential feature. This machine will enter sleep mode automatically, and can also be put to sleep whenever you want. Press once to put the machine to sleep. Press it again to instantly wake the machine back into action.  For more information about this function, see Entering Sleep Mode(P. 66). 04  Save Toner Got multi-page documents or drafts that don't need presentation-quality printing? There's a setting that uses less toner. Give it a try and save toner and money.  For more information about this function, see Printing from a Computer(P. 156). 05  Send Faxes Directly From Your Computer (imageRUNNER 2206iF) Fax documents directly from your computer. Why bother printing and then faxing? It just wastes paper and costs you money. You can save yourself this trouble and cut costs with paperless faxing.  For more information about this function, see Sending Faxes from Your Computer (PC Fax)(P. 151). 06  Screen Your Faxes (imageRUNNER 2206iF) You can have incoming faxes held in memory and then check them yourself before they're printed. Just print what you need and delete the rest, saving paper and toner.  For more information about this function, see Storing Received Faxes into Memory (Memory Reception) (P. 137).

De petites choses qui font gagner beaucoup de temps

Here are some simple operations that can make complicated tasks more efficient.  01  Address Book Entering fax and e-mail addresses in the Address Book saves you the inconvenience of entering them number-by-number, letter-by-letter every time you have something to send. By registering destinations that you frequently send to , you can quickly display them anytime. You can save your Address Book data on your computer and feel secure knowing that your important contact information is backed up.  To use the machine to enter addresses in the Address Book: Registering in the Address Book(P. 49) To use your computer to enter addresses in the Address Book: Registering Address Book from Remote UI(P. 426) To select an Address Book address as a fax destination: Specifying from Address Book(P. 110) To select an Address Book address as an e-mail destination: Specifying from Address Book(P. 210) To save Address Book addresses on your computer or to export Address Book addresses from your computer to the machine, using the Remote UI: Saving/Loading Address Book from Remote UI(P. 422)

REMARQUE

- For imageRUNNER 2206N, this function can only be used when the optional Color Send Kit is attached. 02  Remote Management with Remote UI Remote UI lets you manage a lot from your computer, all without having to go over to the machine. Configure settings and keep an eye on the machine's status with an intuitive, easy-to-understand Web browser interface that you'll master immediately. Save your time and energy for things other than taking care of the machine.  For more information about this function, see Using Remote UI(P. 408). 03  Make Print Settings Quickly with Intuitive Operation You can easily specify the page layout as well as binding position, switching between 1-sided and 2-sided printing, etc. intuitively on the preview image in the printer driver. The simple click-operation allows you to conveniently make settings while viewing how settings are applied.  For more information, see Printing from a Computer(P. 156). 36WC-0CA

De rames de papier à des données compactes

There is so much more you can do after you go digital.  01  Scan and E-Mail E-mail scanned documents without even turning on your computer. Just convert your scanned document into an e-mail attachment right from the machine. If you're one of those people who'd rather send a fax than mess around with a computer, this feature is for you.  For more information about this function, see Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 187).

REMARQUE

- For imageRUNNER 2206N, this function can only be used when the optional Color Send Kit is attached. 02  Scan and Share Say you've got a paper copy of a report for a company-wide meeting. Scan it, convert it, and now everyone can see it. It's saved directly in a shared folder on your network, so there's no need to print out copies and pass them out. Once you start talking about hundreds of pages of documents that everyone needs, there's just no other way to go.  For more information about this function, see Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder(P. 194).

REMARQUE

- For imageRUNNER 2206N, this function can only be used when the optional Color Send Kit is attached.

03


Numérisez uniquement ce dont vous avez besoin

What if you're scanning a whole page of a newspaper but all you're really interested in is a headline and a photo? Use ScanGear MF. You can select what you want from a preview, and then have the scanner disregard the rest. Otherwise you'll have to use an editing program to crop out everything you don't need.

IMPORTANT

Using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce certain documents, and the use of such images as scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced by your product, may be prohibited by law and may result in criminal and/or civil liability. If you are uncertain about the legality of using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce any particular document, and/or of the use of the images scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced, you should consult in advance with your legal advisor for guidance.  For more information about this function, see Configuring Scan Settings in ScanGear MF(P. 181).

04


PDF consultables

Searching of text in a PDF can be done with a "searchable PDF*". By scanning an original with both text and images, text portions are converted by OCR into text data. In addition to being able to search for text information, you can also copy required portions into an Excel spreadsheet or Word document in Microsoft Office. Eliminate the need to type in customer data, addresses, etc. from scratch. * You cannot create a searchable PDF in the macOS environment.  For more information about this function, see Scanning from a Computer(P. 178). 05  Add Images to a Work in Progress Some applications work with the machine to let you easily import scanned images directly into documents you're working on. This way you can skip the steps of opening a separate application just for receiving the scanned images and then exporting them to the application you're really using.  For more information about this function, see Scanning Using an Application(P. 179). 36WC-0CC

Exactement ce que vous cherchiez

There are a variety of features for whatever you need to do - at home, in the office, or even on the road.  01  Using a smartphone/tablet At times such as when you want to quickly print out a proposal you completed on a tablet while travelling to a business destination, or scan materials handed out at a meeting using a smartphone, Canon PRINT Business or Canon Print Service comes in handy. Even in environments without a wireless LAN router, you can connect to the machine with a mobile device wirelessly and directly. PCless, quick, and easy! An even broader range of possibilities for work/play with functionality made for this age of speed.    For more information, see Linking with Mobile Devices(P. 230). 02  Easy Printing with Google Cloud Print Hook up to Google Cloud Print with your laptop or cell phone, send your data, and out come your printed documents. With this machine, Google Cloud Print, and your mobile device, print whenever you want from wherever you want.

Google

 Cloud Print Ready For more information about this function, see Linking with Mobile Devices(P. 230). 03  Keep Your Printouts Private Normally, when you print something from your computer, it comes out of the printer right away. However, if you have sensitive documents, this may not be what you want. Just use secure printing and no one will be able to print your documents without entering your password on the machine's control panel. Don't let your confidential documents lie exposed on the tray for everyone to see.  For more information about this function, see Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print) (P. 163). 04  Go Wireless No cables, easy installation, simple maintenance. If you've got a WPS wireless LAN router, bypass the settings process altogether and be ready to go before you know it. Enjoy the kind of clutter-free and easy to use document system that you can only get from wireless. Compatible with IEEE 802.11b/g/n for stress-free wireless, and also supports WEP and WPA/WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP) for tighter security.  For more information about this function, see Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 259). 05  Get Faxes Wherever You Go (imageRUNNER 2206iF) Never worry about missing a fax when you're out of the office. Set a forwarding destination and any fax that comes in on the machine will go right to you. Better yet, make the forwarding destination the e-mail address for your tablet or mobile.  For more information about this function, see Forwarding Received Faxes(P. 140). 06 

Créer des affiches

Blow up a regular one-sheet printout and make an exceptionally large poster. A large poster will be printed out on nine sheets. Put them together in a 3x3 grid, and voila!  For more information about this function, see Printing from a Computer(P. 156). 07 

Créer des livrets

Sometimes your documents deserve better presentation than a staple in the upper-left corner. Making booklets is easy. The print driver will take care of the page positioning for you. All you have to do is fold the pages and staple them along the middle.  For more information about this function, see Printing from a Computer(P. 156). Specifications are subject to change without notice for product improvement or future release. Machine Specifications Main Unit(P. 623) Feeder (DADF-AY)(P. 626) Available Paper(P. 627) ■ Specifications of Optional Equipment Cassette Feeding Module-AD(P. 630) Duplex Unit-C(P. 631) Functional Specifications Fax Function (imageRUNNER 2206iF)(P. 632) Scan Function(P.633) Printer Functions(P. 634) Management Functions(P. 636) ■ Environment To Use the Machine System Environment(P. 637) Network Environment(P. 639)

REMARQUE

For information on paper sizes and types for each paper source, see "Available Paper(P. 627)".

Name	Canon imageRUNNER 2206iF / 2206N
Type	Desktop
Color Supported	Black and White
Resolution for Reading	600 dpi x 600 dpi
Resolution for Writing	600 dpi x 600 dpi
Number of Tones	256
Acceptable Originals	Up to 297.0 mm x 431.8 mm
Copy Size/Copy Paper	Paper Sizes • Max (Paper drawer) : 11" x 17" • Min (Paper drawer) : A5R • Max (Multi-purpose tray): 297.0 mm x 431.8 mm • Min (Multi-purpose tray): 95.0 mm x 148.0 mm Margin TOP: • When copying via the platen glass 3.0 mm ± 1.5 mm • When copying via the feeder 3.0 mm ± 2.0 mm Left: • 3.0 mm ± 2.0 mm Paper Weight • Paper drawer: 64 g/m² to 90 g/m² • Multi-purpose tray: 64 g/m² to 128 g/m²
Paper Type	Available Paper(P. 627)
Warm-Up Time*1	After Powering ON 13 seconds Returning from the Sleep mode 4.3 seconds
First Copy Time (A4)	7.4 seconds
Copy Speed *2 (A4)	22 sheets/minute
Scanning Speed (A4)	Full Color: 3.42 seconds Black and White: 1.71 seconds
Magnification	25% to 400% (in 1% increments)
Paper Feeding System/Capacity *3	Paper drawer 300 sheets (64 g/m²)/250 sheets (80 g/m²) x 1 Multi-purpose tray A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, Letter, LetterR, Statement, StatementR 100 sheets (64 g/m²)/80 sheets (80 g/m²) A3, B4, 11" x 17", Legal 50 sheets (64 g/m²)/50 sheets (80 g/m²) Transparency 50 sheets Label 1 sheet Envelope 10 sheets
Paper Output System/Capacity *3	A4, B5, Letter 250 sheets (64 to 80 g/m²) Other sizes 100 sheets (64 to 80 g/m²)
Multiple Copies	999 sheets
Power Source	AC 220 V - 240 V, 2.7 A, 50/60 Hz
Power Consumption *1	Maximum Power Consumption 1.5 kW During Sleep Mode 2.0 W With the Main Power Turned OFF 0.1 W
Dimensions (W x D x H)	When the platen cover is attached (one paper drawer attached) 622 mm x 589 mm x 499 mm When the Feeder (DADF-AY) is attached (one paper drawer attached) 622 mm x 606 mm x 600 mm
Weight	When the platen cover is attached (one paper drawer attached) Approx. 28.7 kg*4
	When the Feeder (DADF-AY) is attached (one paper drawer attached) Approx. 35.5 kg*4
Installation Space	See "Getting Started". ►Manuals and Their Contents(P. 646)
Memory Capacity	RAM: 512 MB

*1 May vary depending on the environment and conditions under which the machine is being used. *2Copy/print speeds are measured based on internal testing using A4 size paper copied/printed with 100% copy/print ratio to original on one-sided paper. Internal testing involved continuously copying/printing the same one page of content on plain paper (copy speed is tested by copying on the platen glass). Copy/print speeds may vary depending on paper type, paper size or paper feeding direction. The device may automatically pause or slow down in order to adjust printer condition such as controlling temperature of a certain unit or limiting impact to image quality during continuous copying/printing. *3May vary depending on the installation environment and paper to use. *4The toner cartridge is included.

REMARQUE

- For imageRUNNER 2206iF, the feeder (DADF-AY) is standard equipment. For imageRUNNER 2206N, the feeder (DADF-AY) is optional.

Original Feeding Mechanism	Automatic 2-Sided Document Feeder
Original Size /Type	Size of Originals • Max: 297.0 mm x 431.8 mm • Min: 148.0 mm x 128.0 mm Weight of Originals • Continuously scanning 1-Sided Originals / 2-Sided Originals: 52 to 105 g/m² • Scanning a single original 1-Sided Originals: 37 to 128 g/m² 2-Sided Originals: 52 to 128 g/m²
Original Tray Capacity (A4)	50 sheets (80 g/m²)
Original Scanning Speed	Copying (600 dpi x 600 dpi, A4) 1-Sided Scanning: 22 pages/minute 2-Sided Scanning: 8 pages/minute Scanning* 1-Sided Scanning: 13.6 pages/minute 2-Sided Scanning: 6.8 pages/minute
Dimensions (W x D x H)	565 mm x 521 mm x 125 mm
Weight	Approx. 7.0 kg

*May vary depending on the environment and conditions under which the machine is being used.

Papier disponible

36WC-0EW The paper types that can be used with this machine are shown in the following table.

Formats de papier pris en charge

Available :Unavailable

Paper Sizes	Multi-Purpose tray	Paper Printer 1	Cassette Feeding Module-AD (Optional)	Automatic 2-Sided Printing *1
A3 *2	✓	✓	✓	✓
B4 *2	✓	✓	✓	✓
A4 *2	✓	✓	✓	✓
A4R	✓	✓	✓	✓
B5	✓	✓	✓	✓
B5R	✓	✓	✓	✓
A5	✓	—	✓	—
A5R	✓	✓	—	✓
11" x 17" *2	✓	✓	✓	✓
Legal *2	✓	✓	✓	✓
Letter *2	✓	✓	✓	✓
LetterR	✓	✓	✓	✓
Statement	✓	—	✓	—
StatementR	✓	✓	—	✓
Executive	✓	—	—	✓
Oficio	✓	✓	—	✓
Oficio (Ecuador)	✓	✓	—	✓
Oficio (Brazil)	✓	✓	—	✓
Oficio (Mexico)	✓	✓	—	✓
Oficio (Argentina)	✓	✓	—	✓
Letter (Argentina)	✓	✓	—	✓
LetterR (Argentina)	✓	✓	—	✓
Letter (Government)	✓	✓	—	✓
LetterR (Government)	✓	✓	—	✓
Legal (Government)	✓	✓	—	✓
Foolscap (Australia)	✓	✓	—	✓
Foolscap	✓	✓	—	✓
8K	✓	✓	✓	✓
16K	✓	✓	✓	✓
16KR	✓	✓	✓	✓
F4A	✓	✓	—	✓
Legal (India)	✓	✓	—	✓
Custom *3	✓	—	—	—
Envelope No.10 (COM10) *4	✓	—	—	—
Envelope Monarch *4	✓	—	—	—
Envelope ISO-C5 *4	✓	—	—	—
Envelope DL *4	✓	—	—	—

*1Automatic 2-sided printing is available without replacing paper. The Duplex Unit-C is necessary depending on the model you are using. *2Can be used for printing reports or lists.

Annexe

*3Custom paper size of 95.0 to 297.0 mm in width and 148.0 to 431.8 mm in length can be loaded in the multi-purpose tray. ^*4 Make sure the flap is folded.

Types de papier pris en charge

Chlorine-free paper can be used with this machine.  Available :Unavailable

Paper Type	Multi-Purpose tray	Paper Printer 1	Cassette Feeding Module-AD (Optional)	Automatic 2-Sided Printing *1
Plain 1	✓	✓	✓	✓
Plain 2	✓	✓	✓	✓
Heavy 1	✓	—	—	—
Heavy 2	✓	—	—	—
Recycled	✓	✓	✓	✓
Color	✓	✓	✓	✓
Pre-Punched *2	✓	✓	✓	✓
Bond	✓	—	—	—
Transparency	✓	—	—	—
Labels	✓	—	—	—
Envelope	✓	—	—	—

*1Automatic 2-sided printing is available without replacing paper. The Duplex Unit-C is necessary depending on the model you are using. *2usable paper sizes are A4, A4R, Letter, LetterR.

Module d'alimentation à cassette - AD

36WC-0F4

Paper Sizes	• Max: 11" x 17" • Min: A5
Paper Weight	64 g/m2to 90 g/m2
Paper Drawers Capacity*	300 sheets (64 g/m2)/250 sheets (80 g/m2)
Dimensions (W x D x H)	580 mm x 575 mm x 116.8 mm
Weight	Approx. 5.75 kg

*May vary depending on the installation environment and paper to use.

NOTE

- For imageRUNNER 2206iF, the Duplex Unit-C is standard equipment. - For imageRUNNER 2206N, the Duplex Unit-C is optional.

Paper Sizes	A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11" x 17", Legal, Letter, LetterR, StatementR, Executive, Oficio, Oficio (Ecuador), Oficio (Brazil), Oficio (Mexico), Oficio (Argentina), Letter (Argentina), LetterR (Argentina), Letter (Government), LetterR (Government), Legal (Government), Foolscap (Australia), Foolscap, 8K, 16K, 16KR, F4A, Legal (India)
Paper Weight	64 g/m2to 90 g/m2*
Dimensions(W x D x H)	381 mm x 118 mm x 218 mm
Weight	Approx. 1.25 kg

*Depending on the conditions of use, these values may differ.

Fonction Fax (imageRUNNER 2206iF)

36WC-0EX

Telephone Line Used *1	Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)
Scan Line Density	Normal G3: 8 pels*2/mm x 3.85 line/mm Fine G3: 8 pels*2/mm x 7.7 line/mm Superfine G3: 8 pels*2/mm x 15.4 line/mm
Transmission Speed *3	Super G3: 33.6 kbps G3: 14.4 kbps
Compression Method	MH, MR, MMR
Transmission Type	Super G3, G3
Sending Original Sizes	A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5*4, B5R*5, A5*5, A5R*5
Receiving Paper Sizes	A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, 11" x 17", Legal, Letter, Statement
Transmission Times	Approx. 3.0 seconds/page*6

*1Depending on your locale or your telephone connection, you may be unable to perform data communication. In this case, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line. *2Pels stands for picture elements (pixels). *3With the Automatic Fallback function. *4Sent as B4. *5Sent as A4. ^*6 Based on ITU-T (ITU Telecommunication Standardization Sector) Standard Chart No. 1, JBIG standard mode. 36WC-0EY

Type	Color Scanner
Original Scanning Size (Max)	Scanning on Platen Glass Same as "Acceptable Originals" in "Main Unit" ○Main Unit(P. 623) Scanning from Feeder Same as "Size of Originals" in "Feeder" ○Feeder (DADF-AY)(P. 626)
Resolution (Max)	600 dpi x 600 dpi
Scanning Speed	Scanning on Platen Glass Same as "Scanning Speed" in "Main Unit" ○Main Unit(P. 623) Scanning from Feeder Same as "Original Scanning Speed" in "Feeder" ○Feeder (DADF-AY)(P. 626)
Interface	USB USB 1.1 Full-Speed, USB 2.0 Hi-Speed Wired LAN 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX (IEEE 802.3 compliant) Wireless LAN IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n
Protocol Supported *	SMB (TCP/IP), SMTP, TCP/IP, USB
Output Format (Push Scan)	TIFF (MMR), JPEG (Single/Page), PDF

* Some formats are not supported depending on the function. UFR II-LT Printer Function

Type	Internal
Print Size	Available Paper(P. 627)
Print Speed	Same as "Copy Speed" in "Main Unit" Main Unit(P. 623)
Resolution	Data Processing 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Page Description Language (PDL)	UFR II-LT
Protocol Supported	TCP/IP: LPD, Port9100, IPP, IPPS, WSD
Resident Fonts	None
Interface	USB USB 1.1 Full-Speed, USB 2.0 Hi-Speed Wired LAN 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX (IEEE 802.3 compliant) Wireless LAN IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n

■ PCL Printer Function

Type	Internal
Print Size	Available Paper(P. 627)
Print Speed	Same as "Copy Speed" in "Main Unit" Main Unit(P. 623)
Resolution	Data Processing 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Page Description Language (PDL)	PCL6, PCL5e
Protocol Supported	TCP/IP: LPD, Port9100, IPP, IPPS, WSD
Resident Fonts	45 Roman
Interface	USB USB 1.1 Full-Speed, USB 2.0 Hi-Speed Wired LAN 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX (IEEE 802.3 compliant) Wireless LAN IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n

Fonctions d'authentification

The machine communicates with LDAP servers using LDAPv3. - UTF-8 is the supported character encoding used when the text data is transmitted between the machine and an LDAP server.

■ Paramètres du pare-feu

Up to 4 IP addresses (or ranges of IP addresses) can be specified for both IPv4 and IPv6. Up to 10 MAC addresses can be specified.

■ Enregistrement des clés et certificats

- If you install a key or CA certificate from a computer, make sure that they meet the following requirements:

Format	• Key: PKCS#12*1 • CA certificate: X.509 DER/PEM
File extension	• Key: ".p12", ".pfx" • CA certificate: ".cer"
Public key algorithm (and key length)	• RSA (512 bits*2, 1024 bits, 2048 bits, 4096 bits) • ECDSA (P256, P384, P521)
Certificate signature algorithm	• RSA: SHA1*3, SHA256, SHA384*4, SHA512*4, MD2*5, MD5*5 • ECDSA: SHA1*3, SHA256, SHA384, SHA512

*1Requirements for the certificate contained in a key are pursuant to CA certificates. *2The signature algorithm is available only for SHA1-RSA or SHA256-RSA. *3Available only for a generated key and certificate signature request (CSR) or installation from the Remote UI. *4Available only when the key algorithm is 1024 bits or more. *5Available only for installation from the Remote UI.

NOTE

- The machine does not support use of a certificate revocation list (CRL). System Environment 36WC-0F2

System Environment for WSD Scan	Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows 10
System Requirements for the Remote UI *1	Windows Windows Vista / 7 / 8.1 / 10: Internet Explorer 11 or later Windows 10: Edge macOS Mac OS X 10.6 and later Safari 3.2.1 and later iOS Safari Android Chrome
File Servers Available as Destinations for File Transmission	SMB Windows Vista SP2 / 7 / 8 / 8.1 / 10 Windows Server 2008 / Server 2012 Solaris Version 2.6 and later Red Hat Linux 7.2 and later Mac OS X 10.6 and later SMTP Sendmail 8.12.5 and later Sendmail 8.13.x Sendmail 8.14.x Exchange Server 2003 / 2007 / 2010 Lotus Domino 6.x / 7.x / 8.x
Types of LDAP servers	Windows Server 2003 R2 SP2 with Active Directory Windows Server 2008 SP2 with Active Directory Windows Server 2012 with Active Directory Windows Server 2012 R2 with Active Directory eDirectory V8.8 SP7 or later Lotus Domino R8.5 or later
System Requirements for the Send Function Setting Tool	Windows 7 / 8.1 / 10 / Server 2003 / Server 2008: Internet Explorer 7 or later Windows 10: Edge
System Requirements for the User's Guide	Windows Internet Explorer 9 and later Microsoft Edge Firefox Firefox ESR

• Chrome*2 macOS • Safari • Firefox • Chrome*2 Linux • Firefox ios • Safari*2 Android • Chrome*2

*1Before changing the settings of the machine, set your Web browser to enable all cookies and use JavaScript. *2Only when viewing manuals on the Internet. Common Specifications

Protocol Supported

TCP/IP • Frame type: Ethernet II • Print applications: LPD, Raw, IPP, IPPS, WSD, Mopria, Google Cloud Print, AirPrint, Windows10 Mobile Print

■ Wired LAN Specifications

Interface

10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX (RJ-45)

■ Wireless LAN Specifications

Standard	IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n
Transmission Scheme	IEEE 802.11b (Modulation system: DS-SS) IEEE 802.11g (Modulation system: OFDM method) IEEE 802.11n (Modulation system: OFDM method)
Frequency Range	2.412 GHz to 2.472 GHz
Maximum Radio-Frequency Power Transmitte	15.9 dBm
Communication Mode	• Infrastructure Mode • Access Point Mode
Security (encryption method)	Infrastructure Mode • 128 (104)/64 (40) bit WEP • WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP) • WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP) Access Point Mode WPA2-PSK (AES-CCMP)
Connection Method	WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), Manual setup

Options

36WC-0F5 Installing options on the machine enables you to use more features. ■ Knowing What Types of Options are Available Optional Equipment(P. 641) System Options(P. 644) Looking for Optional Equipment by Purpose Loading multiple sheets of original Feeder (DADF-AY)(P. 641) Adding a Paper Printer / Paper drawers that can be installed to the machine Optional Paper Drawer(P. 641) Sending Faxes Manually, Making or Receiving Phone Calls Handset (imageRUNNER 2206iF)(P. 642) Printing 2-sided documents Duplex Unit-C(P. 642)

Équipement en option

36WC-0EO The functionality of the machine can be expanded by installing optional equipment to the machine. Install the optional equipment to meet your needs such as by loading a large amount of paper. Feeder (DADF-AY)(P. 641) Optional Paper Drawer(P. 641) Handset (imageRUNNER 2206iF)(P. 642) Duplex Unit-C(P. 642)

Chargeur (DADF-AY)

The Feeder can be attached to the imageRUNNER 2206N in place of the platen cover. Automatically feeds documents into the machine for scanning. When two or more sheets are loaded in the feeder, documents can be scanned continuously. 

NOTE

- For imageRUNNER 2206iF, the feeder (DADF-AY) is standard equipment. For imageRUNNER 2206N, the feeder (DADF-AY) is optional.

Bacs à papier en option

You can install the optional paper drawer to the machine.

Module d'alimentation cassette-AD

In addition to the provided standard paper drawer and multi-purpose tray, you can install the optional paper drawer to the machine. The optional paper drawer can hold up to 250 sheets (80 g/m²). 

Cassette FL-BB

You can replace the standard paper drawer of the machine with the optional paper drawer. The optional paper drawer cannot be attached to the optional Cassette Feeding Module-AD. 

NOTE

- For how to load paper into the paper drawer, see Loading Paper(P. 30). For available paper sizes, see Available Paper(P. 627).

Combiné (imageRUNNER 2206iF)

By connecting the Handset to the machine, you can make and receive calls the same way as an ordinary telephone. For instructions on how to configure the FAX/TEL function, see Receiving Faxes(P. 129).

NOTE

The design of the Handset may differ. - If the Handset emits howling, turn off the alarm sounds and reduce the volume of fax communication sounds. Adjusting the Volume(P. 63) 

1 Ring volume switch

You can set the volume of the telephone ring to high, low, or off.

Passer un appel téléphonique

When making a telephone call, pick up the handset and tap <Fax> , then dial the telephone number. After using the handset, put the handset back on the cradle.

Unité duplex C

The Duplex Unit-C (1) enables you to use the 2-sided mode for copying or printing. 

NOTE

- For imageRUNNER 2206iF, the Duplex Unit-C is standard equipment. - For imageRUNNER 2206N, the Duplex Unit-C is optional. The machine performance can be enhanced even more by installing system options.

Kit d'envoi couleur

This option enables you to scan documents and send them directly from the machine as e-mail attachments. You can also scan documents and store them in folders on computers for sharing. For more information about the function, see Convenient Scanning with a Machine-Based Operation(P. 186).

NOTE

- For imageRUNNER 2206iF, the Color Send Kit is standard equipment. - For imageRUNNER 2206N, the Color Send Kit is optional.

Enregistrement de licence

To activate certain system options, you need to obtain a license key and register the key to the machine.

Obtention d'une clé de licence

You can obtain a license key by using a web browser. Access the License Management System (http:// www.canon.com/lms/licenses) and follow the procedure. As a part of the procedure, you are required to enter the following numbers.

Numéro d'accès à la licence

Check the license access number provided on the License Access Number Certificate that is included in the package of the option.

Numéro de série de la machine

Check the serial number of the machine from the control panel. 

Enregistrement d'une clé de licence

1 Select in the screen. l Screen(P. 12) 2 Select . If the login screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN. Logging on to the Machine(P. 18) 3 Select .

4 Confirmez le message à l'écran, puis sélectionnez OK>.


5 Saisissez la clé de licence à l'aide des touches numériques, puis sélectionnez .

Registration starts. Wait until the message is displayed.

6 Sélectionnez .

7 Redémarrez la machine.

Manuels et leur contenu

36WC-0E1 The manuals listed below are included with the machine. Refer to them as necessary.

Getting Started		Read this manual first. It describes the flow of settings to perform before using this machine. PDF
User's Guide (This Manual)		This manual describes all the functions of the machine in a manual that is viewed using a Web browser. You can browse information by category or enter a keyword to search for pages on a specific topic. Using User's Guide(P. 647)
Send Setting Guide		This manual describes how to configure settings and prepare for sending scanned images by e-mail and saving scanned images to shared folders.

Utilisation du guide de l'utilisateur

36WC-0F7 The User's Guide is a manual that can be viewed on your computer or mobile device and it describes all of the functions of the machine. You can search from your intended use or enter a keyword to quickly find the page you are looking for. The section describes the screen layout of the User's Guide and how to read the Guide. You can specify how the appearance of the User's Guide looks.

■ Disposition de l'écran du guide de l'utilisateur

This section describes the screens configuring the User's Guide and how to use the on-screen buttons. Screen Layout of User's Guide(P. 648)

Affichage du guide de l'utilisateur

This section describes the meaning of the marks used in the User's Guide, how the keys on the control panel and the buttons on the computer display are represented, and other matters that help you understand the information contained in the User's Guide. Viewing User's Guide(P. 651)

■ Spécification de l'apparence du guide de l'utilisateur

You can change the character size used in the User's Guide, and switch the screen layout to fit to the device you use to view the User's Guide.

REMARQUE

- If you do not have access to Adobe Reader to view the manuals in PDF format, try other programs such as PDF Preview developed by Vivid Document Imaging Technologies.

Comment trouver le sujet que vous recherchez

Rechercher dans le contenu

- You can find the page you are looking for by selecting the topic from the "Contents" on the left side of the screen.

Rechercher par mot-clé

- Perform a search by entering a keyword, such as "envelope" or "toner cartridge," and the pages containing the keyword are displayed. You can find the page you are looking for from those results. You can also enter phrases such as "connecting to a network." The keyword search also supports the AND Boolean to search for multiple keywords. For the organization of the search screen and how to operate the search screen, see Search(P. 649).

Disposition de l'écran du guide de l'utilisateur

36WC-0F8 The User's Guide is divided into different screens, and the content of each screen varies.

Page de garde

Appears when User's Guide is started. 

a

Click to also display all of the sections under the chapters. Click to return to the previous display.

b :/Q

Click to toggle the display between the contents and search. When the table of contents is displayed, each click on switches between hiding and showing the display. When the search display is shown, each click on switches between hiding and showing the display.

C

Click to set parameters to determine how the User's Guide is displayed, such as character size or layout. Click to display information on how to view the User's Guide, how to perform a search, and other information. Click to display the previous or following topic.

[Notice]

Click to view important information you should know when using the machine.

Page de sujet

Contains information about how to configure and use the machine. 

Navigation

See what chapter topic you are currently viewing.

#

Click to jump to the corresponding page. To return to the previous page, click "Back" on your Web browser.

C

Click to display the hidden detailed descriptions. Click to close the detailed descriptions.

#

Click to return to the page top.

Recherche

Click to display the search window. Contains a text box to perform a search by keyword and find the page you are looking for. 

Saisissez un ou plusieurs mots-clés ici

Enter a keyword or keywords and click to display the search results. You can search for pages containing all the keywords by separating the keywords by a space (blank). Also you can only search for pages containing an exact phrase by enclosing the keywords in double quotation marks.

Résultat de recherche

Displays the search results of the pages that contain the specified keywords. From the results, locate the page you are looking for and click the topic title of the page.

REMARQUE :

The specified keyword(s) are shown in bold in the search results.

Consultation du guide de l'utilisateur

36WC-0E6 This section describes the marks, buttons, screens, and other items used in the User's Guide. The warnings are also given in the "Important Safety Instructions" in the "Getting Started" included with the machine. See also these instructions.

Repères

Cautions regarding safety, restrictions and cautions regarding the handling of the machine, useful tips, and other information are indicated using the marks below. 

ATTENTION

Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the machine safely, always pay attention to these cautions.  Indicates an operation that must not be performed. Read these items carefully, and make sure not to perform the described operations.

IMPORTANT

Indicates operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these items carefully to operate the machine correctly, and avoid damage to the machine or property.

NOTE

Indicates a clarification of an operation, or contains additional explanations for a procedure.

ASTUCE

Indicates useful functions or tips for using the machine.

Touches et boutons utilisés dans ce manuel

Keys on the control panel and buttons on the computer display appear in the following notation:

Type	Example
Keys on the control panel	◇
	◇
Settings displayed on the control panel	<Timer Settings>
	<Paper jammed.>
Buttons and other text interfaces displayed on the computer display	[Preferences]

Écrans d'ordinateur utilisés dans ce manuel

Unless otherwise noted, displays used in the User's Guide are those for the imageRUNNER 2206iF. Depending on the model or operating system you are using, the appearance of the displays used in this manual may slightly differ from the actual displays. Also, the appearance of drivers and software may differ depending on their version.

Illustrations utilisées dans ce manuel

Unless otherwise noted, illustrations used in the User's Guide are those for the imageRUNNER 2206iF. When differences are significant, multiple illustrations are used with the model names, such as "imageRUNNER XXXX."

Opérations de base sous Windows

36WC-0E9 Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 652) Enabling [Network discovery](P. 652) Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server(P. 653) Displaying the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] Screen(P. 654) Printing a Test Page in Windows(P. 654) Checking the Bit Architecture(P. 655) Checking the Computer Name(P. 656) Checking the Printer Port(P. 657) Checking Bidirectional Communication(P. 658) Checking the SSID to Which Your Computer is Connected(P. 659) When Printing or Sending from the Windows Store App(P. 659)

NOTE

Depending on the computer that you use, the operation may differ.

Affichage du dossier Imprimantes

Windows 7/Server 2008 R2 [Start] select [Devices and Printers]. Windows 8/Server 2012 Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel] [View devices and printers]. Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2 Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel] [View devices and printers]. Windows 10 [ ] select [Windows System] [Control Panel] [Hardware and Sound] [Devices and Printers]. Windows Server 2008 [Start] select [Control Panel] double-click [Printers]. Windows Server 2016 Right-click [ ] select [Control Panel] [Hardware] [Devices and Printers].

Activation de la découverte du réseau

Enable [Network discovery] to view the computers on your network. Windows 7/Server 2008 R2 [Start] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced sharing settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery]. Windows 8/Server 2012 Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced sharing settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery]. Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2 Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced sharing settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery]. Windows 10 [ ] select [Windows System] [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced sharing settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].

Windows Server 2008

[Start] select [Control Panel] double-click [Network and Sharing Center] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].

Windows Server 2016

Right-click [ ] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced sharing settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].

Affichage des imprimantes partagées dans le serveur d'impression

1 Ouvrez l'Explorateur Windows.

Windows 7/Server 2008

[Start] select [All Programs] or [Programs] [Accessories] [Windows Explorer].

Windows 8/Server 2012

Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [File Explorer].

Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2

Right-click [Start] select [File Explorer].

Windows 10/Server 2016

Right-click [ ] select [File Explorer].

2 Sélectionnez le serveur d'impression dans [Réseau] ou [Mes emplacements réseau].

- To view computers on the network, you may need to turn on network discovery or search the network for computers.  Shared printers are displayed. 

■ Affichage de l'écran [Configuration des logiciels/Manuels]

If your computer does not display the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] screen after inserting the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM, follow the procedure below. The CD-ROM/DVD-ROM drive name is indicated as "D:" in this manual. The CD-ROM/DVD-ROM drive name may differ depending on the computer you are using.

Windows 7/Server 2008

[Start] enter "D:\MInst.exe" in [Search programs and files] or [Start Search] press the [ENTER] key.

Windows 8/Server 2012

Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen [Run] enter "D:\MInst.exe" click [OK].

Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2

Right-click [Start]▶[Run]▶enter "D:\MInst.exe"▶click [OK].

Windows 10

Enter "D:\MInst.exe" in the search box click [D:\MInst.exe] displayed as the search result.

Windows Server 2016

Click [ ] enter "D:\MInst.exe" click [D:\MInst.exe] displayed as the search result.

■ Impression d'une page de test sous Windows

You can check whether the printer driver is operational by printing a test page in Windows. 1 Load A4 size paper in the paper drawer. Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 32) 2 Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 652) 3 Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or [Properties].  4 Click [Print Test Page] in [General] tab.  The test page is printed.

Vérification de l'architecture binaire

If you are not sure whether your computer is running 32-bit or 64-bit Windows follow the procedure below.

1 Affichez [Panneau de configuration].

Windows 7/Server 2008 [Start] select [Control Panel]. Windows 8/Server 2012 Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel]. Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2 Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel]. Windows 10/Server 2016 Proceed to step 2.

2 Affichez [Système].

Windows 7/8/Server 2008 R2/Server 2012 Click [System and Maintenance] or [System and Security] [System]. Windows 10/Server 2016 Click [ ] > [Settings] > [System] > select [About]. Windows Server 2008 Double-click [System].

3 Vérifiez l'architecture binaire.

For 32-bit versions [32-bit Operating System] is displayed. For 64-bit versions [64-bit Operating System] is displayed. 

■ Vérification du nom de l'ordinateur

1 Affichez le [Panneau de configuration].

Windows 7/Server 2008 [Start] select [Control Panel]. Windows 8/Server 2012 Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel]. Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2 Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel]. Windows 10 Click [ ] select [Windows System] [Control Panel]. Windows Server 2016 Right-click [ ] select [Control Panel].

2 Affichez [Système].

Windows 7/8/10/Server 2008 R2/Server 2012/Server 2016 Click [System and Maintenance] or [System and Security] [System]. Windows Server 2008 Double-click [System].

3 Vérifiez le nom de l'ordinateur.

 Checking the Printer Port 1 Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 652) 2 Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or [Properties].  3 In the [Ports] tab, check that the port is selected correctly. 

REMARQUE

If you are using a network connection and have changed the machine's IP address - If [Description] for the selected port is [Canon MFNP Port], and the machine and the computer are on the same subnet, then the connection will be maintained. You do not need to add a new port. If it is [Standard TCP/IP Port], you need to add a new port. Configuring Printer Ports(P. 290) ■ Checking Bidirectional Communication 1 Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 652) 2 Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or [Properties].  3 In the [Ports] tab, make sure that the [Enable bidirectional support] check box is selected. 

■ Vérification du SSID auquel votre ordinateur est connecté

If your computer is connected to a wireless LAN network, click , , , or in the system tray to display the SSID of the connected wireless LAN router. 

■ Lors de l'impression ou de l'envoi à partir de l'application Windows Store

Windows 8/Server 2012

Display the charms on the right side of the screen Tap or click [Devices] The driver that you use [Print].

Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2

Display the charms on the right side of the screen Tap or click [Devices] [Print] The driver that you use [Print].

Windows 10

Tap or click [Print] on the application The driver that you use [Print].

REMARQUE

- If you print a document or send a fax using this method, only a limited number of functions are available. - If the message [The printer requires your attention. Go to the desktop to take care of it.] is displayed, go to the desktop and perform the required operations. This message appears when the machine is set to display the user name when printing documents, sending faxes or similar instances.

Logo IPv6 Ready

 The protocol stack included in this machine has obtained the IPv6 Ready Logo Phase-1 established by the IPv6 Forum.

■ Informations produit requises par le RÈGLEMENT (UE) N° 801/2013 de la COMMISSION modifiant le règlement (CE) N° 1275/2008

Power consumption of the product in networked standby if wired network ports are connected and all wireless network ports are activated (if they are available at the same time).

Model Name	Power consumption of the product in networked standby
imageRUNNER 2206iF / 2206N	3.0 w or less

REMARQUE

- The above value(s) are the actual values for single machine, chosen arbitrarily, and may therefore vary from the value of the machine in use. Optional network ports are not connected and/or activated in the measurement.

Directives DEEE et batteries

  Only for European Union and EEA (Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein) These symbols indicate that this product is not to be disposed of with your household waste, according to the WEEE Directive (2012/19/EU), the Battery Directive (2006/66/EC) and/or national legislation implementing those Directives. If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above, in accordance with the Battery Directive, this indicates that a heavy metal (Hg = Mercury, Cd = Cadmium, Pb = Lead) is present in this battery or accumulator at a concentration above an applicable threshold specified in the Battery Directive. This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g., on an authorized one-for-one basis when you buy a new similar product or to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic equipment (EEE) and batteries and accumulators. Improper handling of this type of waste could have a possible impact on the environment and human health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated with EEE. Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will contribute to the effective usage of natural resources. For more information about the recycling of this product, please contact your local city office, waste authority, approved scheme or your household waste disposal service or visit www.canon-europe.com/weee, or www.canoneurope.com/battery.

Informations environnementales

Réduire votre impact environnemental tout en économisant de l'argent

Consommation électrique et temps d'activation

The amount of electricity a device consumes depends on the way the device is used. This product is designed and set in a way to allow you to reduce your electricity costs. After the last print it switches to Ready Mode. In this mode it can print again immediately if required. If the product is not used for a time, the device switches to its Power Save Mode. The devices consume less power (Watt) in these modes. If you wish to set a longer Activation Time or would like to completely deactivate the Power Save Mode, please consider that this device may then only switch to a lower energy level after a longer period of time or not at all. Canon does not recommend extending the Activation Times from the optimum ones set as default.

Energy Star

The Energy Star® programme is a voluntary scheme to promote the development and purchase of energy efficient models, which help to minimise environmental impact. Products which meet the stringent requirements of the Energy Star® programme for both environmental benefits and the amount of energy consumption will carry the Energy Star® logo accordingly.

Types de papier

This product can be used to print on both recycled and virgin paper (certified to an environmental stewardship scheme), which complies with EN12281 or a similar quality standard. In addition it can support printing on media down to a weight of 64g / m² . Lighter paper means less resources used and a lower environmental footprint for your printing needs.

Impression recto verso (produits avec impression recto verso standard uniquement)

Duplex printing capability enables you to print on both sides automatically, and therefore helps to reduce the use of valuable resources by reducing your paper consumption. The duplex function has been auto enabled during the set up and driver installation and Canon strongly recommends that you do not disable this function. You should continue to use the duplex function to reduce the environmental impact of your work with this product at all times.

■ Avertissements

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTY AS TO MARKETABILITY, MERCHANTIBILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. CANON INC. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL.

Droits d'auteur

Reproduction of the contents of this document in whole or in part without prior permission is prohibited.

Marques déposées

Adobe, Acrobat, and Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Apple, Bonjour, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Mac, macOS, OS X and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc. Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows Server, Internet Explorer, Word and Excel are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. iOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license. Google Cloud Print, Google Chrome and Android are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc. Mopria®, the Mopria® Logo and the Mopria® Alliance logo are registered trademarks and service marks of Mopria Alliance, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. This product contains the Universal Font Scaling Technology or UFST® under license from Monotype Imaging, Inc. UFST® is a trademark of Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. UFST: Copyright © 1989 - 1996, 1997, 2003, 2004, 2008, all rights reserved, by Monotype Imaging Inc.  The Adobe PDF logo is a trademark or registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and other countries. Copyright © 2008 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Protected by U.S. Patents 6,185,684; 6,205,549; 7,213,269; 7,272,628; 7,278,168; Patents pending in the U.S. and other countries. All instances of the name PostScript in the text are references to the PostScript language as defined by Adobe Systems Incorporated unless otherwise stated. The name PostScript also is used as a product trademark for Adobe Systems' implementation of the PostScript language interpreter. Except as otherwise stated, any reference to a "PostScript printing device," "PostScript display device," or similar item refers to a printing device, display device or item (respectively) that contains PostScript technology created or licensed by Adobe Systems Incorporated and not to devices or items that purport to be merely compatible with the PostScript language. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Adobe LiveCycle® Policy Server, InDesign, PostScript, the PostScript Logo, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Portions of this software are copyright © 2007 The FreeType Project (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved. All other product and brand names are registered trademarks, trademarks or service marks of their respective owners. V_180517 This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License, Version 1.1. This license is copied below, and is also available with a FAQ at: http://scripts.sil.org/OFL SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE Version 1.1 - 26 February 2007

PRÉAMBULE

The goals of the Open Font License (OFL) are to stimulate worldwide development of collaborative font projects, to support the font creation efforts of academic and linguistic communities, and to provide a free and open framework in which fonts may be shared and improved in partnership with others. The OFL allows the licensed fonts to be used, studied, modified and redistributed freely as long as they are not sold by themselves. The fonts, including any derivative works, can be bundled, embedded, redistributed and/or sold with any software provided that any reserved names are not used by derivative works. The fonts and derivatives, however, cannot be released under any other type of license. The requirement for fonts to remain under this license does not apply to any document created using the fonts or their derivatives.

DÉFINITIONS

"Font Software" refers to the set of files released by the Copyright Holder(s) under this license and clearly marked as such. This may include source files, build scripts and documentation. "Reserved Font Name" refers to any names specified as such after the copyright statement(s). "Original Version" refers to the collection of Font Software components as distributed by the Copyright Holder(s). "Modified Version" refers to any derivative made by adding to, deleting, or substituting -- in part or in whole -- any of the components of the Original Version, by changing formats or by porting the Font Software to a new environment. "Author" refers to any designer, engineer, programmer, technical writer or other person who contributed to the Font Software.

PERMISSION ET CONDITIONS

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of the Font Software, to use, study, copy, merge, embed, modify, redistribute, and sell modified and unmodified copies of the Font Software, subject to the following conditions: 1) Neither the Font Software nor any of its individual components, in Original or Modified Versions, may be sold by itself. 2) Original or Modified Versions of the Font Software may be bundled, redistributed and/or sold with any software, provided that each copy contains the above copyright notice and this license. These can be included either as stand-alone text files, human-readable headers or in the appropriate machine-readable metadata fields within text or binary files as long as those fields can be easily viewed by the user. 3) No Modified Version of the Font Software may use the Reserved Font Name(s) unless explicit written permission is granted by the corresponding Copyright Holder. This restriction only applies to the primary font name as presented to the users. 4) The name(s) of the Copyright Holder(s) or the Author(s) of the Font Software shall not be used to promote, endorse or advertise any Modified Version, except to acknowledge the contribution(s) of the Copyright Holder(s) and the Author(s) or with their explicit written permission. 5) The Font Software, modified or unmodified, in part or in whole, must be distributed entirely under this license, and must not be distributed under any other license. The requirement for fonts to remain under this license does not apply to any document created using the Font Software.

RÉSILIATION

This license becomes null and void if any of the above conditions are not met.

AVERTISSEMENT

THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT, TRADEMARK, OR OTHER RIGHT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE FONT SOFTWARE OR FROM OTHER DEALINGS IN THE FONT SOFTWARE.

Le logiciel soumis à d'autres conditions de licence

Please refer to Table of Software and respective License terms below, for more detail and corresponding license conditions. Table of Software

Names of Software	Terms and Conditions of the License: See Page
Adobe PDF Scan Library	2
bldimake	5
FreeType	6
Incl	11
JPEG	12
math	13
mDNSResponder	14
mDNSResponder (part of mDNSShared)	18
OpenSSL	19
pcftypes.h	23
snmp	24
xpm	27

Portions use software under the following terms: This product contains either BSAFE and/or TIPEM software by RSA Security Inc. Copyright (c) 1998-2000 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. The end-user documentation included with the redistribution, if any, must include the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/)." Alternately, this acknowledgment may appear in the software itself, if and wherever such third-party acknowledgments normally appear. 4. The names "Xerces" and "Apache Software Foundation" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact [e-mail]. 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "Apache", nor may "Apache" appear in their name, without prior written permission of the Apache Software Foundation. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTYES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTYES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE SOFTWARE FOUNDATION OR ITS COLNUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUsION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the Apache Software Foundation and was originally based on software copyright (c) 1999, International Business Machines, Inc., http://www.ibm.com. For more information on the Apache Software Foundation, please see . March 27, 2003 Portions of this product are based on Modifications created from the Original Code known as the "Sablotron XSLT Processor". The Sablotron XSLT Processor is subject to the Mozilla Public License Version 1.1 (the "License"). You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/ Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the License. The Original Code is the Sablotron XSLT Processor. The Initial Developer of the Original Code is Ginger Alliance Ltd. Portions created by Ginger Alliance are Copyright (C) 2000 Ginger Alliance Ltd. All Rights Reserved. Pursuant to sections 3.2 and 3.6 of the License, the Modifications created by Adobe Systems Incorporated are available as Source Code. The Modifications may be downloaded via the Internet from: http://partners.adobe.com/asn/tech/XML/sablotron/index.jsp The Original Code may be downloaded via the Internet from: https://sourceforge.net/projects/sablotron/ Portions Copyright (c) 1997-1999 Silicon Graphics Computer Systems, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. Silicon Graphics makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty. The Loki Library Portions Copyright (c) 2001 by Andrei Alexandrescu. This code accompanies the book: Alexandrescu, Andrei. "Modern C++ Design: Generic Programming and Design Patterns Applied". Portions Copyright (c) 2001. Addison-Wesley. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. The author or Addison-Wesley Longman make no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty. Updated Information/Additional Third Party Code Information available at http://www.adobe.com/go/thirdparty. Copyright (c) 1985, 1986, 1987, 1988 The Open Group All right Reserved. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTYES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OPEN GROUP BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, the name of The Open Group shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from The Open Group. The FreeType Project LICENSE 2006-Jan-27 Copyright 1996-2002, 2006 by David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg Introduction The FreeType Project is distributed in several archive packages; some of them may contain, in addition to the FreeType font engine, various tools and contributions which rely on, or relate to, the FreeType Project. This license applies to all files found in such packages, and which do not fall under their own explicit license. The license affects thus the FreeType font engine, the test programs, documentation and makefiles, at the very least. This license was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG (Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which all encourage inclusion and use of free software in commercial and freeware products alike. As a consequence, its main points are that: o We don't promise that this software works. However, we will be interested in any kind of bug reports. ('as is' distribution) o You can use this software for whatever you want, in parts or full form, without having to pay us. ('royalty-free' usage) o You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If you use it, or only parts of it, in a program, you must acknowledge somewhere in your documentation that you have used the FreeType code. ('credits') We specifically permit and encourage the inclusion of this software, with or without modifications, in commercial products. We claim all warranties covering The FreeType Project and assume no liability related to The FreeType Project. Finally, many people asked us for a preferred form for a credit/disclaimer to use in compliance with this license. We thus encourage you to use the following text: 111 Portions of this software are copyright © The FreeType Project (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved. 111 Please replace with the value from the FreeType version you actually use. Legal Terms 0. Definitions Throughout this license, the terms `package', `FreeType Project', and `FreeType archive' refer to the set of files originally distributed by the authors (David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg) as the `FreeType Project', be they named as alpha, beta or final release. `You' refers to the licensee, or person using the project, where `using' is a generic term including compiling the project's source code as well as linking it to form a `program' or `executable'. This program is referred to as 'a program using the FreeType engine'. This license applies to all files distributed in the original FreeType Project, including all source code, binaries and documentation, unless otherwise stated in the file in its original, unmodified form as distributed in the original archive. If you are unsure whether or not a particular file is covered by this license, you must contact us to verify this. The FreeType Project is copyright (C) 1996-2000 by David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. All rights reserved except as specified below.

1. Aucune garantie

THE FREETYPE PROJECT IS PROVIDED 'AS IS' WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF THE FREETYPE PROJECT.

2. Redistribution

This license grants a worldwide, royalty-free, perpetual and irrevocable right and license to use, execute, perform, compile, display, copy, create derivative works of, distribute and sublicense the FreeType Project (in both source and object code forms) and derivative works thereof for any purpose; and to authorize others to exercise some or all of the rights granted herein, subject to the following conditions: o Redistribution of source code must retain this license file ('FTL.TXT') unaltered; any additions, deletions or changes to the original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying documentation. The copyright notices of the unaltered, original files must be preserved in all copies of source files. o Redistribution in binary form must provide a disclaimer that states that the software is based in part of the work of the FreeType Team, in the distribution documentation. We also encourage you to put an URL to the FreeType web page in your documentation, though this isn't mandatory. These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on the FreeType Project, not just the unmodified files. If you use our work, you must acknowledge us. However, no fee need be paid to us.

3. Publicité

Neither the FreeType authors and contributors nor you shall use the name of the other for commercial, advertising, or promotional purposes without specific prior written permission. We suggest, but do not require, that you use one or more of the following phrases to refer to this software in your documentation or advertising materials: `FreeType Project', `FreeType Engine', `FreeType library', or `FreeType Distribution'. As you have not signed this license, you are not required to accept it. However, as the FreeType Project is copyrighted material, only this license, or another one contracted with the authors, grants you the right to use, distribute, and modify it. Therefore, by using, distributing, or modifying the FreeType Project, you indicate that you understand and accept all the terms of this license.

4. Contacts

There are two mailing lists related to FreeType: o [e-mail] Discusses general use and applications of FreeType, as well as future and wanted additions to the library and distribution. If you are looking for support, start in this list if you haven't found anything to help you in the documentation. o [e-mail] Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals, design issues, specific licenses, porting, etc. Our home page can be found at http://www.freetype.org --- end of FTL.TXT ---

Incl

Copyright (c) 1994-96 SunSoft, Inc. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTYES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL SUNSOFT INC. OR ITS PARENT COMPANY BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, the name of SunSoft, Inc. shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from SunSoft, Inc.

JPEG

"This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group."

math

Copyright (c) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved. Developed at SunPro, a Sun Microsystems, Inc. business. Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software is freely granted, provided that this notice is preserved. copyright.c:* Copyright (c) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved. math_private.h:* Copyright (c) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved. powf.c:* Copyright (c) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved. scalbnf.c:* Copyright (c) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved. Apache License Version 2.0, January 2004 http://www.apache.org/licenses/ TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION

1. Définitions.

"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document. "Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License. "Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, "control" means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity. "You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License. "Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software source code, documentation source, and configuration files. "Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form, including but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media types. "Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the License, as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example is provided in the Appendix below). "Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof. "Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a Contribution." "Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work. 2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form. 3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed. 4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with or without modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the following conditions: a. You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and b. You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and c. You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and d. If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the License. You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in this License. 5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensee shall be under the terms and conditions of this License, without any additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensee regarding such Contributions. 6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service marks, or product names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file. 7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License. 8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages. 9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

ANNEXE : Comment appliquer la licence Apache à votre travail

To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by brackets "[ ]" replaced with your own identifying information. (Don't include the brackets!) The text should be enclosed in the appropriate comment syntax for the file format. We also recommend that a file or class name and description of purpose be included on the same "printed page" as the copyright notice for easier identification within third-party archives. Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner] Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/License-2.0 Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License. * Copyright (c) 2003-2004, Apple Computer, Inc. All rights reserved. * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, * this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, * this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation * and/or other materials provided with the distribution. * 3. Neither the name of Apple Computer, Inc. ("Apple") nor the names of its * contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this * software without specific prior written permission. * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE AND ITS COLNTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY * EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTYES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED * WARRANTYES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE * DISCLAIMER. IN NO EVENT SHALL APPLE OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY * DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES * (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCEDURE OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; * LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND * ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT * (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS * SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. */ * Copyright (c) 1998-2011 The OpensSL Project. All rights reserved. * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions * are met: * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in * the documentation and/or other materials provided with the * distribution. * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this * software must display the following acknowledgment: * "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project * for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssll.org/" * 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to * endorse or promote products derived from this software without * prior written permission. For written permission, please contact * [e-mail]. * 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" * nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written * permission of the OpenSSL Project. * 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following * acknowledgment: * "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project * for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssll.org/" * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT `AS IS" AND ANY * EXPRESSSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTYES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE * IMPLIED WARRANTYES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR * PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpensSL PROJECT OR * ITS CONTRIButors BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, * SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT * NOT LIMITED TO, PROCEDURE OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; * LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, * STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) *ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED * OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  * This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young * ([e-mail]). This product includes software written by Tim * Hudson ([e-mail]). * */ Original SSLeay License /* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([e-mail]) * All rights reserved. * * This package is an SSL implementation written * by Eric Young ([e-mail]). * The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. * This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as * the following conditions are ahead to. The following conditions * apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, * Ihash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation * included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms * except that the holder is Tim Hudson ([e-mail]). * Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in * the code are not to be removed. * If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution * as the author of the parts of the library used. * This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or * in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions * are met: * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software * must display the following acknowledgement: * "This product includes cryptographic software written by * Eric Young ([e-mail])" * The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library * being used are not cryptographic related :-). * 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from * the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: * "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([e-mail])" * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG `AS IS' AND * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTYES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE * IMPLIED WARRANTYES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCEDURE OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF * SUCH DAMAGE. * The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or * derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be * copied and put under another distribution licence * [including the GNU Public Licence.] */ Copyright (c) 2000, 2001, 2002 by Francesco Zappa Nardelli Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTYES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. Copyright 1988, 1989 by Carnegie Mellon University

Tous droits réservés

Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific, written prior permission. CMU DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTYES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTYES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS, IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE. /* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([e-mail]) * All rights reserved. * * This package is an SSL implementation written * by Eric Young ([e-mail]). * The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. * This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as * the following conditions are ahead to. The following conditions * apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, * Ihash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation * included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms * except that the holder is Tim Hudson ([e-mail]). * Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in * the code are not to be removed. * If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution * as the author of the parts of the library used. * This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or * in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions * are met: * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software * must display the following acknowledgement: * "This product includes cryptographic software written by * Eric Young ([e-mail])" * The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library * being used are not cryptographic related :-). * 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from * the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: * "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([e-mail])" * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG `AS IS' AND * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE * IMPLIED WARRANTYES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCEDURE OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF * SUCH DAMAGE. * The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or * derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be * copied and put under another distribution licence * [including the GNU Public Licence.] */ Copyright 1988, 1989 by Carnegie Mellon University Copyright 1989 TGV, Incorporated

Tous droits réservés

Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU and TGV not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific, written prior permission. CMU AND TGV DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTYES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTYES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS, IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR TGV BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.

xpm

Copyright (c) 1989-95 GROUPE BULL Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL GROUPE BULL BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, the name of GROUPE BULL shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from GROUPE BULL.